Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMX4070/S2E
MX-3050N/3550N/4050N
MX-3060N/3560N/4060N
MODEL MX-3070N/3570N/4070N
CONTENTS
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
CONTENTS
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)
1. System diagram
MX-PN14
B/C/D MX-3070N MX-3060N MX-3050N
MX-PN15 MX-FN28 PUNCH MODULE MX-UT10
MX-3570N MX-3560N MX-3550N
B/C/D FINISHER (1K) UTILITY TABLE
MX-4070N MX-4060N MX-4050N
PUNCH
MODULE DIGITAL FULL COLOR DIGITAL FULL COLOR
MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MX-FN27 MX-TR19
EXIT TRAY UNIT
INNER FINISHER
MX-FN29
MX-LT10
SADDLE STITCH
FINISHER (1K) LONG PAPER
MX-RB25 FEEDING TRAY
PAPER PASS UNIT
MX-TR20
JOB SEPARATOR
TRAY MX-LC17
MX-PN16 MX-FN30
LARGE CAPACITY
B/C/D FINISHER (3K) TRAY
PUNCH
MODULE
MX-TU16
EXIT TRAY CABINET
MX-FN31
SADDLE STITCH
FINISHER (3K)
MX-4070N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1
D. Engine resolution Heater Service parts
(Scanner section)
MX-xx60/xx70 series
Resolution *1 Copy Writing F. Document feeder
600x600dpi
(1) RSPF
9,600 (equivalent)x600dpi
1,200x1,200dpi (BW only)
Type RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder)
Print Writing
Scan Speed Monochrome (A4/8.5x11) Color (A4/8.5x11)
600x600dpi
9,600 (equivalent)x600dpi Copy Single: Single:
1,200x1,200dpi 80 sheets/minute 41 sheets/minute
(600x300dpi, 4bit) (600x600dpi, 4bit)
Tone (equivalent to Copy Writing
60 sheets/minute Duplex:
256 levels *2) 600x600dpi 4bit
(600x400dpi, 4bit) 20 sheets/minute
9,600(equivalent)x600dpi — 41 sheets/minute (600x600dpi, 4bit)
Print Writing (600x600dpi, 4bit)
PCL 600x600dpi 1bit, 4bit Duplex:
9,600(equivalnet)x600dpi — 25 pages/minute
1,200x1,200dpi 1bit (600x300dpi, 4bit)
PS 600x600dpi 1bit, 4bit 23 pages/minute
9,600(equivalnet)x600dpi — (600x400dpi, 4bit)
20 pages/minute
1,200x1,200dpi 1bit
(600x600dpi, 4bit)
*1: Default resolution is 600dpi Fax Single: N/A
80 sheets/minute
*2: The Dither and Error Diffusion methods using 8bit input will be per- (200x200dpi, 1bit)
formed. Duplex:
MX-xx50 series 25 pages/minute
(200x200dpi, 1bit)
Resolution *1 Copy Writing Internet FAX Single: N/A
600x600dpi 80 sheets/minute
9,600 (equivalent)x600dpi (200x200dpi, 1bit)
Print Writing Duplex:
600x600dpi 25 pages/minute
9,600 (equivalent)x600dpi (200x200dpi, 1bit)
Tone (equivalent to Copy Writing Scanner Single: Single:
256 levels *2) 600x600dpi 4bit 80 sheets/minute 80 sheets/minute
9,600(equivalent)x600dpi — (200x200dpi, 1bit) (200x200dpi, 1bit)
Print Writing Duplex: Duplex:
PCL 600x600dpi 1bit, 4bit 25 pages/minute 25 pages/minute
(200x200dpi, 1bit) (200x200dpi, 1bit)
9,600(equivalnet)x600dpi —
Document setup Upward standard (1toN feeding standard)
PS 600x600dpi 1bit, 4bit
Direction
9,600(equivalnet)x600dpi —
Document standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for random
position feeding)
*1: Default resolution is 600dpi
Document transport Sheet-through method
*2: The Dither and Error Diffusion methods using 8bit input will be per- method
formed. Mix feeding (same Available (Simplex/Duplex)
AB or inch system,
E. Scanner section
same width)
(1) Resolution / Gradation Random feeding Available (Duplex is not available)
(different (Combination allowed: A3&B4, B4&A4R, A4&B5,
Scan Resolution Monochrome Color combination of AB/ B5&A5, 11&8.5-inch.
for Copying (dpi) RSPF model DSPF model RSPF/DSPF inch system, AMS effective. 2-sided scanning is disabled during
OC 600x600dpi 600x600dpi 600x600dpi different width) random feeding.)
(default) (default) Document weight Single Thin paper: 35 - 49g/m2, 9 - 13- lb. Bond
600x400dpi 600x400dpi Plain paper: 50 - 128g/m2, 13 - 32 lb. Bond
600x300dpi *Thin paper mode (36 sheets/minute
RSPF 600x600dpi 600x600dpi (600x300dpi), 28 sheets/minute
600x400dpi (600x400dpi), 19 sheets/minute
— (600x600dpi) (when A4/8.5x11)) is set up
(default)
600x300dpi for the thin paper.
DSPF 600x600dpi 600x600dpi Duplex 50 - 105 g/m2, 13 - 28 lb. Bond
600x400dpi Document capacity Max. 120 sheets (64g/ m2 17 lb. Bond)
— Max. 100 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) or max. 13cm,
(default)
600x300dpi 1/2 inch or less
Exposure Lamp White LED Types of document The following documents are NOT allowed;
Scan Levels 10bit that may not be OHP, second original drawing, tracing paper, carbon
transported paper, thermal paper, wrinkled / broken / torn
(2) Document Glass document, document with cuts and pastes,
documents printed by an ink ribbon, and perforated
Type Fixing Method (Flat bed) document except 2-punched / 3-punched (Perforated
document by punch unit is allowed.)
Scan Range 297x432mm
Paper detection Yes
Original Cover Left back
Standard Location Detectable paper Auto detection
size
Detection Yes
Paper Feeding Right hand feeding
Detection size Auto Detect
Direction
MX-4070N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 2
Stamp Option Stamp Option
Power Source Provided from the main unit Power Source Provided from the main unit
Dimensions W 580 x D 465 x H 155mm, W 22 53/64 x D 18 20/64 x Dimensions H 615 x D 482 x H 159 mm, W 24_1/4 x D 19 x H 2_3/
H 6 7/64inch 8inch
Weight Approx.6.7kg, Approx.14.8lb. Weight Approx.14.8 kg, Approx.32.6 lb.
inch system,
Plain paper 60-105g/m2 16-28 lb. bond Yes Yes
different width)
Recycled Paper Yes Yes
Document weight Single Thin paper: 35 - 49g/m2, 9 - 13- lb. Bond
Colored Paper Yes Yes
Plain paper: 50 - 128g/m2, 13 - 32 lb. Bond
*Thin paper mode (54 sheets/minute Letter head Yes Yes
(600x300dpi), 46 sheets/minute Pre printed Yes Yes
(600x400dpi), 36 sheets/minute Pre Punched Yes Yes
(600x600dpi) (when A4/8.5x11)) is set up Heavy Paper 106-176g/m2 28 lbs bond-65 lbs
Yes Yes
for the thin paper. Cover
Duplex 50 - 128g/m2, 13 - 32 lb. Bond Heavy Paper 177-220g/m2 65 lbs Cover-80 lbs
Yes Yes
Document capacity Max. 180 sheets (64g/ m2 17 lb. Bond) Cover
Max. 150 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) or max. Heavy Paper 221-256g/m2 80 lbs Cover-140 lbs
Yes Yes
19.5mm, 50/64inch or less Index
Types of document The following documents are NOT allowed; Heavy Paper 257-300g/m2140 lbs Index-110 lbs
Yes Yes
that may not be OHP, second original drawing, tracing paper, carbon Cover
transported paper, thermal paper, wrinkled / broken / torn Embossed paper - Yes
document, document with cuts and pastes, Envelope - Yes
documents printed by an ink ribbon, and perforated Transparency - Yes
document except 2-punched / 3-punched (Perforated
Label - Yes
document by punch unit is allowed.)
Tab Paper - Yes
Paper detection Yes
Glossy Paper - Yes
Detectable paper Auto detection
User setting 1-7 Yes Yes
size
Paper Feeding Right hand feeding
Direction
MX-4070N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 3
Multi Ethernet 1 port
Paper feed section Tray1
Bypass Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX,
SRA3 320x450 Yes Yes 1000Base-T
Paper Size
MX-4070N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 4
HOST I/F USB 2.0 Type A - Connect the module to MFP’s 3. Printer function
internal USB I/F
DEVICE I/F IEEE802.11 n/g/b A. Printer driver supported OS
Antenna type Integrated antenna
Access mode Infrastructure mode, Software AP mode Custom
Custom
Security WEP, WPA/WPA2-mixed PSK, WPA/WPA2-mixed OS PCL6 PPD PC-Fax TWAIN
PS
EAP*,WPA2 PSA,WPA2 EAP* SPDL2-c
*Not applicable to access point mode Vista CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows
Vista 64 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
L. Warm-up time Server 2008 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2008
CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Warm up time Main power SW on*1 10 sec x 64
Sub Power SW on*1 10 sec Windows 7 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Availability of Preheat mode Yes Windows 7
CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Jam recovery time 10 sec x 64
Windows 8 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
*1: Result may change depending on the environmental condition. Windows 8
CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
x 64
M. Power source
Windows 8.1 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
100V 200V Windows 8.1
CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
x 64
Voltage / Current 110 - 127V 12A 220-240V 8 A
Server 2012
Frequency 60Hz 50/60Hz CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
x 64
Power source cord Fixed type (Direct) Inlet type
X10.4 No CD-ROM No No No
Mac
Power switch 2 switches
X10.5 No CD-ROM No No No
Primary switch: in the front cover
Secondary switch (momentary SW): on the operation X10.6 No CD-ROM No No No
panel X10.7 No CD-ROM No No No
X10.8 No CD-ROM No No No
N. Power consumption X10.9 No CD-ROM No No No
X10.10 No CD-ROM No No No
100V 200V
Max. rated power 1.44 kW 1.84 kW B. PDL emulationFont
consumption*1
Fax waiting power Yes No PDL (command) Pre-installed font Optional Font
consumption is 1W or less/ (Except when using PCL5c/PCL6 STD European outline font Barcode font
*Condition of Standing by Fax/NW compatible =80 styles =28 styles
Network: simultaneously.) Line printer font (BMP)
Connect with TCP/IP =1 style
protocol only. Genuine Postscript3 STD* European outline font
—
Time to move into Preheat 1 minute (Default) =139 styles
mode Font for List Print STD Arfic mobile font
—
Recovery time from Preheat 6 seconds Scalable font
mode
Time to move into Sleep 1 minute (Default) Europe: 11 minutes *Option for MX-xx50 series
mode Other: 1minute
MX-4070N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 5
B. Support image Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Format / Selection of image quality N/A Halftone Halftone
Mode Compression Item (B&W only) (B&W only)
method ON/OFF ON/OFF
Scanner File format TIFF, PDF, PDF/A-1b, PDF/A-1a, Encrypted
(Mono 2 PDF, XPS, Searchable PDF, Office file (pptx, 5. Dimension and weight
gradation) xlsx, docx), Text file (TXT) (UTF-8), Rich text
file (RTF)
File format Color TIFF, JPEG, PDF, PDF/A-1b, PDF/A-1a, Outer dimensions DSPF model:
(Color/ Encrypted PDF, XPS, Searchable PDF, Office (WxDxH) 616 x 660 x 838 (mm)
Grayscale) file (pptx, xlsx, docx), Text file (TXT) (UTF-8), 24.17/64 x 25.63/64 x 33 (inch)
Rich text file (RTF), Compact PDF(*) RSPF model:
608 x 650 x 834 (mm)
Compression Non-compression, G3 (1-dimentional)= MH
23.15/16 x 25.19/32 x 32.27/32 (inch)
method (Modified Huffman), G4= MMR (Modified MR)
(Mono 2 Dimensions occupied DSPF model: 1009 x 659 x 838 (mm) when
gradation) by machine extending bypass tray
RSPF model: 1003 x 650 x 834 (mm) when
Compression JPEG (High/Middle/Low), Black Letter
extending bypass tray
method Emphasis
(Color/ Weight (Not including DSPF model: 86.7 kg 191.2 lb
Grayscale) consumables. Including RSPF model: 78.5 kg 173.1 lb
photoconductor and
Internet File format TIFF-FX(TIFF-F / TIFF-S)
developer.)
Fax (Monochrome)
Direct Compression G3 (1-dimentional)= MH (Modified Huffman),
SMTP method G4 = MMR (Modified MR) 6. Environmental conditions
(Monochrome)
Fax Compression MH/ MR/ MMR/JBIG
method (Humidity)
(Monochrome)
85%
File per page (Setting of the number of pages available)
60%
* Option for MX-xx50 series
(2) Resolution
Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Halftone reproduction Equivalent to <- <-
256
gradations
Exposure Auto Yes <- <-
Adjustment Manual 5 levels <- <-
Original Text Yes N/A N/A
document Text / Photo Yes N/A N/A
type Text / Printed Yes N/A N/A
(Selectable photo
in manual Photo Yes N/A N/A
mode)
Printed photo Yes N/A N/A
Map Yes N/A N/A
Magical scan (Area division + Yes N/A N/A
Suppress Background)
MX-4070N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 6
MX-4070N
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS Service Manual
Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Toner cartridge MX-60NT-BA Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 40K 10 *Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
(Black)
Toner cartridge MX-60NT-CA Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 24K 10
(Cyan)
Toner cartridge MX-60NT-MA Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 24K 10
(Magenta)
Toner cartridge MX-60NT-YA Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 24K 10
(Yellow)
Developer MX-60NV-BA Developer (Black developer) 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Black) rotation 400K
Maximum printable number
460K
Developer MX-60NV-SA Developer 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Cyan/ (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) rotation 300K
Magenta/ (3 colors/set) Maximum printable number
Yellow) 340K
Drum MX-60NR-SA Drum 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
rotation BK:200K
CL:150K
Maximum printable number
BK:230K
CL:170K
Drum unit MX-40NU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
(Process unit+Drum) rotation BK:200K
Color identification seal (C/M/Y/K) 1 each 1 CL:150K
Charger cleaner 1 Maximum printable number
BK:230K
CL:170K
Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Toner cartridge MX-60GT-BA Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 40K 10 *Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
(Black)
Toner cartridge MX-60GT-CA Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 24K 10
(Cyan)
Toner cartridge MX-60GT-MA Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 24K 10
(Magenta)
Toner cartridge MX-60GT-YA Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 24K 10
(Yellow)
Developer MX-60GV-BA Developer (Black developer) 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Black) rotation 400K
Maximum printable number
460K
Developer MX-60GV-SA Developer 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Cyan/ (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) rotation 300K
Magenta/ (3 colors/set) Maximum printable number
Yellow) 340K
Drum MX-60GR-SA Drum 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
rotation BK:200K
CL:150K
Maximum printable number
BK:230K
CL:170K
Drum unit MX-40GU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
(Process unit+Drum) rotation BK:200K
Color identification seal (C/M/Y/K) 1 each 1 CL:150K
Charger cleaner 1 Maximum printable number
BK:230K
CL:170K
Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Toner cartridge MX-60AT-BA Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 40K 10 *Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
(Black)
Toner cartridge MX-60AT-CA Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 24K 10
(Cyan)
Toner cartridge MX-60AT-MA Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 24K 10
(Magenta)
Toner cartridge MX-60AT-YA Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 24K 10
(Yellow)
Developer MX-60AV-BA Developer (Black developer) 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Black) rotation 400K
Maximum printable number
460K
Developer MX-60AV-SA Developer 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Cyan/ (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) rotation 300K
Magenta/ (3 colors/set) Maximum printable number
Yellow) 340K
Drum MX-60AR-SA Drum 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
rotation BK:200K
CL:150K
Maximum printable number
BK:230K
CL:170K
Drum unit MX-40AU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
(Process unit+Drum) rotation BK:200K
Color identification seal (C/M/Y/K) 1 each 1 CL:150K
Charger cleaner 1 Maximum printable number
BK:230K
CL:170K
Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Toner cartridge MX-60FT-BA Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 40K 10 *Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
(Black)
Toner cartridge MX-60FT-CA Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 24K 10
(Cyan)
Toner cartridge MX-60FT-MA Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 24K 10
(Magenta)
Toner cartridge MX-60FT-YA Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 24K 10
(Yellow)
Developer MX-60FV-BA Developer (Black developer) 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Black) rotation 400K
Maximum printable number
460K
Developer MX-60FV-SA Developer 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Cyan/ (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) rotation 300K
Magenta/ (3 colors/set) Maximum printable number
Yellow) 340K
Drum MX-60FR-SA Drum 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
rotation BK:200K
CL:150K
Maximum printable number
BK:230K
CL:170K
Drum unit MX-40FU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
(Process unit+Drum) rotation BK:200K
Color identification seal (C/M/Y/K) 1 each 1 CL:150K
Charger cleaner 1 Maximum printable number
BK:230K
CL:170K
Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Toner cartridge MX-60NT-BA Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 40K 10 *Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
(Black)
Toner cartridge MX-60NT-CA Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 24K 10
(Cyan)
Toner cartridge MX-60NT-MA Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 24K 10
(Magenta)
Toner cartridge MX-60NT-YA Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 24K 10
(Yellow)
Developer MX-60NV-BA Developer (Black developer) 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Black) rotation 500K
Maximum printable number
570K
Developer MX-60NV-SA Developer 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Cyan/ (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) rotation 400K
Magenta/ (3 colors/set) Maximum printable number
Yellow) 460K
Drum MX-60NR-SA Drum 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
rotation BK:250K
CL:200K
Maximum printable number
BK:285K
CL:230K
Drum unit MX-40NU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
(Process unit+Drum) rotation BK:250K
Color identification seal (C/M/Y/K) 1 each 1 CL:200K
Charger cleaner 1 Maximum printable number
BK:285K
CL:230K
Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Toner cartridge MX-60GT-BA Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 40K 10 *Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
(Black)
Toner cartridge MX-60GT-CA Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 24K 10
(Cyan)
Toner cartridge MX-60GT-MA Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 24K 10
(Magenta)
Toner cartridge MX-60GT-YA Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 24K 10
(Yellow)
Developer MX-60GV-BA Developer (Black developer) 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Black) rotation 500K
Maximum printable number
570K
Developer MX-60GV-SA Developer 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Cyan/ (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) rotation 400K
Magenta/ (3 colors/set) Maximum printable number
Yellow) 460K
Drum MX-60GR-SA Drum 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
rotation BK:250K
CL:200K
Maximum printable number
BK:285K
CL:230K
Drum unit MX-40GU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
(Process unit+Drum) rotation BK:250K
Color identification seal (C/M/Y/K) 1 each 1 CL:200K
Charger cleaner 1 Maximum printable number
BK:285K
CL:230K
Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Toner cartridge MX-60AT-BA Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 40K 10 *Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
(Black)
Toner cartridge MX-60AT-CA Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 24K 10
(Cyan)
Toner cartridge MX-60AT-MA Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 24K 10
(Magenta)
Toner cartridge MX-60AT-YA Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 24K 10
(Yellow)
Developer MX-60AV-BA Developer (Black developer) 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Black) rotation 500K
Maximum printable number
570K
Developer MX-60AV-SA Developer 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Cyan/ (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) rotation 400K
Magenta/ (3 colors/set) Maximum printable number
Yellow) 460K
Drum MX-60AR-SA Drum 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
rotation BK:250K
CL:200K
Maximum printable number
BK:285K
CL:230K
Drum unit MX-40AU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
(Process unit+Drum) rotation BK:250K
Color identification seal (C/M/Y/K) 1 each 1 CL:200K
Charger cleaner 1 Maximum printable number
BK:285K
CL:230K
Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Toner cartridge MX-60FT-BA Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 40K 10 *Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
(Black)
Toner cartridge MX-60FT-CA Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 24K 10
(Cyan)
Toner cartridge MX-60FT-MA Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 24K 10
(Magenta)
Toner cartridge MX-60FT-YA Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 24K 10
(Yellow)
Developer MX-60FV-BA Developer (Black developer) 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Black) rotation 500K
Maximum printable number
570K
Developer MX-60FV-SA Developer 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Cyan/ (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) rotation 400K
Magenta/ (3 colors/set) Maximum printable number
Yellow) 460K
Drum MX-60FR-SA Drum 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
rotation BK:250K
CL:200K
Maximum printable number
BK:285K
CL:230K
Drum unit MX-40FU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
(Process unit+Drum) rotation BK:250K
Color identification seal (C/M/Y/K) 1 each 1 CL:200K
Charger cleaner 1 Maximum printable number
BK:285K
CL:230K
Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Fusing belt kit MX-607FB Fusing belt unit 1 250K 4
Pressure roller kit MX-607LH Pressure roller 1 250K 10
Primary transfer belt kit MX-607B1 Primary transfer belt unit 1 250K 10
Primary transfer blade kit MX-607TL Primary transfer blade 1 250K 10
Cleaning roller 1
PTC kit MX-607CU PTC unit 1 250K 10
Secondary transfer roller kit MX-607U2 Secondary transfer roller 1 250K 10
Filter kit MX-607FL Ozone filter 1 300K 10
Toner collection container MX-607HB Toner collection container (with LSU cleaner x 2) 1 50K 10 5% coverage for
each color, 30%
color ratio
Main charger kit MX-407MK Main charger unit 1 Drum rotation 10 Maximum Printable
Cleaning gum AS 1 1350K Number
Cleaning blade 1 230K (BK)/ 170K
(CL)
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20
Staple cartridge MX-SC11 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20
Staple cartridge MX-SC12 Staple cartridge 4 2000 times x 4 32
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge 2 20
Primary transfer belt unit MX-607U1 Primary transfer belt unit 1 1
Fusing unit MX-407FU1 Fusing unit (100V series) 1 1
Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Fusing belt kit MX-607FB Fusing belt unit 1 250K 4
Pressure roller kit MX-607LH Pressure roller 1 250K 10
Primary transfer belt kit MX-607B1 Primary transfer belt unit 1 250K 10
Primary transfer blade kit MX-607TL Primary transfer blade 1 250K 10
Cleaning roller 1
PTC kit MX-607CU PTC unit 1 250K 10
Secondary transfer roller kit MX-607U2 Secondary transfer roller 1 250K 10
Filter kit MX-607FL Ozone filter 1 300K 10
Toner collection container MX-607HB Toner collection container (with LSU cleaner x 2) 1 50K 10 5% coverage for
each color, 30%
color ratio
Main charger kit MX-407MK Main charger unit 1 Drum rotation 10 Maximum Printable
Cleaning gum AS 1 1350K Number
Cleaning blade 1 230K (BK)/ 170K
(CL)
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20
Staple cartridge MX-SC11 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20
Staple cartridge MX-SC12 Staple cartridge 4 2000 times x 4 32
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge 2 20
Primary transfer belt unit MX-607U1 Primary transfer belt unit 1 1
Fusing unit MX-407FU Fusing unit (200V series) 1 1
Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Fusing belt kit MX-607FB Fusing belt unit 1 250K 4
Pressure roller kit MX-607LH Pressure roller 1 250K 10
Primary transfer belt kit MX-607B1 Primary transfer belt unit 1 250K 10
Primary transfer blade kit MX-607TL Primary transfer blade 1 250K 10
Cleaning roller 1
PTC kit MX-607CU PTC unit 1 250K 10
Secondary transfer roller kit MX-607U2 Secondary transfer roller 1 250K 10
Filter kit MX-607FL Ozone filter 1 300K 10
Toner collection container MX-607HB Toner collection container (with LSU cleaner x 2) 1 50K 10 5% coverage for
each color, 30%
color ratio
Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Fusing belt kit MX-607FB Fusing belt unit 1 300K 4
Pressure roller kit MX-607LH Pressure roller 1 300K 10
Primary transfer belt kit MX-607B1 Primary transfer belt unit 1 300K 10
Primary transfer blade kit MX-607TL Primary transfer blade 1 300K 10
Cleaning roller 1
PTC kit MX-607CU PTC unit 1 300K 10
Secondary transfer roller kit MX-607U2 Secondary transfer roller 1 300K 10
Filter kit MX-607FL Ozone filter 1 300K 10
Toner collection container MX-607HB Toner collection container (with LSU cleaner x 2) 1 50K 10 5% coverage for
each color, 30%
color ratio
Main charger kit MX-407MK Main charger unit 1 Drum rotation 10 Maximum Printable
Cleaning gum AS 1 1350K Number
Cleaning blade 1 35cpm: 230K (BK)/
170K (CL)
40cpm: 285K (BK)/
230K (CL)
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20
Staple cartridge MX-SC11 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20
Staple cartridge MX-SC12 Staple cartridge 4 2000 times x 4 32
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge 2 20
Primary transfer belt unit MX-607U1 Primary transfer belt unit 1 1
Fusing unit MX-407FU1 Fusing unit (100V series) 1 1
Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Fusing belt kit MX-607FB Fusing belt unit 1 300K 4
Pressure roller kit MX-607LH Pressure roller 1 300K 10
Primary transfer belt kit MX-607B1 Primary transfer belt unit 1 300K 10
Primary transfer blade kit MX-607TL Primary transfer blade 1 300K 10
Cleaning roller 1
PTC kit MX-607CU PTC unit 1 300K 10
Secondary transfer roller kit MX-607U2 Secondary transfer roller 1 300K 10
Filter kit MX-607FL Ozone filter 1 300K 10
Toner collection container MX-607HB Toner collection container (with LSU cleaner x 2) 1 50K 10 5% coverage for
each color, 30%
color ratio
Main charger kit MX-407MK Main charger unit 1 Drum rotation 10 Maximum Printable
Cleaning gum AS 1 1350K Number
Cleaning blade 1 35cpm: 230K (BK)/
170K (CL)
40cpm: 285K (BK)/
230K (CL)
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20
Staple cartridge MX-SC11 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20
Staple cartridge MX-SC12 Staple cartridge 4 2000 times x 4 32
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge 2 20
Primary transfer belt unit MX-607U1 Primary transfer belt unit 1 1
Fusing unit MX-407FU Fusing unit (200V series) 1 1
Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Fusing belt kit MX-607FB Fusing belt unit 1 300K 4
Pressure roller kit MX-607LH Pressure roller 1 300K 10
Primary transfer belt kit MX-607B1 Primary transfer belt unit 1 300K 10
Primary transfer blade kit MX-607TL Primary transfer blade 1 300K 10
Cleaning roller 1
PTC kit MX-607CU PTC unit 1 300K 10
Secondary transfer roller kit MX-607U2 Secondary transfer roller 1 300K 10
Filter kit MX-607FL Ozone filter 1 300K 10
Toner collection container MX-607HB Toner collection container (with LSU cleaner x 2) 1 50K 10 5% coverage for
each color, 30%
color ratio
Main charger kit MX-407MK Main charger unit 1 Drum rotation 10 Maximum Printable
Cleaning gum AS 1 1350K Number
Cleaning blade 1 35cpm: 230K (BK)/
170K (CL)
40cpm: 285K (BK)/
230K (CL)
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20
Staple cartridge MX-SC11 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20
Staple cartridge MX-SC12 Staple cartridge 4 2000 times x 4 32
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge 2 20
Primary transfer belt unit MX-607U1 Primary transfer belt unit 1 1
Fusing unit MX-407FU Fusing unit (200V series) 1 1
Developer
Standard printable Maximum Rotation
number printable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
number
Mono Color Mono Color Mono Color The lot number is comprised of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the con-
30 ppm tent as follows.
400K 300K 460K 340K 2700K 2700K
machine
The number is printed on the flange on the front side.
35 ppm
400K 300K 460K 340K 2700K 2700K
machine
B. Developer
The lot number is 8 digits (BK) and 5 digits (CMY) in length. Each digit 5. Environmental conditions
indicates the content as follows.
The number is printed on the back side of the developer bag.
[BK] (Humidity)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
* Optional
19
20
21
15 16 17 18
* Optional
1 2 3 4 5
6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12
* Optional
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
[Home Screen] key You can change the angle of the touch panel.
Use your finger to touch the [Home Screen] key. If you use a pen or
other tool to touch the key, it may not operate properly. Risk of mal-
functioning if you use with jewelry or other accessories.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SCOV SPRDMD
SPPD2 STUD
SPED1 SPLS2
SPPD1
SPLS1
STLD SPWS
SPED2
SPPD3 SPOD
SOCD SPPD5
SPPD4
SLCOV
STRC
SPUFM
STRRC
SPFC
SRRC
SPFFAN
LED PWB
5 4 3 2 1
6 7 8 9 10 11
SCOV
SPPD1 SPED SPLS2
SPLS1
SPPD2
SPWS
SOCD
SPPD3 SPPD4
SPFM
SRRC
SPUM
SPRS
MHPS OCSW
TFD2 POD4
SHPOS
POD2 APPD1
POD1 HLPCD
TH_US2
DSW_ADU
C1PFD
LSU_TH1 C1PFPD
BD C1LUD
LSU_TH2 C1PED
C1SS
C1SPD DSW_C1
MSW
DSW_R
DSW_F
POGS
ADUGS
1TURC_1
1TURC_2
2TURC
MPFS
HPFC
MPUC
C1PUC
CPFC1
MIM
POM
SBM TNM_Y
OSM
TNM_M
ADUM1
TNM_C
PRM TNM_K
PGM
FUM
ADUM2
DM_CL
DM_K
RRM PFM
CPFM
C1LUM
33
32
31
30
23
22
20
21
19
18
24
25
36
35
34
26
27
29
10
9
11
28
8
7
6
1
2
16 17 14 15 12 13 3 5 4
CL_ON
(for RSPF)
CL_ON
(for DSPF)
DL_Y
DL_M
DL_C
CCFT
DL_K
HL_UM/US
HL_LM
1
PSFM
PROFM1
FUFM
POFM2
2
PROFM2
5
1 2
4 7
8
9
6
3 10
17
18
19
20
21
11
22
12
23
24
13
25
14
15
16
TS US
TS UM
TS LM
DC PWB AC PWB
F2
F101
F102
F1
F401
F301
F605
F604
F603
F602
F601
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
Perform only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.
adjustment actual When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
Item/Display (mode) mode
range voltage
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
MIDDLE A MIDDLE Main charger K 50 - 850 –592V
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
SPEED grid voltage 5V
tain relationship.
GB_K (middle
B MIDDLE speed mode) C 50 - 850 –592V
SPEED 5V
GB_C
Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a digital multi
C MIDDLE M 50 - 850 –592V
meter in this model, a judgement of the output must be made by
SPEED 5V
checking the print image quality
GB_M
D MIDDLE Y 50 - 850 –592V
SPEED 5V 2-B Developing bias voltage adjustment
GB_Y This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
LOW A LOW Main charger K 50 - 850 –583V
• When the MC PWB has been replaced
SPEED grid voltage 5V
GB_K (low speed • U2 trouble has occurred
B LOW mode) C 50 - 850 –583V • The PCU PWB has been replaced
SPEED 5V
• The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced
GB_C
C LOW M 50 - 850 –583V 1) Enter the Sim 8-1 mode
SPEED 5V 2) Select an output mode and an item to be adjusted.
GB_M
D LOW Y 50 - 850 –583V Adjustmen Actual
Item/Display (mode) Content
SPEED 5V t range voltage
GB_Y MIDDLE A MIDDLE Developing K 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED bias voltage 5V
DVB_K (middle
B MIDDLE speed) C 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED 5V
DVB_C
C MIDDLE M 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED 5V
DVB_M
D MIDDLE Y 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED 5V
DVB_Y
Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a digital multi
meter in this model, a judgement of the output must be made by
checking the print image quality.
Actual
Setting Default
Item/Display Content output
range value
value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary transfer bias color K low speed 0 - 255 85 10 μA
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K adjustment value middle speed 0 - 255 94 12 μA
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C C low speed 0 - 255 85 10 μA
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C middle speed 0 - 255 94 12 μA
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M low speed 0 - 255 85 10 μA
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M middle speed 0 - 255 94 12 μA
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y low speed 0 - 255 85 10 μA
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y middle speed 0 - 255 94 12 μA
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K monochrome K low speed 0 - 255 85 10 μA
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K middle speed 0 - 255 94 12 μA
*Heavy paper 1:106-176g/m2 Heavy paper 2:177-220g/m2 Heavy paper 3:221-256g/m2 Heavy paper 4:257-300g/m2
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK] By setting the value (specified value) the specified output is pro-
key. vided.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the proce-
dure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved. When
[EXECUTE] key is pressed again the output is stopped.
A B
Diagonal Diagonal
About 220mm
line C line D
B-main A-main
When C is greater that Din the method 1 or there is some skew In each Y, M and C color print pattern printed separately in the
in some skew in the direction A in the method 2, turn the screw F side and in the R side, note the same print color pattern and
clockwise. check to confirm that the F side and the R side are in the same
When C is smaller that D in the method 1 or there is some condition.
skew in the direction B in the method 2, turn the screw coun- Rough adjustment pattern check:
terclockwise. Check the sub scan rough adjustment color image shift check
Reference of the rotation amount of the skew adjustment section on R side and the F side of each color, use the center
screw position of the black scale as the reference and check the bal-
In case of the method1, 0.8mm / 1.5 rotations ance in shifts of the color image line positions in the positive
In case of the method2, 0.5mm / 1.5 rotations and the negative directions. The balance in the R side must be
the same as that in the F side
Repeat the procedures 2)to 6).
Fine adjustment pattern check:
After completion of the black image skew adjustment, go to the
procedure 7). Check the square frames on the R side and the F side of each
color (normally five sections of high density can be seen)
6) Perform the same procedure as 1) and 2).
Check the sub scanning direction position of the center area of
7) Check the printed color image for any skew.
high density (one of the above five section). These must be on
If the difference between the shift amounts on the F and R the same position on the R side and the F side.
sides is within ±1 scale of the fine adjustment check scale.
In this case, use the sub scan direction color image shift check
there is no need to perform the adjustment. Measure the skew
scale (five adjustment) as the reference. Visually check the
amount from the print patterns on the front and rear sides of
color density and make the darkest section as the center and
each color.
use it as the read value of the shift amount. Check that the dif-
ference in the center position of the dark density section is
within ±1 step. The positional relations of the front and the rear
frame of the print color patterns of a same color are compared.
There is no need that all the colors are in the same state. Com-
pare only the positional relations of color patterns of a same
color. If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the follow-
ing procedure.
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the 2/3 mirror unit so that it is in contact with two stoppers on
the front and the rear frames simultaneously.
5) Screw edge face of scanner unit and right edge face of the
frame together on both sides to fix the scanner unit while this
unit is in contact with both stoppers.
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the 2/3 mirror
unit to bring it into contact with the stopper.
When the 2/3 mirror unit is in contact with the two stoppers on
the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.
L L
L = 10mm
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition:
_DE_PP
A B
a b
Remove the left cover of the operation panel. Loosen the scan-
ner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the right
and the left heights of the scanner rail.
1.0
If the copy image is not in the above state, perform the proce-
2) Visually check to insure that the clearance A is 1 mm or less
dure 3).
and the clearance B is 0 mm (in contact).
3) Open the RSPF unit, and loosen the fixing screw of the hinge.
If the above requirement is not met, do step 3).
1mm
0mm B
L
4) Slide the RSPF unit in the arrow direction to make the skew
adjustment.
5) Make a copy again and measure a and b on the copied test
chart. Repeat procedures 2) to 5) until the condition (a - b = ± 1
mm or less) is satisfied.
A B
a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition:
_FG_PP
C D
7-C DSPF skew adjustment
(Front surface mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: c d
• The DSPF section has been disassembled.
• When replacing the DSPF unit. [Check Method 2]
• The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images. Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction print
1) Make an adjustment chart. line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within 1.0 mm.
Print the self print pattern (grid pattern) of SIM64-2 in the
duplex print mode.
SIM64-2 set value
1.0
A=1, B=1, C=254, D=255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A' and 'B' to the
front and rear side of leading edge on front and back side of A
the paper.
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition:
_DE_PP
A B
a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition:
_FG_PP
C D
c d
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
left] [Check Method 2]
If a < b, then turn counterclockwise the DSPF skew adjusting Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction print
screw. line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within 1.0 mm.
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
right]
If a > b, then turn clockwise the DSPF skew adjusting screw.
1.0
Repeat steps 2) to 5) until an acceptable result is obtained.
10mm 10mm
2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.
images.
Scale
10 20 90 100 110
(Original)
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following
formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%)
(Example 2) Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
Copy B If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
10 20 90 100 110
(Longer than (100 ± 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
the original)
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
cedures.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified 5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
range (100 ± 0.8%). 6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 the scroll key.
± 0.8%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following SPF(MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Front surface)
procedure.
SPFB(MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. (Back surface)
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
7) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.02%
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio
8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
is within the specified range (100 ± 0.8%).
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
9-C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(main scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• When the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
• When the EEPROM on the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
10mm #
$
50
100
10
original
150
50
copy
150
200
original copy
a
Draw arrows.
2) Enter the SIM 50-6 mode.
DSPF
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Copy image
range value
Front surface document scan
A SIDE1 1 - 99 50
position adjustment (CCD)
Back surface document scan
B SIDE2 1 - 99 50
position adjustment (CCD)
LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge Image loss
C 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) image loss amount setting 4.0±1.0 mm
FRONT_REAR Front surface side image loss
D 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) amount setting If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge procedure.
E 0 - 99 40
(SIDE1) image loss amount setting 3) Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key, and
LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge press [OK] key.
F 0 - 99 40
(SIDE2) image loss amount setting
Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the pre-
FRONT_REAR Back surface side image loss
G
(SIDE2) amount setting
0 - 99 20 sumed image lead edge.
TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge image SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustment
H 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) loss amount setting SIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment
RSPF When the adjustment value is increased, the print image posi-
tion is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper.
Item/Display Content Setting Default Perform the procedures of 2) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
range value obtained.
A SIDE1 Front surface document scan 1 - 99 50
position adjustment (CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface document scan 1 - 99 50
position adjustment (CCD)
C LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) image loss amount setting
D FRONT_REAR Front surface side image loss 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) amount setting
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 40
(SIDE1) image loss amount setting
F LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) image loss amount setting
4.0±1.0mm
(Color copy)
Patch 1 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
Patch 2 is copied.
(Black-and-white copy)
Patch 2 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
Patch 3 is copied.
(Color copy)
Solid density
Solid density
PRINTER CALIBRATION
Type Descriptions
A Factory color balance There are three kinds of the color balance target, and each of them is specified according to the machine design. Use SIM
(gamma) target 63-11 to select one of them as the factory target. The default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1) which
emphasizes color reproduction.
B Service color balance This target is used when the user requests to customize the color balance to user's desired level. In advance, the user's
(gamma) target unique color balance must be registered as the service color balance target. The above registration (setting) is made by
the serviceman with SIM 46-21 to adjust the color balance and with SIM 63-7 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user executes the color balance adjustment. When, therefore, the service color
balance target is changed, the color balance target of the user's color balance adjustment is also changed. When,
however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to the factory color balance target set with SIM 63-11. The default
setting (factory setting) of the color balance is same as the factory color balance target. (Emphasized on color
reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the color balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the color balance to the
factory color balance target.
C User color balance (gamma) Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma) target When the service color balance target is changed, this
target color balance target is also changed accordingly.
• Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the copy
color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/46-24)
SIM63-8
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF2) target for the user color balance adjustment
• Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust- If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
ment ((Automatic adjustment) SIM 46-74/46-24). required.
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
can be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7. ual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to to register the service color balance target data by using adjust-
the same balance as the factory color balance target set with ment pattern that was printed in this mode.
SIM 63-11.
• Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for printing the
the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM adjustment pattern by SIM 46-21.
46-74/46-24). When, therefore, the service color balance target
is changed, this target is also changed accordingly.
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the
purpose of registration)
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
customized with SIM 46-21.
a. Setting procedure This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 46-21 to a unique color balance requested
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
the service color balance target)
get with SIM 63-7.
1) Use SIM 46-21 (Copy color balance adjustment (manual
When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 63-11,
adjustment) mode) to print color patch image (adjustment pat- be sure to execute this procedure.
tern).
1) Enter the SIM 63-8 mode.
In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for printing
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and [YES] key.
the adjustment pattern by SIM 46-21.
The service color balance target and the color balance target
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an balance as the factory color balance target.
adjustment.
Type Descriptions
A Factory color balance There are three kinds of the color balance targets, and each of them is specified according to the machine design. Use
(gamma) target SIM 67-26 to select one of them as the factory target. The default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
which emphasizes color reproduction.
B Service color balance This target is used when the user requests to customize the color balance to user's desired level. In advance, the user's
(gamma) target unique color balance must be registered as the service color balance target. The above registration (setting) is made by
the serviceman with SIM 67-25 to adjust the color balance and with SIM 67-27 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user executes the color balance adjustment. When, therefore, the service color
balance target is changed, the color balance target of the user's color balance adjustment is also changed. When,
however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set to the factory color balance target set with SIM 67-26. The
default setting (factory setting) of the color balance is same as the factory color balance target. (Emphasized on color
reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the color balance, be sure to use SIM 67-28 to set the color balance to the
factory color balance target.
C User color balance (gamma) Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma) target When the service color balance target is changed, this
target color balance target is also changed accordingly.
• Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/76-24)
• Factory target in the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/67-24)
By use of SIM 67-26, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM67-28
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF2) target for the user color balance adjustment
• Service color balance target in the printer color balance adjust- If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
ment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/67-24). required.
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
can be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27. ual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set to register the service color balance target data by use of the
to the same balance as the factory color balance target set with printed adjustment pattern.
SIM 67-26.
• Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for printing the
the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) adjustment pattern by SIM 67-25.
(SIM 46-74/67-24). When, therefore, the service color balance
target is changed, this target is also changed accordingly.
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the
purpose of registration)
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
customized with SIM 67-25.
Start
Copy color balance and density/Printer color balance and density adjustment
(automatic density). (SIM46-74)
Enter the SIM46-74 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the FACTORY target or the
SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the FACTORY target or the
SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1) Automatic adjustment color balance target change
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4) Change the color balance and density target. (SIM63-11)
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the halftone image correction is automatically
performed.) (*2) NO
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the patch color YES
balance and density in the process gray. (If the color balance is slightly shifted to
Magenta, it is properly adjusted.)
YES
Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic
adjustment). (SIM67-24)
End
Automatic color balance target change
PRINTER CALIBRATION
PRINTER CALIBRATION
M %
C $M
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
Bk
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q 1) The max. density section is not blurred.
Start
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
Press [OK] key, and the initial setting of the halftone image correction
is automatically performed. (*3) Automatic color balance target change
End
Start
YES
Cancel the SIM46-21 mode.
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result with the
test chart. (*1)
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11)
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check
the color balance and density.
YES
Check to confirm that the initial setting of the halftone image correction is
properly set. (*2)
End
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust- "LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust-
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH" ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
mode and change the adjustment value. mode and change the adjustment value.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
density is decreased. density is decreased.
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result. 4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result. mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor- Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check- mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained. ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
• When it is required to change the gamma in each copy mode. AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1 Japan:MODE1
• When there is request from the user. MODE2 Overseas:MODE2
MODE3
1) Enter the SIM 46-16 mode.
AE_STOP_ Auto B/W exposure REALTIME PRESCAN
2) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll COPY Stop (for copy) STOP
key.
PRESCAN
AE_STOP_ Auto B/W exposure ON ON
Density level Adjustment
Item/Display Default FAX Stop (for FAX) OFF
(Point) Value range
A POINT1 Point1 1 - 999 500 AE_STOP_ Auto B/W exposure REALTIME STOP
SCAN Stop (for scanner) STOP
B POINT2 Point2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point3 1 - 999 500 PRESCAN
D POINT4 Point4 1 - 999 500 AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
setting NORMAL
E POINT5 Point5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 Point6 1 - 999 500 SHARP
G POINT7 Point7 1 - 999 500 AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL FULL
H POINT8 Point8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 Point9 1 - 999 500
J POINT10 Pint10 1 - 999 500
MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
DSPF mode
3 to 7mm
14-D (6)
Document low density image density
reproduction adjustment in the automatic
monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
(No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background
density in monochrome auto copy mode.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
• When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document.
• When there is request from the user.
1) Enter the SIM 46-32 mode.
2) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key.
Reproduced
image
Effect and adverse effect when decreasing the value Effect and adverse effect when increasing the value
[Effect] [Effect]
When black characters are fainted by color shift, etc, the black Colors (of low chroma) which are difficult to be dropped out
area is outputted clearly. can be dropped out.
[Adverse effect] [Adverse effect]
Dropout of color sections becomes difficult. Black characters are fainted or cracked.
Start
*1:
When the color balance and density are customized and
registered as the SERVICE target, select the SERVICE
Are the color balance and NO target.
density at the satisfactory *2:
level? If the initial setting of the halftone image correction is not
properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance and density
cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print engine for
YES any problems.
*3:
If satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
with printer color balance and density adjustment (Manual
End adjustment) (SIM67-25), check the print engine for any
problems.
*4:
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the printed check
pattern, check the print engine for any problems.
14-E (2)
Printer color balance adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
adjust the printer density of C, M, Y and K. This is used at the fol-
lowing situation. When the result of auto adjustment described
above is not existing within the range of reference. When a fine
4) Select [FACTORY] key, and press [EXECUTE] key. adjustment is required. When there is request from the user for
When the color balance is customized with the manual color changing (customizing) the color balance.
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar- not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-
balance, select the service target. ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed efficiency.
and prints the color balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in the procedure 5) is displayed.
PRINTER CALIBRATION
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed.
%
Press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is printed.)
$M
Check the patch color balance and density in the
process gray of the color balance check pattern. CMY
blend
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
Are the color balance 1) The max. density section is not blurred.
NO
and density at the sati-
sfactory level? 2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C and BK is copied.
Setting
Display/Item Content Default
range
A CMY CMY engine maximum 0 0-1 0
0:ENABLE density correction mode
1:DISABLE Enable
CMY engine maximum 1
density correction mode
Disable
DOT_SCREEN1
Adjustment item to improve the color balance ADJ 15 Paper size sensor adjustment
in Dot (High Line Number).
Adjustment item to improve the color balance
DOT_SCREEN2
in Dot (Low Line Number) mode
15-A Manual paper feed tray paper size (width)
Adjustment item to improve the density and sensor adjustment
DOT_SCREEN1_BW gradation in Dot mode of Monochrome High This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
Quality mode
• The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
Adjustment item to improve the density and
DOT_SCREEN2_BW gradation in Dot mode of Monochrome Ultra • The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
Fine mode • U2 trouble has occurred.
Adjustment item to improve the color balance • The PCU PWB has been replaced.
SHIGH
in Super Fine Text mode
• The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Enter the SIM 40-2 mode.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is dis- • When the original size sensor section has been replaced.
played. • When U2 trouble has occurred.
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are • When the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed. • When the EEPROM on the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
15-B DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray document size 16-A Adjust the sensitivity of the original size
(width) sensor adjustment sensor
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: 1) Enter the SIM41-2 mode.
• The DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray section has been disassem- 2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.
bled. With the document cover open, without placing a document on
• The DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced. the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
• When a U2 trouble occurs. 3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
• The scanner PWB has been replaced. [EXECUTE] key.
• The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced. If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT SIZE
PHOTO SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.
1) Enter the SIM 53-6 mode.
Display/Item Content
2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions). OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction
When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds image magnification ratio adjustment (Document
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are table mode)
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis- BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen. ratio adjustment
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen
image magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF/
again. RSPF mode)
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display SETUP/PRINT ADJ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is (each paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
pressed. RESULT Adjustment result display
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such as a DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is
needle or a pin). executed
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 1
4. List of simulation codes (2) List of menu (Maintenance)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 2
(3) List of menu (Adjustment and Settings) SIM
The second
The first menu num SIM Title
SIM menu
The second ber
The first menu num SIM Title 5 Copy 46-21 Color copy gradation manual
menu
ber adjustment
1 Adjustment 1 Positioning 50-1 Copy edge adjustment 44-21 Half tone process control
50-5 Print edge adjustment standard value register setup
50-6 SPF edge adjustment 46-24 Copy gradation auto
50-10 Manual image position adjustment
adjustment 46-54 Copy gradation auto
50-12 Original center offset setup adjustment (at dither)
48-1 Ratio adjustment 63-7 Copy gradation auto
48-5 Motor speed adjustment adjustment target setup:
50-22 Auto adjustment of service
registration & drum position 63-8 Copy gradation auto
50-28 Auto image position adjustment target clear:
adjustment service
2 Image 50-22 Auto adjustment of 63-11 Copy gradation auto
Quality registration & drum position adjustment target select
Automatic 50-20 Registration adjustment 6 Printer 67-24 Printer gradation auto
Adjustment 61-11 Laser power auto correction adjustment
46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto 67-25 Printer gradation manual
adjustment adjustment
3 Image 61-14 Laser power setting collective 67-26 Printer gradation auto
Quality input adjustment target select
Adjustment 61-11 Laser power auto correction 67-27 Printer gradation auto
adjustment target setup:
61-13 Laser power correction data
service
clear
67-28 Printer gradation auto
46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto
adjustment target clear:
adjustment
service
46-54 Copy gradation auto
7 Touch 65-1 Touch panel adjustment
adjustment (at dither)
panel
46-52 Copy gradation data clear (at
8 Function/ 64-2 Self print (B/W) : service
dither)
Option
67-54 Printer gradation auto
settings
adjustment (at dither)
9 Data 1 Counter 22-1 Counter display
67-52 Printer gradation data clear
display display 22-9 Paper feed counter display
(at dither)
22-13 Process cartridge display
2 Process 10-3 Toner cartridge eject sensor
check 2 System/ 22-5 ROM version data display
Version 22-10 Machine system display
25-2 Automatic developer
adjustment 3 List printing 22-6 Data print mode
44-2 Process control gain 23-2 JAM/trouble data print mode
adjustment 4 USB 56-99 Export all log data
46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto storage
adjustment 10 History 1 Date list Use
3 Scanner/ 41-1 PD sensor check SIM
SPF 41-2 Document size photo-sensor
setup
B. List of classic mode
46-9 Exposure adjustment (SFP)
Easy Mode
63-2 Shading execution Adjustment and
53-6 SPF tray adjustment
Maintenance
Installation
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 3
1 : ‘16/Feb.
Easy Mode Easy Mode
Adjustment and
Adjustment and
Maintenance
Maintenance
Installation
Installation
Settings
Settings
Sim Sim
No. No.
3-10 Used to adjust the finisher 4 21-1 Used to set the maintenance cycle 4
4-2 Used to check the operations of the sensors 22-1 Used to check the print count value in each 3-1 1-1 9-1
and detectors in the desk/large capacity tray section and each operation mode
(LCC) and the control circuit of those 22-2 Used to check the total number of misfeed
4-3 Used to check the operations of the loads in and troubles
the desk/large capacity tray (LCC) and the 22-3 Used to check misfeed positions and the 1-2
control circuit of those misfeed count of each position
4-5 Used to check the operations of the paper 22-4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history
feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC) and 22-5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit 3-2 1-3 9-2
the LCC paper transport clutch (LTRC) 22-6 Used to output the setting/adjustment data, 3-3 1-4 9-3
5-1 Used to check the operation of the display, the firmware version and the counter list
LCD in the operation paper and the control 22-8 Used to check the number of operations 1-1
circuit (counter value) of the finisher, the SPF and
5-2 Used to check the operation of the heater the scan (reading) unit
lamp and the control circuit 22-9 Used to check the number of use (print 3-1 1-1 9-1
5-3 Used to check the operation of the scanner quantity) of each paper feed section
lamp and the control circuit 22-10 Used to check the system configuration 3-2 1-3 9-2
5-4 Used to check the operation of the discharge (option, internal hardware)
lamp and the control circuit 22-11 Used to check the use frequency (send/
6-1 Used to check the operations of the load in receive) of FAX
the paper transport system (clutches and 22-12 Used to check the SPF misfeed positions and 1-2
solenoids) and the control circuit the number os misfeed at each position
6-2 Used to check the operations of each fan 22-13 Used to check the operating time of the 3-1 1-1 9-1
motor and its control circuit process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
6-3 Used to check the operations of the transport cartridge) and the fusing unit)
unit and the control circuit 22-14 Used to display the use status of the toner
6-6 Used to perform fusing pressure release and cartridge
applying and to check the operations of the 22-18 Used to display the user data delete history
control circuit
22-19 Used to check the values of the counters
6-90 Used to reset the machine to the factory related to the scan - image send
setting (The scanner is set to the lock enable
22-40 Used to display the error code list and the
position)
contents
7-1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging
22-41 Used to check JAM code information
7-6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging
22-42 Used to check the JAM/trouble data
cycle
22-43 JAM data details display
7-8 Used to display the warm up time
22-90 Used to output the various set data lists
7-9 Color setting in the color copy test mode
23-2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper 3-3 1-4 9-3
(used to check the copy operation and the
jam and misfeed
image quality for each color)
23-80 Used to check the operation of paper feed and
7-12 The document reading number of sheets (for
paper transport in the paper feed section and
aging operation)
the paper transport section. Used to output
8-1 Used to check and adjust the operations of
the list of the operation status of the sensor
the developping voltage in each print mode
and detectors in the paper feed section and
and the control circuit. *When the middle
the paper transport section
speed is adjusted the low speed are also
23-81 Used to export paper feed time list
adjusted simultaneously
24-1 Used to clear the jam counter and the trouble 3
8-2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the
counter
main charger grid voltage in each printer
mode and the control circuit. *When the 24-2 Used to clear the number of use (the number 3
middle speed is adjusted the low speed are of prints) of each paper feed section
also adjusted simultaneously 24-3 Used to clear the finisher, SPF and the scan 3
8-6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the (reading) unit counter
transport voltage and the control circuit 24-4 Used to clear the maintenance counter the 3
8-10 Main charger current output setting printer counter of the transport unit and the
fusing unit
9-2 Used to check the operations of the sensors
and detectors in the paper reverse section 24-5 Used to clear the developer counter
(duplex section) and its control circuit 24-35 Used to clear the toner cartridge use status
9-3 Used to check the operations of the load in data
the paper reverse section (duplex section) 25-1 Used to check the operations of the
and its control circuit developing section
10-1 Used to check the operations of the toner 25-2 Used to make the initial setting of toner 2-2 2
supply mechanism (toner motor) and the density when replacing developer -5
related circuit 25-4 Used to display the operation data of the toner
10-3 Used to check the ejector position sensor 2-5 2 supply quantity
13 Used to cancel the self-diag U1 trouble 5 6 25-5 Used to display the toner density correction
14 Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5 5 6 data
troubles 25-10 Developer/drum serial no setting 1
15 Used to cancel the self-diag U6 trouble 5 6 26-1 Used to set Yes/No of installation of the right 2-1
16 Used to cancel the self-diag U2 trouble 5 6 paper exit tray
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 4
Easy Mode Easy Mode
Adjustment and
Adjustment and
Maintenance
Maintenance
Installation
Installation
Settings
Settings
Sim Sim
No. No.
26-2 Used to set the paper size of the large 2-1 30-1 Used to check the operations of the sensors
capacity tray (LCC) and the detectors in other than the paper feed
26-3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor 2-1 section and the control circuit
26-5 Used to set the count mode of the total 2-2 30-2 Used to check the operations of the sensors
counter and the maintenance counter and the detectors in the paper feed section
26-6 Used to set the specifications of the and the control circuit
destination 30-30 Used to check the operation of the motion
26-7 Used to set the machine ID sensor
26-8 Used to set the counter mode (long scale) 2-2 40-2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor 4
26-10 Used to set the trial mode of the network adjustment
scanner 40-7 Used to set the adjustment value of the
26-18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save 2-4 manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
mode operation 41-1 Used to check the operations of the document 3
26-30 Used to set the operation mode size sensor and the control circuit
corresponding to the CE mark 41-2 Used to adjust the document size sensor 3
26-32 Used to set the specifications of the fusing detection level
cleaning operation 41-3 Used to check the operations of the document
26-35 Used to set the display/mode of Sim 22-4 size sensor and the control circuit
trouble history when a same trouble occurred 43-1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each
repeatedly. There are two display modes. mode
Display as one trouble and display as several 43-2 Used to set the fusing operation and
series of troubles preheating
26-38 Used to set continue/stop of print when the 43-20 Used to set the environment correction under
maintenance life is reached low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the
26-41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the fusing temperature setting (Sim43-2) in each
magnification ratio automatic select function in paper mode
the center binding mode 43-21 Used to set the environment correction under
26-49 Used to set the print speed of postcard mode high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for
26-50 Used to set functions 2-1 the fusing temperature setting (Sim43-2) in
each paper mode
26-52 Used to set whether non-printed paper is 2-2
counted up or not 43-24 Fuser motion setup
26-65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode 2-1 43-35 Fusing nip operation check
26-66 Simulation password setting 44-1 Used to set each correction operation function
in the image forming section
26-69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner 2-4
near end 44-2 Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image 2-2 2
density sensor -3
26-73 Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide copy
mode image loss adjustment 44-4 Used to set the conditions of the high density
process control operation
26-74 Used to set the OSA trial mode
44-6 Used to execute the high density process 1-5 2-3
26-78 Used to set the password of the remote 2-1
control forcibly
operation panel
44-9 Used to display the result data of the high
26-79 Used to set Yes/No of the pop-up display of
density process control operation
security
44-12 Used to display the operation data of the high
26-85 Simulation function setting
density process control and the image density
27-2 Used to set the sender's registration number 2-5
sensor
and the HOST server telephone number
44-14 Used to display the output level of the
27-4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto 2-5
temperature and humidity sensor
send
44-15 Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation
27-5 Used to set the machine tag No.
44-17 Process refresh execution
27-6 Used to set of the manual service call
44-21 Used to set the halftone process control target 5
27-7 Used to set of the enable, alert callout 2-5
44-22 Used to display the toner patch density level
27-9 Used to set the paper transport time recording 2-5
in the halftone process control operation
Yes/No threshold value and shading gain
44-24 Used to display the correction target and the
adjustment retry number
correction level in the halftone process control
27-10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history
operation
information
44-25 Used to set the calculating conditions of the
27-11 Used to check the serial communication retry
correction value for the halftone process
number and the scanner gain adjustment retry
control
number history
44-26 Used to execute the halftone process control 1-5 2-3
27-12 Used to check the high density, halftone
compulsory
process control and the automatic registration
44-27 Used to clear the correction data of the
adjustment error history
halftone process control
27-13 Used to check the history of paper transport
44-28 Used to set the process control execution
time between sensors
conditions
27-14 Used to set the FSS function connection test 2-5
44-29 Used to set the operating conditions of the
mode
process control during a job
27-15 Used to display the FSS connection status 2-5
44-31 Used to adjust the OPC drum phase (Manual
27-16 Used to set the FSS alert send 2-5
adjustment)
27-17 Used to set the FSS paper order alert 2-5
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 5
Easy Mode Easy Mode
Adjustment and
Adjustment and
Maintenance
Maintenance
Installation
Installation
Settings
Settings
Sim Sim
No. No.
44-37 Used to set the development bias correction 46-51 Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode
level in the continuous printing operation heavy paper mode and the image process
44-43 Used to display the identification information mode
of the developing unit 46-52 Used to set the gamma default for the copy 1-3
44-62 Used to set the process control execution mode heavy paper and the image process
conditions mode
46-1 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy 46-54 Used to perform the engine halftone 1-3
mode automatic density adjustment (dither)
46-2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy 46-55 Used to adjust the drop out color in the image
mode send mode (monochrome manual text mode)
46-4 Used to adjust the density in the image send 46-58 Used to set the copy mode pseudo resolution
mode (smoothing process)
46-5 Used to adjust the density in the image send 46-60 Used to adjust the sharpness in the copy/scan
mode mode
46-8 Used to adjust the image send mode color 46-61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition
balance RGB level
46-9 Used to adjust the scan image density 3 46-62 Used to set the operating condition of the ACS
46-10 Used to adjust the copy color balance and the the area separation the background image
gamma (for each color copy mode) process and the auto exposure mode
46-16 Used to adjust the monochrome copy density 46-63 Used to adjust the density in the copy low
and the gamma (for each monochrome copy density section
mode) 46-65 Used to set the color correction table
46-19 Used to set the operating conditions for the 46-66 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of
density scanning (exposure) of monochrome watermarks in the copy/printer mode
auto copy mode documents 46-68 Used to adjust the auto resolution judgement
46-21 Copy color balance adjustment (manual 1-3 5 (For MX-xx60/xx70 series)
adjustment) 46-74 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto 1-1 2-2 1-2
46-23 Used to set the density correction of copy high adjustment)/printer color balance adjustment -5 -3 -3
density section (high density tone gap (Auto adjustment)
supported) 46-90 Used to set the process operation of high
46-24 Copy color balance adjustment (auto 5 compression PDF images
adjustment) 46-91 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of
46-25 Used to adjust the copy color balance (single black text
color copy mode) 48-1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification 1-1
46-26 Used to reset the single color mode color ratio (in the main scanning direction and the
balance set value to the default sub scanning direction)
46-27 Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy 48-5 Used to correct the scan image magnification 1-1
images, text and line image edges ratio (in the sub scanning direction)
46-30 Used to adjust the resolution in the sub 48-6 Used to adjust the rotation speed of each
scanning direction in the copy mode motor
46-32 Used to adjust the document background 49-1 Used to perform the firmware update 4 5
density reproducibility in the monochrome 49-3 Used to update the operation manual 4 5
auto copy mode 49-5 Used to perform the watermarks update 4 5
46-36 Used to adjust the colors in the two color copy 49-6 Used to perform the OCR update
mode 49-10 Used to perform the ACU update
46-37 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of 50-1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment 1-1
monochrome mode color 50-5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image 1-1
46-38 Used to adjust the black component amount position
in the color copy mode 50-6 Used to adjust the copy image position and 1-1
46-39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send the image loss (SPF mode)
images 50-10 Used to adjust print image position 1-2 2-1 1-1
46-40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density 50-12 Used to perform the scan image off center 1-1
(Collective adjustment of all the modes) position adjustment
46-41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density 50-20 Image registration adjustment (Main scanning 1-2
(Normal) direction)
46-42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density 50-22 Used to adjust the image registration (Main 1-1 2-1 1-1
(Fine) scan direction, sub scan direction) -2
46-43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density 50-23 Used to set the registration for temperature
(Super fine) adjustment
46-44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density 50-24 Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2,
(Ultra fine) 50-20, 21 and 22
46-45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density 50-27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of
(600dpi) scanned images in the FAX or image send
46-46 Used to adjust the FAX send image density mode
(RGB RIP) 50-28 Used to automatically adjust the image loss, 1-1
46-47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and void area, image off center and image
scan images (JPEG) magnification ratio
46-48 Used to set the copy output resolution of copy
mode
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 6
Easy Mode Easy Mode
Adjustment and
Adjustment and
Maintenance
Maintenance
Installation
Installation
Settings
Settings
Sim Sim
No. No.
51-1 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the 63-2 Used to perform shading 1-5 3
secondary transport voltage 63-3 Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance 1-5 2-3 3
51-2 Used to adjust the contact pressure and gamma auto adjustment
(deflection amount) on paper by the main unit 63-4 Used to display the scanner test chart patch
and the SPF resist roller density
53-6 Used to adjust the detection level of the SPF 3 63-5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color 2-3 3
document width balance and gamma default setting
53-7 Used to adjust the SPF document size width 63-7 Used to register the service target of the copy 5
sensor mode auto color balance adjustment
53-8 Used to adjust the document lead edge 3 63-8 Used to set the default of the service target of 5
reference and the SPF mode document scan the copy mode auto color balance adjustment
position 63-11 Used to set the target color balance of the 5
53-9 SPF dirt detection setting copy mode auto color balance adjustment
53-10 SPF dirt detection execution 64-1 Test print (self print) (color mode)
55-1 Used to set the specification of the engine 64-2 Test print (self print) (monochrome mode) 8
control operations (SOFT SW) 64-4 Printer test print (self print)
55-2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner 64-5 Printer test print (self print) (PCL) 1-4
control operation (SOFT SW) 64-6 Printer test print (self print) (PS)
55-3 Used to set the specifications of the controller 65-1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display 7
operation (SOFT SW) section) detection coodinates
55-10 Used to set the special stamp text for Taiwan 65-2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display
56-1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP section) detection coodinates
PWB SRAM/EEPROM 65-5 Used to check the operation panel key input
56-2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM and 66-1 Used to display the image send-related soft 2-3
HDD to the USB memory SW (2-150) on the LCD to allow changing the
56-3 Used to backup the document filing data to soft SW while checking with the LCD
the USB memory 66-2 Used to enter a country code and set the
56-4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB default value for the country code
memory 66-3 Used to check read/write of the EEPROM and
56-5 Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB the SDRAM on the MODEM controller and
memory in the text format display the result
56-6 Used to output the JAM/trouble data 66-4 Used to send the selected signals to the line
56-7 Used to export system log data to the USB and the main unit speaker (send level: max)
memory 66-5 Used to send the selected signal to the line
56-8 Used to perform ICC profile update and the main unit speaker (send level: soft
56-99 Used to export system log data to the USB 3-4 1-5 9-4 SW setting)
memory 66-6 Used to print the confidential registration
60-1 Used to check the memory operations (read/ check table (BOX No, BOX name, passcode
write) of the SCU-MFP PWB 66-7 Used to output all image data saved in the
61-1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation image memory
and laser detection 66-8 Used to send the selected sound message to
61-3 Used to set the laser power the line and the speaker (send level: max)
61-4 Used to print the print image skew adjustment 66-9 Used to send the selected sound message to
pattern the line and the speaker (send level: soft SW
61-11 Used to correct the laser power automatically 2-3 1-2 setting)
-3 66-10 Used to clear the FAX and image send image
61-12 Laser power manual correction data
61-13 Used to clear the laser power correction value 2-3 1-3 66-11 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to
61-14 Used to set the laser power correction 1-3 the line and the speaker (send level: max)
62-1 Used to format the HDD 66-12 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to
62-2 Used to check read/write of the HDD (partial) the line and the speaker (send level: soft SW
setting)
62-3 Used to check read/write of the HDD (all
areas) 66-13 Used to register dial number for Sim66-14/15/
16 dial test
62-6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the
HDD 66-14 Used to execute the dial pulse (10pps) send
test and to adjust the make time
62-7 Used to print the HDD self diagnostics error
log 66-15 Used to execute the dial pulse (20pps) send
test and to adjust the make time
62-8 Used to format the HDD
66-16 Used to execute the DTMF signal send test
62-10 Used to clear the job completion list data
and to adjust the send level
62-11 Used to delete the document filing data
66-17 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and
62-12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a
the speaker (send level: max)
HDD trouble
66-18 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and
62-13 Used to format the HDD (Operation manual
the speaker (send level: soft SW setting)
watermark data only)
66-21 Used to print the selected items (system error,
62-14 Used to delete the document filing
protocol monitor)
management data
66-22 Used to set the handset sound volume (Japan
62-20 Used to check the status display of HDD
model only)
63-1 Used to display the shading correction result
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 7
Easy Mode
Adjustment and
Maintenance
Installation
Settings
Sim
No.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 8
5. Details of simulation DSPF model
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
1 OC SCAN 300DPI
400DPI
300DPI (372mm/s)
400DPI (372mm/s)
300DPI (372mm/
s)
600DPI 600DPI (264.0mm/s)
1-1 1200DPI 1200DPI (132mm/s)
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
(reading) unit and the control circuit. 2
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure 2-1
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. Purpose Operation test/check
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto-
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the matic document feeder and the control cir-
scan resolution (operation speed). cuit.
RSPF model Section SPF
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (372mm/s) 300DPI (372mm/s) 1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
400DPI 400DPI (297mm/s) key.
600DPI 600DPI (198mm/s) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1200DPI 1200DPI (99mm/s) The RSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper-
ations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (oper-
DSPF model ation speed).
Item/Display Operation mode Default value When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (372mm/s) 300DPI (372mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI (372mm/s)
RSPF model
600DPI 600DPI (264.0mm/s) Item/Display Operation mode Default value
1200DPI 1200DPI (132mm/s) 300DPI 300DPI(396.0mm/s)
SPF SCAN 300DPI
400DPI 400DPI(297.0mm/s)
(SINGLE) (396.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI(198.0mm/s)
300DPI 300DPI(396.0mm/s)
1-2 SPF SCAN 300DPI
400DPI 400DPI(297.0mm/s)
(DOUBLE) (396.0mm/s)
Purpose Operation test/check 600DPI 600DPI(198.0mm/s)
1-5 2-2
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
(reading) unit and the control circuit. sors and the detectors in the automatic
document feeder section and the control
Section Scanner (reading)
circuits.
Operation/Procedure
Section Automatic document feeder
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan
played.
resolution (operation speed).
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
are highlighted.
RSPF model
Display Content
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
SPED Document sensor
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (372mm/s) 300DPI (372mm/
SPPD1 Document transport sensor 1
400DPI 400DPI (297mm/s) s)
SPLS1 Paper size detector 1
600DPI 600DPI (198mm/s)
SPLS2 Paper size detector 2
1200DPI 1200DPI (99mm/s)
SOCD SPF open/close sensor
SPPD2 Document transport sensor 2
SPPD3 Document transport sensor 3
SPPD4 Document transport sensor 4
SCOV SPF cover open/close detector
SSET SPF installation detection
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 9
Display Content No,/Display item Content
STMPU SPF stamp UN installation detection FNPS16 Slide position sensor
SWD_LEN SPF document guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm) FNPUDTC Punch unit connection detection signal
SWD_AD SPF document detection volume output AD value FNSTPLHP Staple home position sensor
FNSTPLLS Staple empty detection
FNSTPLRE Staple lead edge sensor
SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display. Inner finisher punch unit (MX-PN14)
No,/Display item Content
FCFULL_S Punch dust full sensor
2-3 FCPI_S Punch home position sensor
Purpose Operation test/check FCPUENCS Punch motor rotation sensor
FCRI_S Punch mode sensor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads FCYKPTRS Punch unit paper rear edge sensor
in the automatic document feeder and the
control circuit. Staple-free Staple Unit
Section SPF No,/Display item Content
Operation/Procedure FNPS13 Staple-free staple unit position sensor
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel FNPS15 Staple-free staple unit home position sensor
key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1K finisher (MX-FN28)
The selected load performs the operation. No,/Display item Content
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. BLTHPS Release position sensor
ENT Inlet sensor
Display Content Paper exit guide plate open/close home position
EXGPLTHP
SPUM_F SPF paper feed motor (normal rotation) sensor
SPUM_R SPF paper feed motor (reverse rotation) FDRSW Door open/close sensor
SPFM_F SPF transport motor (normal rotation) HITHP Flapper home position sensor
SPFM_R SPF transport motor (reverse rotation) JOGHPS Jogger home position sensor
SPRS Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid (SPF) LDWNLMUT Lift tray lower limit lower sensor
SRRC Registration roller clutch (SPF) LMDLT Intermediate feeder left sensor
STMPS Stamp solenoid PRFEX Proof paper exit sensor
PRFTRYFL Proof tray full sensor
RMDLT Intermediate feeder right sensor
SFTROLHP Shift home position sensor
STMHP Staple shift home position detection
3 STPDRRHP Staple driver home position sensor
STPNEND Staple near end sensor
STPSPRM Staple self-priming sensor
3-2 STPTRPAP Staple tray paper empty sensor
Purpose Operation test/check UDWNLMUT Lift tray lower limit upper sensor
UPCVR Upper cover open/close sensor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
UPEX Shift paper exit (Lift tray paper exit) sensor
sors and the detectors in the finisher and
UPLMUTSW Lift tray upper switch
the control circuit.
UTNRH Tray near home detection sensor
Section Finisher UTRPH Lift tray paper surface sensor
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 1K saddle finisher (MX-FN29)
played. No,/Display item Content
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active BDLTRS Bundle transport sensor
are highlighted. BLTHPS Release home position sensor
ENDSHP Rear edge stopper home position sensor
Inner finisher (MX-FN27)
ENDSTRS Rear edge stopper transport sensor
No,/Display item Content ENT Inlet sensor
FNECODTC Staple-less staple connection detection signal Paper exit guide plate open/close home position
EXGPLTHP
FNINTSNS Punch unit paper rear edge detection signal sensor
FNMANSW Manual staple switch FDRSW Door open/close sensor
FNMSW1 Front cover switch FLDCMHP Folding cam home position sensor
FNPS1 Discharged paper sensor FLDEX Half folding paper exit sensor
FNPS2 Paddle home position sensor FLDPLTHP Folding blade home position sensor
FNPS3 Knurling home position sensor HITHP Flapper home position sensor
FNPS4 Alignment plate front home position sensor JOGHPS Jogger home position sensor
FNPS5 Alignment plate rear home position sensor LDWNLMUT Lift tray lower limit lower sensor
FNPS6 Staple tray paper sensor LMDLT Intermediate feeder left sensor
FNPS7 Paper exit assist home position sensor Bundle transport lower pressure release home
LPRSRLHP
FNPS8 Bundle hold home position sensor position sensor
FNPS9 Paper height sensor PRFEX Proof paper exit sensor
FNPS10 Paper exit tray lower limit sensor PRFTRYFL Proof tray full sensor
FNPS11 Staple shift home position sensor RMDLT Intermediate feeder right sensor
FNPS12 Manual staple paper detection sensor SDLFLLL Half folding tray full lower sensor
FNPS14 Paper exit tray position sensor SDLFLLU Half folding tray full upper sensor
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 10
No,/Display item Content No,/Display item Content
SFTROLHP Shift home position sensor Alignment unit front alignment plate home position
FNHPJFN
SSSTPCHP Saddle stitch staple clincher home position sensor sensor
STMHP Staple shift home position detection FNHPJR Rear edge alignment plate home position sensor
STPDRRHP Staple driver home position sensor Alignment unit rear alignment plate home position
FNHPJRN
STPNEND Staple near end sensor sensor
STPSPRM Staple self-priming sensor FNHPMSS Staple shift home position sensor
STPTRPAP Staple tray paper empty sensor FNHPMT Load tray home position sensor
STTKSH Staple retracting sensor FNHPP Paddle home position sensor
UDWNLMUT Lift tray lower limit upper sensor Alignment unit paddle rotation home position
FNHPRPN
UPCVR Upper cover open/close sensor sensor
UPEX Shift paper exit (Lift tray paper exit) sensor FNHPS Oscillation home position sensor
UPLMUTSW Lift tray upper limit switch FNHPTF Front edge tongue home position sensor
Bundle transport upper pressure release home FNHPTR Rear edge tongue home position sensor
UPRSRLHP FNMCSLS Staple-free stapling motor clock sensor
position sensor
UTNRH Tray near home detection sensor FNOCFD Front door open/close switch
UTRPH Lift tray paper surface sensor FNSSS Staple safety switch
FNTBP Preprocessing timing sensor
1K finisher punch unit (MX-PN15) FNULMT Load tray upper limit sensor
No,/Display item Content
3K saddle finisher (MX-FN31)
PAPPOS Horizontal registration detection sensor
Horizontal registration detection shift home position No,/Display item Content
PAPPOSHP FN1DDS DIP SW1 detection sensor
sensor
PNCHENC Punch rear position sensor FN1DO Paper exit paper surface detection sensor 1
PNCHHP Punch home position sensor FN1DPS Push SW1 detection sensor
PNCHHPFL Punch hopper full sensor FN2DDS DIP SW2 detection sensor
PNCHMVHP Punch shift home position sensor FN2DO Paper exit paper surface detection sensor 2
PSLTDSW1 Punch selection DIP SW1 FN2DPS Push SW2 detection sensor
PSLTDSW2 Punch selection DIP SW2 FN3DDS DIP SW3 detection sensor
FN4DDS DIP SW4 detection sensor
3K finisher (MX-FN30) FNAMS Manual staple operation SW
FNB Buffer sensor
No,/Display item Content
FNDCP Punch connection detection signal
FN1DDS DIP SW1 detection sensor
FNDCS Saddle connection detection signal
FN1DO Paper exit paper surface detection sensor 1
FNDES Staple empty detection sensor
FN1DPS Push SW1 detection sensor
FNDFET Escape tray full detection sensor
FN2DDS DIP SW2 detection sensor
FNDOCFD Front door open/close detection sensor
FN2DO Paper exit paper surface detection sensor 2
Alignment unit paddle lift paper surface detection
FN2DPS Push SW2 detection sensor FNDOGPN
sensor
FN3DDS DIP SW3 detection sensor
FNDOHS Staple cuing detection sensor
FN4DDS DIP SW4 detection sensor
FNDPMS Manual staple paper detection sensor
FNAMS Manual staple operation SW
FNDPOPT Process tray paper surface sensor
FNB Buffer sensor
FNE Entry port sensor
FNDCP Punch connection detection signal
FNEE Escape paper exit sensor
FNDCS Saddle connection detection signal
FNFMTLC Load tray full (Large coated paper full) sensor
FNDES Staple empty detection sensor
FNFMTLS Load tray middle (Large coated paper full) sensor
FNDFET Escape tray full detection sensor
Load tray lower limit (Small coated paper full)
FNDOCFD Front door open/close detection sensor FNFMTSS
sensor
Alignment unit paddle lift paper surface detection
FNDOGPN FNHPAR Rear edge assist home position sensor
sensor
FNHPCSLS Staple-free stapling clinch home position sensor
FNDOHS Staple cuing detection sensor
FNHPDSS Staple drive home position sensor
FNDPMS Manual staple paper detection sensor
Escape/saddle transport switch flapper home
FNDPOPT Process tray paper surface sensor FNHPFECE
position sensor
FNE Entry port sensor
FNHPFR Rear edge falling home position sensor
FNEE Escape paper exit sensor
Alignment unit front alignment plate lift home
FNFMTLC Load tray full (Large coated paper full) sensor FNHPGJFN
position sensor
FNFMTLS Load tray middle (Large coated paper full) sensor Alignment unit rear alignment plate lift home
Load tray lower limit (Small coated paper full) FNHPGJRN
FNFMTSS position sensor
sensor FNHPGKS Take-up knurling lift home position sensor
FNHPAR Rear edge assist home position sensor FNHPGPN Alignment unit paddle lift home position sensor
FNHPCSLS Staple-free stapling clinch home position sensor FNHPJF Front edge alignment plate home position sensor
FNHPDSS Staple drive home position sensor Alignment unit front alignment plate home position
Escape/saddle transport switch flapper home FNHPJFN
FNHPFECE sensor
position sensor FNHPJR Rear edge alignment plate home position sensor
FNHPFR Rear edge falling home position sensor Alignment unit rear alignment plate home position
Alignment unit front alignment plate lift home FNHPJRN
FNHPGJFN sensor
position sensor FNHPMSS Staple shift home position sensor
Alignment unit rear alignment plate lift home FNHPMT Load tray home position sensor
FNHPGJRN
position sensor
FNHPP Paddle home position sensor
FNHPGKS Take-up knurling lift home position sensor
Alignment unit paddle rotation home position
FNHPGPN Alignment unit paddle lift home position sensor FNHPRPN
sensor
FNHPJF Front edge alignment plate home position sensor FNHPS Oscillation home position sensor
FNHPTF Front edge tongue home position sensor
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 11
1 : ‘16/Feb.
No,/Display item Content No,/Display item Content
FNHPTR Rear edge tongue home position sensor FNSL Rear edge falling motor
FNMCSLS Staple-free stapling motor clock sensor FNSTPLIF Staple motor
FNOCFD Front door open/close switch
FNSSS Staple safety switch 1K finisher (MX-FN28)
FNTBP Preprocessing timing sensor No,/Display item Content
FNULMT Load tray upper limit sensor BLT_M Release motor
FSDU Saddle unit detection sensor ENTRS_M Entry port transport motor
FSE Saddle unit entry port sensor EXGPLT_M Paper exit guide plate open/close motor
FSEB Saddle unit folding bundle paper exit sensor EXTRS_M Paper exit transport/Flapping, drawing roller motor
Saddle unit folding bundle loading paper empty JCTG_S Branch solenoid
FSEPB
sensor JOG_M Jogger motor
FSESFS Saddle unit staple front staple empty sensor PSN_M Flapping motor
FSESRS Saddle unit staple rear staple empty sensor SFT_M Shift motor
FSHPDSS Saddle unit staple drive home position sensor STPMOV_M Staple motor
FSHPEL Saddle unit switch lever home position sensor STPMV_M Staple shift motor
FSHPG Saddle unit gripper home position sensor TRYLFT_M Tray lift motor
FSHPJ Saddle unit alignment plate home position sensor UPTRS_M Proof transport motor
FSHPP Saddle unit paddle home position sensor
Saddle unit rear edge stopper home position 1K Saddle finisher (MX-FN29)
FSHPSR
sensor
No,/Display item Content
FSHPT Saddle unit pushing home position sensor
BLT_M Release motor
FSMCE Saddle unit paper exit motor clock sensor
ENDS_M Rear edge stopper motor
FSMCF Saddle unit folding motor clock sensor
ENTRS_M Entry port transport motor
FSPV Saddle unit vertical path sensor
EXGPLT_M Paper exit guide plate open/close motor
3K finisher punch unit (MX-PN16) EXTRS_M Paper exit transport/Flapping, drawing roller motor
FLDPLT_M Folding blade motor
No,/Display item Content
FLTRS_M Folding transport motor
FC1DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 1
GDLED Guide LED
FC2DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 2
JCTG_S Branch solenoid
FC3DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 3
JOG_M Jogger motor
FC4DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 4
LPRSRL_M Bundle transport lower pressure release motor
FC5DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 5
PSN_M Flapping motor
FCDFWP Punch dust full detection sensor
SFT_M Shift motor
FCEP Punch hole encoder sensor
STPMOV_M Staple motor
FCHPP Punch hole home position sensor
STPMV_M Staple shift motor
FCHPR Punch horizontal registration home position sensor
TRYLFT_M Tray lift motor
UBTRS_M Bundle transport upper motor
Paper pass unit (MX-RB25)
Bundle transport upper pressure release/
UPRSRL_M
No,/Display item Content Reference fence evacuation motor
PDOS1 Relay cover open/close detection 1 UPTRS_M Proof transport motor
PDOS2 Relay cover open/close detection 2
PDPPD1 Relay transport detection 1 1K Finisher punch unit (MX-PN15)
PDPPD2 Relay transport detection 2
No,/Display item Content
PNCH_M Punch motor
PNCHMV_M Punch shift motor
STSMOV_M Punch horizontal registration detection shift motor
3-3
Purpose Operation test/check 3K Finisher (MX-FN30)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in No,/Display item Content
the finisher and the control circuit. FNCDP Paddle drive clutch
Section Finisher FNCDRUS Oscillation lower roller drive clutch
Operation/Procedure FNCEDCE Escape transport drive switch clutch
FNMAR Rear edge assist motor
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
FNMB Buffer motor
key.
FNMDJFN Alignment unit front alignment plate drive motor
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. FNMDJRN Alignment unit rear alignment plate drive motor
The selected load performs the operation. FNMDT Tongue drive motor
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. FNME Discharge motor
FNMEC Entry port transport motor
Inner finisher (MX-FN27) FNMFECES Escape/Saddle transport switch flapper motor
No,/Display item Content FNMFR Rear edge falling motor
FNM1 Transport motor FNMGJFN Alignment unit front alignment plate lift motor
FNM10 Paddle motor FNMGJRN Alignment unit rear alignment plate lift motor
FNM2 Roller motor FNMGMT Load paper tray lift motor
FNM3 Front alignment motor FNMGPN Alignment unit paddle lift motor
FNM4 Rear alignment motor FNMGRS Take-up switch roller lift motor
FNM5 Assist motor FNMJF Front alignment motor
FNM6 Tray shift motor FNMJR Rear alignment motor
FNM7 Staple shift motor FNMMSS Staple horizontal shift motor
1 FNM9 eco staple motor FNMRPN Alignment unit paddle rotation motor
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 12
No,/Display item Content Setting Default
Item/Display Content
FNMS Oscillation motor range value
FNMSLS Staple-free staple motor STAPLE Stapling position
FNMSS Staple motor C FRONT adjustment (one position in 50 - 150 100
front)
3K Saddle finisher (MX-FN31) STAPLE REAR Stapling position
D adjustment (one position at 50 - 150 100
No,/Display item Content
the rear)
FNCDP Paddle drive clutch
STAPLE BOTH Stapling position
FNCDRUS Oscillation lower roller drive clutch E adjustment (staple pitch of 50 - 150 100
FNCEDCE Escape transport drive switch clutch two positions binding)
FNMAR Rear edge assist motor MANUAL Manual stapling position
FNMB Buffer motor F STAPLE adjustment 80 - 120 100
FNMDJFN Alignment unit front alignment plate drive motor POSITION
FNMDJRN Alignment unit rear alignment plate drive motor STAPLELESS Staple-free stapling
FNMDT Tongue drive motor G STAPLE Y position adjustment (Y : 70 - 130 100
FNME Discharge motor Main scanning direction)
FNMEC Entry port transport motor STAPLELESS Staple-free stapling
FNMFECES Escape/Saddle transport switch flapper motor H STAPLE X position adjustment (X : 85 - 115 100
Sub scanning direction)
FNMFR Rear edge falling motor
STAPLELESS Staple-free stapling
FNMGJFN Alignment unit front alignment plate lift motor
I STAPLE welding pressure 85 - 115 100
FNMGJRN Alignment unit rear alignment plate lift motor
PRESSURE adjustment (Motor rotation)
FNMGMT Load paper tray lift motor
BELT Return belt pressure
FNMGPN Alignment unit paddle lift motor J 90 - 110 100
PRESSURE adjustment
FNMGRS Take-up switch roller lift motor MANUAL Manual staple time out
FNMJF Front alignment motor K 1-5 2
STAPLE TIME setting
FNMJR Rear alignment motor MANUAL Manual staple pull out time
FNMMSS Staple horizontal shift motor STAPLE out setting
L 0 - 10 0
FNMRPN Alignment unit paddle rotation motor PULLOUT
FNMS Oscillation motor TIME
FNMSLS Staple-free staple motor PUNCH X Punch hole position
FNMSS Staple motor M adjustment (X : Sub 80 - 120 100
FSMC Saddle transport motor scanning direction)
FSMDLE Saddle switch lever drive motor
1K Finisher (MX-FN28)/1K Saddle finisher (MX-FN29)
FSME Saddle discharge motor
FSMF Saddle folding motor Item/Display Setting Default
Content
FSMG Saddle gripper motor range value
FSMJ Saddle alignment motor STAPLE Stapling position
A 93 - 107 100
POSITION adjustment
FSMS Saddle staple motor
JOGGER(A3) Jogger position adjustment
FSMSR Saddle rear edge stopper motor B 97 - 103 100
A3
JOGGER(B4) Jogger position adjustment
3K finisher punch unit (MX-PN16) C 97 - 103 100
B4
No,/Display item Content JOGGER(A4- Jogger position adjustment
D 97 - 103 100
FCMR Punch horizontal registration motor R) A4-R
FCP Punch hole motor JOGGER(A4) Jogger position adjustment
E 97 - 103 100
A4
Paper pass unit (MX-RB25) JOGGER(B5- Jogger position adjustment
F 97 - 103 100
R) B5-R
No,/Display item Content
JOGGER(B5) Jogger position adjustment
PDPTM Relay unit transport motor G 97 - 103 100
B5
JOGGER(11 x Jogger position adjustment
H 97 - 103 100
17) 11 x 17
JOGGER(8.5 x Jogger position adjustment
3-10 I 97 - 103 100
14) 8.5 x 14
Purpose Adjustment J
JOGGER(8.5 x Jogger position adjustment
97 - 103 100
11R) 8.5 x 11R
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.
JOGGER(8.5 x Jogger position adjustment
Section Finisher K 97 - 103 100
11) 8.5 x 11
Operation/Procedure JOGGER(12 x Jogger position adjustment
L 97 - 103 100
18) 12 x 18
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
JOGGER(8KR) Jogger position adjustment
panel. M 97 - 103 100
8K
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. JOGGER(16K- Jogger position adjustment
N 97 - 103 100
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) R) 16K-R
JOGGER(16K) Jogger position adjustment
O 97 - 103 100
16K
Inner finisher (MX-FN27) JOGGER(OTH Jogger position adjustment
P 97 - 103 100
Setting Default ER) Other
Item/Display Content HITTING Flapping roller operation
range value
ALIGNMENT Alignment position Q ROLLER start timing adjustment A3 90 - 110 100
A 50 - 150 100 START(A3)
adjustment
ALIGNMENT Alignment position center HITTING Flapping roller operation
B 90 - 110 100 R ROLLER start timing adjustment B4 90 - 110 100
CENTER adjustment
START(B4)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 13
Item/Display Setting Default Item/Display Setting Default
Content Content
range value range value
HITTING Flapping roller operation HITTING Flapping roller flapping
S ROLLER start timing adjustment 90 - 110 100 AO ROLLER time adjustment 8.5 x 11 90 - 110 100
START(A4-R) A4-R TIME(8.5 x 11)
HITTING Flapping roller operation HITTING Flapping roller flapping
T ROLLER start timing adjustment A4 90 - 110 100 AP ROLLER time adjustment 12 x 18 90 - 110 100
START(A4) TIME(12 x 18)
HITTING Flapping roller operation HITTING Flapping roller flapping
U ROLLER start timing adjustment 90 - 110 100 AQ ROLLER time adjustment 8K 90 - 110 100
START(B5-R) B5-R TIME(8K)
HITTING Flapping roller operation HITTING Flapping roller flapping
V ROLLER start timing adjustment B5 90 - 110 100 AR ROLLER time adjustment 16K-R 90 - 110 100
START(B5) TIME(16K-R)
HITTING Flapping roller operation HITTING Flapping roller flapping
ROLLER start timing adjustment 11 AS ROLLER time adjustment 16K 90 - 110 100
W 90 - 110 100
START(11 x x 17 TIME(16K)
17) HITTING Flapping roller flapping
HITTING Flapping roller operation AT ROLLER time adjustment Other 90 - 110 100
ROLLER start timing adjustment 8.5 TIME(OTHER)
X 90 - 110 100
START(8.5 x x 14 HITTING Sheet number type
14) AU ROLLER flapping roller flapping time 90 - 110 100
HITTING Flapping roller operation TIME(1-10) adjustment 1 - 10 sheets
ROLLER start timing adjustment 8.5 HITTING Sheet number type
Y 90 - 110 100
START(8.5 x x 11R AV ROLLER flapping roller flapping time 90 - 110 100
11R) TIME(11-20) adjustment 11 - 20 sheets
HITTING Flapping roller operation HITTING Sheet number type
ROLLER start timing adjustment 8.5 AW ROLLER flapping roller flapping time 90 - 110 100
Z 90 - 110 100
START(8.5 x x 11 TIME(21-30) adjustment 21 - 30 sheets
11) HITTING Sheet number type
HITTING Flapping roller operation AX ROLLER flapping roller flapping time 90 - 110 100
ROLLER start timing adjustment 12 TIME(31-40) adjustment 31 - 40 sheets
AA 90 - 110 100
START(12 x x 18 HITTING Sheet number type
18) AY ROLLER flapping roller flapping time 90 - 110 100
HITTING Flapping roller operation TIME(40-50) adjustment 41 - 50 sheets
AB ROLLER start timing adjustment 8K 90 - 110 100 SKEW Skew correction striking
START(8K) AZ 75 - 125 100
QUANTITY(A3) quantity adjustment A3
HITTING Flapping roller operation SKEW Skew correction striking
AC ROLLER start timing adjustment 90 - 110 100 BA 75 - 125 100
QUANTITY(B4) quantity adjustment B4
START(16K-R) 16K-R SKEW Skew correction striking
HITTING Flapping roller operation BB QUANTITY(A4- quantity adjustment A4-R 75 - 125 100
AD ROLLER start timing adjustment 90 - 110 100 R)
START(16K) 16K SKEW Skew correction striking
HITTING Flapping roller operation BC 75 - 125 100
QUANTITY(A4) quantity adjustment A4
ROLLER start timing adjustment SKEW Skew correction striking
AE 90 - 110 100
START(OTHE Other BD QUANTITY(B5- quantity adjustment B5-R 75 - 125 100
R) R)
HITTING Flapping roller flapping SKEW Skew correction striking
AF ROLLER time adjustment A3 90 - 110 100 BE 75 - 125 100
QUANTITY(B5) quantity adjustment B5
TIME(A3)
SKEW Skew correction striking
HITTING Flapping roller flapping BF 75 - 125 100
QUANTITY(A5) quantity adjustment A5
AG ROLLER time adjustment B4 90 - 110 100
SKEW Skew correction striking
TIME(B4)
BG QUANTITY(11 quantity adjustment 11 x 75 - 125 100
HITTING Flapping roller flapping x 17) 17
AH ROLLER time adjustment A4-R 90 - 110 100
SKEW Skew correction striking
TIME(A4-R)
BH QUANTITY(8.5 quantity adjustment 8.5 x 75 - 125 100
HITTING Flapping roller flapping x 14) 14
AI ROLLER time adjustment A4 90 - 110 100
SKEW Skew correction striking
TIME(A4)
BI QUANTITY(8.5 quantity adjustment 8.5 x 75 - 125 100
HITTING Flapping roller flapping x 11R) 11R
AJ ROLLER time adjustment B5-R 90 - 110 100
SKEW Skew correction striking
TIME(B5-R)
BJ QUANTITY(8.5 quantity adjustment 8.5 x 75 - 125 100
HITTING Flapping roller flapping x 11) 11
AK ROLLER time adjustment B5 90 - 110 100
SKEW Skew correction striking
TIME(B5)
BK QUANTITY(5.5 quantity adjustment 5.5 x 75 - 125 100
HITTING Flapping roller flapping x 8.5) 8.5
AL ROLLER time adjustment 11 x 17 90 - 110 100
SKEW Skew correction striking
TIME(11 x 17)
BL QUANTITY(12 quantity adjustment 12 x 75 - 125 100
HITTING Flapping roller flapping x 18) 18
AM ROLLER time adjustment 8.5 x 14 90 - 110 100
SKEW Skew correction striking
TIME(8.5 x 14) BM 75 - 125 100
QUANTITY(8K) quantity adjustment 8K
HITTING Flapping roller flapping
SKEW Skew correction striking
ROLLER time adjustment 8.5 x 11R
AN 90 - 110 100 BN QUANTITY(16 quantity adjustment 16K-R 75 - 125 100
TIME(8.5 x
K-R)
11R)
SKEW Skew correction striking
BO QUANTITY(16 quantity adjustment 16K 75 - 125 100
K)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 14
Item/Display Setting Default Setting Default
Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
SKEW Skew correction striking MANUAL Manual stapling position
BP QUANTITY(OT quantity adjustment Other 75 - 125 100 H STAPLE adjustment 80 - 120 100
HER) POSITION
SKEW Skew correction striking STAPLELESS Staple-free stapling
BQ 0-1 0
MODE(A3) control switch A3 I STAPLE position adjustment 80 - 115 100
SKEW Skew correction striking POSITION
BR 0-1 0
MODE(B4) control switch B4 BUFFER Buffer paper shift quantity
J 40 - 160 100
SKEW Skew correction striking SHIFT(1-2) adjustment (1-2 sheets)
BS 0-1 0
MODE(A4-R) control switch A4-R BUFFER Buffer paper shift quantity
K 40 - 160 100
SKEW Skew correction striking SHIFT(2-3) adjustment (2-3 sheets)
BT 0-1 0
MODE(A4) control switch A4 PUNCH X Punch hole position
SKEW Skew correction striking L adjustment (X : Sub 80 - 120 100
BU 0-1 0
MODE(B5-R) control switch B5-R scanning direction)
SKEW Skew correction striking PUNCH Y Punch hole position
BV 0-1 0
M adjustment (Y : Main 97 - 115 100
MODE(B5) control switch B5
SKEW Skew correction striking scanning direction)
BW 0-1 0
MODE(A5) control switch A5 EJECTING Paper exit roller height
N 70 - 130 100
SKEW Skew correction striking ROLLER adjustment
BX 0-1 0
MODE(11 x 17) control switch 11 x 17 KNURLING Take-up knurling height
O 0 - 150 100
SKEW Skew correction striking ROLLER adjustment
BY MODE(8.5 x control switch 8.5 x 14 0-1 0 KNURLING Take-up knurling
14) P ROLLER evacuation height 0 - 200 100
SKEW Skew correction striking RETREAT adjustment
BZ MODE(8.5 x control switch 8.5 x 11R 0-1 0 STAPLELESS Staple-free stapling
11R) Q STAPLE welding pressure 85 - 115 100
SKEW Skew correction striking PRESSURE adjustment (Motor rotation)
CA MODE(8.5 x control switch 8.5 x 11 0-1 0 DELIVERY Paper exit speed
11) R SPEED(NON- adjustment (Non-sort) 90 - 110 100
SKEW Skew correction striking SORT)
CB MODE(5.5 x control switch 5.5 x 8.5 0-1 0 DELIVERY Paper exit speed
8.5) S SPEED(ESCA adjustment (Escape) 90 - 110 100
SKEW Skew correction striking PE)
CC 0-1 0
MODE(12 x 18) control switch 12 x 18 EJECTING Bundle paper eject speed
SKEW Skew correction striking T SPEED(SHIFT) adjustment (Shift bundle 95 - 105 100
CD 0-1 0 ejection)
MODE(8K) control switch 8K
SKEW Skew correction striking EJECTING Bundle paper eject speed
CE 0-1 0 U SPEED(STAPL adjustment (Staple bundle 95 - 105 100
MODE(16K-R) control switch 16K-R
SKEW Skew correction striking E) ejection)
CF 0-1 0 MANUAL Manual staple time out
MODE(16K) control switch 16K V 1-5 2
SKEW Skew correction striking STAPLE TIME setting
CG MODE(OTHER control switch Other 0-1 0 MANUAL Manual staple pull out time
) STAPLE out setting
W 0 - 10 0
PUNCH Y Punch hole position PULLOUT
CH adjustment (Y : Main 95 - 105 100 TIME
scanning direction) STITCHING Saddle staple position
X 80 - 120 100
PUNCH X Punch hole position UNIT adjustment
CI adjustment (X : Sub 85 - 115 100 STITCHING Saddle staple position
Y 80 - 120 100
scanning direction) UNIT THIN adjustment (Thin paper)
FOLDING Folding time adjustment FOLDING Saddle folding position
CJ 0 - 29 0 Z 80 - 120 100
TIME * UNIT adjustment
FOLDING Saddle folding position
* This is displayed only when MX-FN29 is connected. AA 80 - 120 100
UNIT THIN adjustment (Thin paper)
SADDLE Saddle alignment width
3K Finisher (MX-FN30) / 3K Saddle finisher (MX-FN31) AB 80 - 120 100
ALIGNMENT adjustment
Setting Default STITCHING Saddle staple folding
Item/Display Content AC 30 - 70 50
range value AND FOLDING position adjustment
ALIGNMENT Alignment position SADDLE Saddle folding position
A 50 - 150 100
adjustment AD FOLDING(A4- adjustment A4-R/8.5 x 30 - 70 50
FRONT Front alignment position R/8.5 x 11R) 11R
B 50 - 150 100
ADJUST adjustment SADDLE Saddle folding position
REAR ADJUST Rear alignment position AE FOLDING(B4/ adjustment B4/8.5 x 14 30 - 70 50
C 50 - 150 100
adjustment 8.5 x 14)
ALIGNMENT Alignment position center SADDLE Saddle folding position
D 90 - 110 100
CENTER adjustment AF FOLDING(A3/ adjustment A3/11 x 17 30 - 70 50
STAPLE Stapling position 11 x 17)
E FRONT adjustment (one position in 50 - 150 100 SADDLE Saddle folding position
front) AG FOLDING(12 x adjustment 12 x 18 30 - 70 50
STAPLE Stapling position 18)
F REAR adjustment (one position at 50 - 150 100 SADDLE Saddle folding position
the rear) AH FOLDING(CUS adjustment Custom size 30 - 70 50
STAPLE Stapling position TOM)
G BOTH adjustment (staple pitch of 50 - 150 100
two positions binding)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 15
1 : ‘16/Feb.
4-3
4
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
4-2
in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and
Purpose Operation test/check the control circuit of those.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and detectors in the desk/large capac-
ity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of Section.
those. Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC) Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- touch panel key.
played. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active The selected load performs the operation.
are highlighted. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Desk Desk
Display Content Display Content
D1MDC Desk 3 installation detection connector D1LM Tray 3 lift-up motor
D1PED Desk 3 paper empty sensor D1PFC Tray 3 paper feed clutch
D1PPD Desk 3 paper transport sensor D2LM Tray 4 lift-up motor
D1PQD Desk 3 remaining paper quantity sensor D2PFC Tray 4 paper feed clutch
D1PRED1 Desk 3 paper rear edge sensor 1 DPFM Desk transport motor
D1PRED2 Desk 3 paper rear edge sensor 2 DPTRC Desk paper transport clutch
D1PRED3 Desk 3 paper rear edge sensor 3
D1PRED4 Desk 3 paper rear edge sensor 4 Tandem LCC
D1ULD Desk 3 upper limit detector
Display Content
D2MDC Desk 4 installation detection connector
D1LM Tray 3 lift-up motor
D2PED Desk 4 paper empty sensor
D1PFC Tray 3 paper feed clutch
D2PPD Desk 4 paper transport sensor
D2LM Tray 4 lift-up motor
D2PQD Desk 4 remaining paper quantity sensor
D2PFC Tray 4 paper feed clutch
D2PRED1 Desk 4 paper rear edge sensor 1
DPFM Desk transport motor
D2PRED2 Desk 4 paper rear edge sensor 2
DPTRC Desk paper transport clutch
D2PRED3 Desk 4 paper rear edge sensor 3
D2PRED4 Desk 4 paper rear edge sensor 4 LCC 1
D2ULD Desk 4 upper limit detector
Display Content
Tandem LCC LLM LCC lift motor
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
Display Content LPFM LCC paper transport motor
D1CDT Desk 3 insertion detection LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
D1LUD Desk 3 upper limit sensor LTRC LCC transport clutch
D1PED Desk 3 paper empty sensor
D1PFD Desk 3 paper transport sensor
D1PPD1 Desk 3 paper transport sensor 1
4-5
D1PPD2 Desk 3 paper transport sensor 2
D1PQD Desk 3 remaining paper quantity sensor Purpose Operation test/check
D2CDT Desk 4 insertion detection Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the paper
D2LUD Desk 4 upper limit sensor feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC)
D2PED Desk 4 paper empty sensor and the LCC paper transport clutch (LTRC).
D2PQD Desk 4 remaining paper quantity sensor
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
DHOD Horizontal transport open/close detection
Operation/Procedure
1 LCC Check the ON operation
Display Content Press the button of the code name for checking the ON operation.
24VM LCC 24V power monitor Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on
LCCD LCC main unit connection sensor the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not
LCLSW LCC tray open/close switch highlighted.
LDD LCC tray lower limit sensor Check the OFF operation
LLSW LCC upper limit switch
Press the highlighted button which is ON.
LPED LCC tray paper empty sensor
LPFD LCC transport sensor
When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
LPFPD LCC transport sensor 2
returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
LPUD LCC paper upper surface sensor
display is maintained.
LRE LCC lift motor encoder sensor
Button Content
LUD LCC tray upper limit sensor
DTRC Desk transport clutch
LWRSW LCC reverse winding detection switch
LTRC A4 LCC transport clutch
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 16
DL_K Discharge lamp K
5 DL_C Discharge lamp C
DL_M Discharge lamp M
5-1 DL_Y Discharge lamp Y
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
cuit.
6
Section Operation panel
Operation/Procedure 6-1
The LCD is changed as shown below.
Purpose Operation test/check
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX
MIN the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
the paper transport system (clutches and
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are
solenoids) and the control circuits.
checked.
Section Paper transport/Paper exit section
Operation/Procedure
5-2 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
Purpose Operation test/check
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater
The selected load performs the operation.
lamp and the control circuit.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Section Fusing
Load operation check method:
Operation/Procedure
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
key. sound.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Display Content
The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF.
C1LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 1)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
C1PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
Heater lamp operation check method: C2LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 2)
Remove the front cabinet upper and the paper exit tray, and the C2PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
lighting status of each heater lamp can be checked through the CPFC1 Tray vertical transport clutch 1
clearance between the fusing pressure release drive gear and the CPFC2 Tray vertical transport clutch 2
frame fusing section. CPFM Transport motor
FUM Fusing motor
HL_UM Main heater lamp (Upper main)
HPFC Horizontal transport clutch
HL_US Sub heater lamp (Upper sub)
MPFS Paper feed motor solenoid (Manual feed tray)
HL_LM Heater lamp (Lower main)
MPUC Paper feed clutch (Manual feed tray)
OSM Offset motor
PFM Transport motor
POGS Paper exit gate solenoid
5-3
POM Paper exit motor
Purpose Operation test/check RRM Registration motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner SBM_F Reverse motor (normal rotation)
lamp and the control circuit. SBM_R Reverse motor (reverse rotation)
Section Scanner (reading) TRC_DSK Desk clutch
TRC_FIN Finisher clutch
Operation/Procedure
TRC_LCC LCC clutch
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
6-2
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Operation test/check
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
motor and its control circuit.
Section Others
5-4 Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
Purpose Operation test/check
key.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis-
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
charge lamp and the control circuit.
The selected load performs the operation.
Section Process
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Operation/Procedure
Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively.
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
Load operation check method:
When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
The selected discharge lamp is lighted for 30 sec. sound.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 17
Display Content 6-90
FUFM Fusing cooling fan Purpose Setting
POFM2 Paper exit cooling fan
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the machine to the factory
PROFM1 Process fan 1
setting. (The scanner is set to the lock
PROFM2 Process fan 2
enable position)
PSFM Power cooling fan
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
6-3
The scanner is shifted to the lock enable position and stopped.
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the trans-
port unit and the control circuit.
Section Process (Transport) 7
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation mode with the mode select button. 7-1
Mode select button Content Purpose Setting
TC1 Primary transfer (normal rotation) Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of
TC1_R Primary transfer (reverse rotation) aging.
TC2 Secondary transfer
Section Others
2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation of the mode Operation/Procedure
selected in 1) is performed. 1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Mode
Mode The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
select Content NOTE
display
button The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
TC1 BLACK Monochrome Black mode position -> Color after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
mode position mode position -> Drum
COLOR Color mode separation position -> (Black AGING Aging operation setup
position mode position) INTERVAL Intermittent operation setting
FREE Non-transport (Repeated in this sequence.) MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection ignoring setting
position FUSING DISABLE Fusing unit ignoring setting
TC1_R BLACK Monochrome Black mode position -> Drum WARMUP DISABLE Warming up ignoring setting
mode position separation position -> Color DV CHECK DISABLE Developing unit ignoring setting
FREE Non-transport mode position -> (Black mode
SHADING DISABLE Shading correction operation omitting setting
position position) (Repeated in this
CCD GAIN FREE CCD gain adjustment omitting setting
COLOR Color mode sequence.)
position
TC2 PRINT Print position Print position -> Drum
FREE Non-transport separation position
7-6
position (Repeated in this sequence)
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging
cycle.
6-6
Section
Purpose Operation test/check
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to perform fusing pressure release 1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10-
and applying, and to check the operations key.
of the control circuits.
2) Press [OK] key.
Section Fusing
The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
Operation/Procedure
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec).
1) Press [FUSER] key to highlight it.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and fusing pressure applying and fus- after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
ing pressure release are repeated.
During this period, the status of the fusing roller pressure is dis-
played. 7-8
PRINT Fusing pressure Fusing pressure applying -> Fusing Purpose Operation display
applying pressure release -> (Fusing pressure Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
FREE Fusing pressure applying) The operation is repeated.
release Section
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key.
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for
warm-up is displayed
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 18
7-9 Adjustment Actual
Item/Display (Mode) Content
range voltage
Purpose Operation test/check MID- B MIDDLE Developing C 0 - 600 –450V
Function (Purpose) Color setting in the color copy test mode DLE SPEED bias voltage +/- 5V
(Used to check the copy operation and the DVB_C (Middle
image quality for each color). speed mode)
C MIDDLE Developing M 0 - 600 –450V
Section SPEED bias voltage +/- 5V
Operation/Procedure DVB_M (Middle
speed mode)
1) Select the copy color with the touch panel key.
(Two or more colors can be selected.) D MIDDLE Developing Y 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED bias voltage +/- 5V
The key of the selected color is highlighted. DVB_Y (Middle
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. speed mode)
Copying is performed with the selected color. LOW A LOW Developing K 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED bias voltage +/- 5V
When [CLOSE] key is pressed, the display goes into the copy oper- DVB_K (Low speed
ation menu in the simulation mode. mode)
B LOW Developing C 0 - 600 -450V
K Setup/cancel of black SPEED bias voltage ±5V
C Setup/cancel of cyan DVB_C (Low speed
M Setup/cancel of magenta mode)
Y Setup/cancel of yellow C LOW Developing M 0 - 600 -450V
SPEED bias voltage ±5V
DVB_M (Low speed
mode)
7-12 D LOW Developing Y 0 - 600 -450V
SPEED bias voltage ±5V
Purpose Operation test/check
DVB_Y (Low speed
Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets mode)
setting (for aging operation)
Section SPF
Operation/Procedure 8-2
1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key.
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
(Setting range:0 - 255)
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
the main charger grid voltage in each
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here- printer mode and the control circuit.
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the
low speed are also adjusted simultane-
ously.
Section Process (Charging)
8 Operation/Procedure
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
8-1 panel.
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment 2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified
the developing voltage in each print mode on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
and the control circuit. * When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
low speed are also adjusted simultane- 4) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
ously.
Section Process (Developing) Adjustment Actual
Item/Display (Mode) Content
range voltage
Operation/Procedure
MIDDLE A MIDDLE Main charger K 50 - 850 -592V
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch SPEED grid voltage ±5V
panel. GB_K (Middle
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys. speed mode)
B MIDDLE Main charger C 50 - 850 -592V
3) Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the
SPEED grid voltage ±5V
label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.) GB_C (Middle
* When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item speed mode)
can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. C MIDDLE Main charger M 50 - 850 -592V
4) Press [OK] key. Press [OK] key. The set value is saved. SPEED grid voltage ±5V
GB_M (Middle
Adjustment Actual speed mode)
Item/Display (Mode) Content D MIDDLE Main charger Y 50 - 850 -592V
range voltage
MIDDLE A MIDDLE Developing K 0 - 600 –450V SPEED grid voltage ±5V
SPEED bias voltage +/- 5V GB_Y (Middle
DVB_K (Middle speed mode)
speed mode)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 19
Adjustment Actual
Item/Display (Mode) Content
range voltage
LOW A LOW Main charger K 50 - 850 -583V
SPEED grid voltage ±5V
GB_K (Low speed
mode)
B LOW Main charger C 50 - 850 -583V
SPEED grid voltage ±5V
GB_C (Low speed
mode)
C LOW Main charger M 50 - 850 -583V
SPEED grid voltage ±5V
GB_M (Low speed
mode)
D LOW Main charger Y 50 - 850 -583V
SPEED grid voltage ±5V
GB_Y (Low speed
mode)
8-6
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the transport voltage and the control circuit.
Section Process (Transport)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Enter the default value specified on the following list.
3) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary transfer bias Low speed 0 - 255 85
K
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K adjustment value Middle speed 0 - 255 94
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C Low speed 0 - 255 85
C
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C Middle speed 0 - 255 94
Color
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M Low speed 0 - 255 85
M
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M Middle speed 0 - 255 94
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y Low speed 0 - 255 85
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y Middle speed 0 - 255 94
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Low speed 0 - 255 85
Monochrome K
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K Middle speed 0 - 255 94
K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer bias Front surface 0 - 255 90
Color Standard
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX adjustment value Back surface 0 - 255 90
paper
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Front surface 0 - 255 90
Monochrome <Middle speed>
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 0 - 255 90
O TC2 HEAVY1 CL SPX Front surface 0 - 255 90
Color Heavy paper
P TC2 HEAVY1 CL DPX Back surface 0 - 255 96
1<106 -176g/m2>
Q TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX Front surface 0 - 255 90
Monochrome <Low speed >
R TC2 HEAVY1 BW DPX Back surface 0 - 255 96
S TC2 HEAVY2 CL SPX Front surface 0 - 255 90
Color Heavy paper 2
T TC2 HEAVY2 CL DPX Back surface 0 - 255 96
<177 - 220g/m2>
U TC2 HEAVY2 BW SPX Front surface 0 - 255 90
Monochrome <Low speed >
V TC2 HEAVY2 BW DPX Back surface 0 - 255 96
W TC2 HEAVY3 CL SPX Front surface 0 - 255 90
Color Heavy paper 3
X TC2 HEAVY3 CL DPX Back surface 0 - 255 96
<221- 256g/ m2>
Y TC2 HEAVY3 BW SPX Front surface 0 - 255 90
Monochrome <Low speed>
Z TC2 HEAVY3 BW DPX Back surface 0 - 255 96
AA TC2 HEAVY4 CL Color Heavy paper 4 <257 - 300g/m2> 0 - 255 90
AB TC2 HEAVY4 BW Monochrome <Low speed > 0 - 255 90
AC TC2 OHP CL Color 0 - 255 103
OHP <Low speed >
AD TC2 OHP BW Monochrome 0 - 255 103
AE TC2 ENVELOPE CL Color 0 - 255 90
Envelope <Low speed >
AF TC2 ENVELOPE BW Monochrome 0 - 255 90
AG TC2 THIN CL Color 0 - 255 90
Thin paper <Low speed >
AH TC2 THIN BW Monochrome 0 - 255 90
AI TC2 GLOSSY PAPER CL Color 0 - 255 90
Gross paper <Low speed >
AJ TC2 GLOSSY PAPER BW Monochrome 0 - 255 90
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 20
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
AK TC2 EMBOSS CL Secondary transfer bias Color 0 - 255 90
Embossed paper <Low speed >
AL TC2 EMBOSS BW adjustment value Monochrome 0 - 255 90
AM TC2 LABEL CL Color 0 - 255 90
Label <Low speed >
AN TC2 LABEL BW Monochrome 0 - 255 90
AO TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW SPX Front edge bias adjustment In low speed front surface print 0 - 255 76
AP TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW DPX value In low speed back surface print 0 - 255 69
AQ TC2 FRONT EDGE MIDDLE SPX In middle speed front surface print 0 - 255 76
AR TC2 FRONT EDGE MIDDLE DPX In middle speed back surface print 0 - 255 69
AS TC2 BACKEND LOW SPX Rear edge bias adjustment In low speed front surface print 0 - 255 76
AT TC2 BACKEND LOW DPX value In low speed back surface print 0 - 255 69
AU TC2 BACKEND MIDDLE SPX In middle speed front surface print 0 - 255 0
AV TC2 BACKEND MIDDLE DPX In middle speed back surface print 0 - 255 0
AW TC2 INTERVAL LOW SPEED Bias reference value between In low speed print (+ pole) 0 - 255 66
AX TC2 INTERVAL MIDDLE SPEED papers In middle speed print (+ pole) 0 - 255 95
AY TC2 CLEANING MINUS LOW SPEED Cleaning negative bias In low speed print (- pole) 0 - 255 54
AZ TC2 CLEANING MINUS MIDDLE SPEED adjustment value In middle speed print (- pole) 0 - 255 59
BA TC2 CLEANING PLUS LOW SPEED Cleaning negative bias In low speed print (+ pole) 0 - 255 66
BB TC2 CLEANING PLUS MIDDLE SPEED adjustment value In middle speed print (+ pole) 0 - 255 95
BC PTC LOW SPEED CL PTC current adjustment value Low speed 0 - 255 109
Color
BD PTC MIDDLE SPEED CL Middle speed 0 - 255 206
BE PTC LOW SPEED BW Low speed 0 - 255 109
Monochrome
BF PTC MIDDLE SPEED BW Middle speed 0 - 255 206
BG CASE VOLT LOW CL PTC case voltage adjustment Low speed 0 - 255 0
Color
BH CASE VOLT MIDDLE CL value Middle speed 0 - 255 0
BI CASE VOLT LOW BW Low speed 0 - 255 0
Monochrome
BJ CASE VOLT MIDDLE BW Middle speed 0 - 255 0
BK DHV LOW SPEED CL SPX Separation bias reference Front surface 0 - 255 80
Color
BL DHV LOW SPEED CL DPX value Back surface 0 - 255 109
Low speed
BM DHV LOW SPEED BW SPX Front surface 0 - 255 80
Monochrome
BN DHV LOW SPEED BW DPX Back surface 0 - 255 109
BO DHV MIDLLE SPEED CL SPX Front surface 0 - 255 226
Color
BP DHV MIDLLE SPEED CL DPX Back surface 0 - 255 226
Middle speed
BQ DHV MIDLLE SPEED BW SPX Front surface 0 - 255 226
Monochrome
BR DHV MIDLLE SPEED BW DPX Back surface 0 - 255 226
8-10
9
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
9-2
the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit. Purpose Operation test/check
Section Process (Charging) Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and detectors in the paper reverse
Operation/Procedure
section (duplex section) and its control cir-
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch cuit.
panel.
Section Duplex
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
Item/Display Setting Default Changeabl played.
Contents
range value e range The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
Main charger are highlighted.
MI MIDDLE -500 to -
total current 50 to
DD A SPEED 83 800 micro
(Middle speed 100 APPD1 ADU paper transport detector 1
LE MC_K A
mode) K APPD2 ADU paper transport detector 2
Main charger DSW_ADU ADU paper guide open/close detector
LOW1 -500 to -
LO total voltage 50 to
A SPEED 83 800 micro
W (Middle speed 100
MC_K A
1 mode) K
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 21
9-3 TCE_M Toner cartridge discharge M
TCE_Y Toner cartridge discharge Y
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
the paper reverse section (duplex section)
and its control circuit.
Section Duplex 13
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel 13--
key. Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
The selected load performs the operation. Section
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Display Content
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
ADUM1 ADU motor 1
ADUM2 ADU motor 2
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid
14
14--
10
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 22
Item Display Content
21 Copy COPY (BW) Black and white Billing target
copy counter (excluding self print)
COPY (COL) Full color copy Billing target
21-1
counter (excluding self print)
Purpose Setting COPY (2COL) 2-color copy Billing target
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle. counter (excluding self print)
COPY Single color copy Billing target
Section (SGL_COL) counter (excluding self print)
Operation/Procedure Print PRINT (BW) Black and white Billing target
* Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance print counter (excluding self print)
counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing clean- PRINT (COL) Full color print Billing target
ing roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not counter (excluding self print)
clarify. PRINT (2COL) 2-color print Billing target
counter (excluding self print)
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
PRINT (3COL) 3-color print Billing target
panel. counter (excluding self print)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. PRINT Single color print Billing target
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) (SGL_COL) counter (excluding self print)
Document DOC FIL (BW) Black and white
Default value filing document filing
Setting 30 ppm 35 ppm/ print counter
Item/Display Content
range machine 40 ppm DOC FIL Color document
machine (COL) filing print counter
A MAINTE- Maintenance 0: 250K 300K DOC FIL 2-color document
NANCE counter (Total) Default (2COL) filing print counter
COUNTER 1 - 300: DOC FIL(SGL Single color
(TOTAL) 1K - 300K COL) document filing
999:Free print counter
B MAINTE- Maintenance 0: 250K 300K Other OTHER (BW) Black and white Self print quantity
NANCE counter Default other counter
COUNTER (Color) 1 - 300: OTHER (COL) Color other Self print quantity
(COLOR) 1K- 300K counter
999:Free
22-2
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
22 Function (Purpose) Used to check the total number of misfeed
and troubles. (When the number of total
22-1 jam is considerably great, it is judged as
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/ necessary for repair.)
Check Section
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each Operation/Procedure
section and each operation mode. The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
Section MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter
RSPF/DSPF JAM SPF JAM counter
Operation/Procedure
TROUBLE Trouble counter
Change the display page with scroll key on the touch panel.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 23
22-4 22-6
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his- Function (Purpose) Used to output the setting/adjustment data
tory. (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the
Section firmware version, and the counter list.
Operation/Procedure Section
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items. Operation/Procedure
(The old ones are deleted sequentially.) * When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
22-5 1) Select the print list mode with 10-key.
Purpose Others Print list
Display Print content
Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each mode
unit (section). DATA NO.1 Firmware version, counter data, etc.
PATTERN NO.2 SIM50-24 data
Section Firmware
NO.3 Data related to the process control
Operation/Procedure
2SIDED PRINT 1-SIDED One sided printing (Default)
The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed. 2-SIDED Double sided printing
When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to
check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step
1).
Display Content
Serial No. (The codes for November and
S/N
December are "X" and "Y" respectively.)
22-8
BUNDLE Bundle version
ICU-MAIN ICUM (MAIN section) Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
ICU-BIOS ICUM (BIOS section) Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of operations
ASIC-MAIN ASIC (MAIN section) (counter value) of the finisher, the SPF, and
ASIC-SUB ASIC (SUB section) the scan (reading) unit.
LANGUAGE Language support data version
Section
LANGUAGE (LIST) Language data for list printing
EOSA ESCP font ROM Operation/Procedure
UNICONTENTS Contents data for display The counter values of the finisher, the SPF, and the scanner related
SIM-TEXT Language data for simulation counters are displayed.
PCL (PROFILE) Color profile data
POWER-CON Power controller program Display Content
FONT BARCODE Font data for bar code SPF Document feed quantity
FONT PS PS font data SCAN Number of times of scan
FONT PCL PCL font data STAPLER Staple counter
FONT SPDL Simple PDL font data PUNCHER Puncher counter
FONT OFFICE Office Direct font data STAMP Stamp counter
WATER MARK Water mark data SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
E-MANUAL Users manual data SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
OCR-DIC OCR dictionary data COVER Document cover open/close counter
SCU SCU HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection
DSPF DSPF OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the scanner lamp
PCU PCU DSPF LAMP TIME Total lighting time of DSPF lamp (* hour *
minutes)
DESK/ESK (TANDEM) Desk unit
FIN OUTPUT Finisher output counter
LCC LCC
STAPLELESS STAPLE Stapleless staple counter
FINISHER/FINISHER
(1KFIN)/ FINISHER MANUAL STAPLE Manual staple counter
Finisher
(3KFIN)/ FINISHER
(INNER)
JOGGER 3K finisher jogger
FIN-SUB 3K finisher sub 22-9
SADDLE Saddle Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
PUNCH/UNCH(3K)/ Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print
Punch unit
UNCH(IN)
quantity) of each paper feed section.
FAX OPT1 FAX 1-Line (Option section)
ACU High compression PDF unit Section Paper feed, ADU
Operation/Procedure
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.
Display Content
TRAY1 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 1)
TRAY2 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 2)
TRAY3 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 3)
TRAY4 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 4)
MFT Manual paper feed counter
LCC LCC paper feed counter
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 24
Display Content Item display Display
Content
ADU ADU paper transport counter name content
TRAY1_TTL Accumulated tray 1 paper feed counter MX-FR-51U/ Data security kit (commercial version)
SECURITY
TRAY2_TTL Accumulated tray 2 paper feed counter MX-FR52U
TRAY3_TTL Accumulated tray 3 paper feed counter ICU_PWB *****MB ICU REUS capacity
TRAY4_TTL Accumulated tray 4 paper feed counter (REUS)
MFT_TTL Accumulated manual paper feed counter ICU_PWB *****MB ICU SOC capacity
(SOC)
LCC_TTL Accumulated side LCC paper feed counter
HDD *****GB Hard disk capacity
ADU_TTL Accumulated ADU paper feed counter
SSD *****MB SSD capacity
TRAY1_RETRY Paper feed retry counter (Paper feed tray 1)
BARCODE MX-PF10 Barcode font kit
TRAY2_RETRY Paper feed retry counter (Paper feed tray 2)
INTERNET- MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
TRAY3_RETRY Paper feed retry counter (Paper feed tray 3)
FAX
TRAY4_RETRY Paper feed retry counter (Paper feed tray 4)
AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module
MFT_RETRY Manual paper feed retry counter
MX-AMX2/ Application communication module
LCC_RETRY LCC paper feed retry counter ACM
STANDARD
MX-AMX3/ External account module
EAM
STANDARD
OFFICE DRT MX-PU10 Direct print expansion kit
22-10
HC-PDF MX-EB11 Enhanced compression kit (ACRE)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration
(option, internal hardware).
22-11
Section
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/
The system configuration is displayed.
receive) of FAX.
(The model names of the installed devices and options are dis-
(Only when FAX is installed)
played.)
Section FAX
Item display Display
Content
Operation/Procedure
name content
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
MX-3070N Main unit
are displayed.
MX-3570N
MX-4070N FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter
MX-3060N FAX SEND FAX send counter
MACHINE MX-3560N FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
MX-4060N SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter
MX-3050N SEND TIME FAX send time
MX-3550N RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
MX-4050N
SPF STANDARD Duplex single pass feeder
STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp
MX-DE25 STAND/550 SHEET PAPER DRAWER 22-12
MX-DE26 STAND/2x550 SHEET PAPER DRAWER Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
DESK MX-DE27 STAND/3x550 SHEET PAPER DRAWER
MX-DE28 STAND/550<FmSdata>[amp ]2100
Function (Purpose) Used to check the SPF misfeed positions
SHEET PAPER DRAWER and the number of misfeed at each posi-
LCC MX-LC17 A4 Large capacity tray tion. (When the number of misfeed is con-
MX-PN14A Punch unit siderably great, it can be judged as
MX-PN14B necessary for repair.)
MX-PN14C Section SPF
MX-PN14D Operation/Procedure
MX-PN15A
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
MX-PN15B
PUNCHER up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
MX-PN15C
MX-PN15D
MX-PN16A
MX-PN16B 22-13
MX-PN16C Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
MX-PN16D
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the
MX-FN27 Inner finisher
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
MX-FN28 Finisher (1K)
cartridge) and the fusing unit
FINISHER MX-FN29 Saddle stitch finisher (1K)
MX-FN30 Finisher (3K) Section Process
MX-FN31 Saddle stitch finisher (3K) Operation/Procedure
MX-TR19 Exit tray unit The number of prints and the number of rotations in the process
EXIT TRAY
MX-TU16 Exit tray cabinet section are displayed.
STANDARD/ Job separator tray
SEPARATOR
MX-TR20 Item/Display Content
FAX1 MX-FX15 Facsimile expansion kit MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) (Counter)
PS STANDARD PS expansion kit MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color)
FUSING BELT Fusing belt
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 25
Item/Display Content 22-18
FUSING ROLLER Fusing roller
PRESSURE ROLLER Fusing pressure roller
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
SEPARATE PAWL Fusing separation pawl Function (Purpose) Used to display the user data delete history.
SEPARATE PLATE Fusing separation plate Section
FUSING WEB UNIT Fusing web unit
Operation/Procedure
FUSING WEB SEND Fusing web cleaning send counter
FUSING LOAD Fusing pressure release roller
The date and time of the user data delete are displayed.
TC1 BELT Primary transfer belt
Display item
TRANSFER BLADE Transfer cleaning blade Content
Item name Date
TC CL ROLLER Transfer cleaning roller
START Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time
TC2 ROLLER Secondary transfer roller
of operation start)
PTC PTC counter
END Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time
PS PAPER Paper dust cleaner of operation end)
OZONE FILTER Ozone filter
DEVE CTRG (K) DV unit (K)
DEVE CTRG (C) DV unit (C)
DEVE CTRG (M) DV unit (M) 22-19
DEVE CTRG (Y) DV unit (Y)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
DRUM UNIT (K) OPC drum unit (K)
DRUM UNIT (C) OPC drum unit (C) Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters
DRUM UNIT (M) OPC drum unit (M) related to the scan - image send.
DRUM UNIT (Y) OPC drum unit (Y) Section
MAIN CHARGER (K) Main charger (K) Operation/Procedure
MAIN CHARGER (C) Main charger (C)
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner
MAIN CHARGER (M) Main charger (M)
MAIN CHARGER (Y) Main charger (Y)
Change the display with scroll key.
MC CLEAN (K) MC cleaner K
Item/Display Content
MC CLEAN (C) MC cleaner C
Network NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
MC CLEAN (M) MX cleaner M
scanner ORG_B/W counter (B/W scan job)
MC CLEAN (Y) MC cleaner Y
NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
DRUM BLADE (K) OPC drum cleaning blade K ORG_CL counter (Color scan job)
DRUM BLADE (C) OPC drum cleaning blade C NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
DRUM BLADE (M) OPC drum cleaning blade M ORG_2CL counter (2-Color scan job)
DRUM BLADE (Y) OPC drum cleaning blade Y NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
TONER CTRG (K) Toner cartridge (K) ORG_SGL counter (Single-color scan job)
TONER CTRG (C) Toner cartridge (C) Internet INTERNET Number of internet FAX output
TONER CTRG (M) Toner cartridge (M) FAX FAX OUTPUT
TONER CTRG (Y) Toner cartridge (Y) INTERNET Number of internet FAX sending page
FAX SEND
OUTPUT
INTERNET Number of internet FAX receive
22-14 FAX RECEIVE
INTERNET Number of internet FAX send
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
FAX SEND
Function (Purpose) Used to display the use status of the toner E-Mail MAIL Number of times of E-MAIL send
cartridge. COUNTER
Section Process FTP FTP Number of FTP send
COUNTER
Operation/Procedure
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send
The status of the toner cartridge is displayed. USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
TRIAL Trial mode counter
Accumul
Accumul MODE_B&C (B/W & COLOR scan job)
ated No. Accumul
ated No. SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
Display of ated No.
Content of near HDD_B/W
item installed of end
cartridge
near end
(Unit) SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity
s (Unit)
(Unit) HDD_CL (COLOR)
INSTALL NN END END SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity
HDD_2CL (2-COLOR)
Toner cartridge use
TONER(K) 0 - 510 0 - 510 0 - 510 SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity
counter (K)
HDD_SGL (SINGLE color)
Toner cartridge use
TONER(C) 0 - 510 0 - 510 0 - 510
counter (C)
Toner cartridge use
TONER(M) 0 - 510 0 - 510 0 - 510
counter (M)
Toner cartridge use
TONER(Y) 0 - 510 0 - 510 0 - 510
counter (Y)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 26
Display data and contents (COUNTER)
22-40
Item Content
Purpose Error contents display PAPER JAM COUNT Number of machine JAM troubles
Function (Purpose) Used to display the error code list and the PAPER FEED COUNTER Paper feed counter (Similar with
contents. SIM22-09 display content)
PAPER FEED RETRY COUNTER Paper feed retry counter (Similar
Section with SIM27-18 display content)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the main error code. Display data and contents (HISTORY1)
The sub error code and the contents are displayed. Item Content Description
NO No History number
JAM CODE JAM Code Jam code main
DATE/TIME Date/Time Occurrence date
22-41
TOTAL_BW Total Count (BW) Total counter (B/W)
Purpose JAM code contents display TOTAL_CL Total Count (CL) Total counter (color)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the JAM code list and the P_S (*1) Paper Size Paper size
contents. P_T (*1) Paper Type Paper type
Section JOB (*1) Job Mode Job mode
JN Job No First after JOB start or not
Operation/Procedure
OF Offset Paper exit: Offset
1) Select the JAM code. EP Exit Position Paper exit: Exit position
Display can be changed by [ENGINE] and [SPF] keys. PC Punch Paper exit: Punch
SP Staple Paper exit: Staple
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 27
Display Content Display Content
01A Inch series 9x12 09B Domestic 119 x 197 mm
01B fixed form 9x12R 09D special 120 x 176 mm
01C 13x19 09F (Enve- 114 x 162 mm
01D 13x19R 0A1 lope) 98 x 148 mm
MLG Mexican-Legal 0A3 105 x 235 mm
MLR Mexican-Legal-R 0A5 95 x 217 mm
ALG Asian-Legal 0A7 98 x 190 mm
ALR Asian -Legal-R 0A9 92 x 165 mm
EXT Other Extra (Special) 0AA AB series E-version
A1 AB series A1 0AB AB series L-version
A1R fixed form A1R 0AC AB series panorama size
A2 A2 0AD AB series name card size
A2R A2R 0AE AB series identification photo
A3 A3 0AF AB series name card small
A3R A3R 0B0 Other A3 width
A4 A4 0B1 B4 width
A4R A4R 0B2 A4 width
A5 A5 0B3 A3 width (Long size)
A5R A5R 0B4 B4 width (Long size)
A6 A6 0B5 A4 width (Long size)
A6R A6R 0BC Custom (Large size)
B3 B3 0BD Custom (Small size)
B3R B3R 0BF Custom
B4 B4 0C2 Oversea Monarch
B4R B4R 0C3 special Monarch-R
B5 B5 0C4 (Envelope) DL
B5R B5R 0C5 DL-R
B6 B6 0C6 C4
B6R B6R 0C7 C4-R
54 A0x2 0C8 C5
55 A0x2 R 0C9 C5-R
A0 A0 0CA C6
A0R A0R 0CB C6-R
B0 B0 0CC C65
B0R B0R 0CD C65-R
B1 B1 0CE ISOB5
B1R B1R 0CF ISOB5-R
B2R B2 0D0 Size6-1/2
B2R B2R 0D1 Size6-1/2-R
K8 K8 0D2 Size9
K8R K8R 0D3 Size9-R
K16 K16 0D8 Com-10
16R K16R 0D9 Com-10-R
K32 K32 0DA Inch series E-version
32R K32R 0DB Inch series L-version
66 SRA3 0DC Inch series panorama size
67 SRA3R 0DD Inch series name card large
68 SRA4 0DE Inch series identification photo
69 SRA4R 0DF Inch series name card small
06A 318 x 469 mm 0EC Other Extra (Special large size)
06B 469 x 318 mm 0ED Extra (Special small size)
06C 234 x 318 mm 0EF Extra (Special/Not fixed)
06D 318 x 234 mm 0F0 Long size
06E 312 x 440 mm 0FF JAM (Used for canceling temporary charging in
06F 440 x 312 mm a coin vendor.)
70 220 x 312 mm
Display content detail: Paper type (P_T)
71 312 x 220 mm
82 Domestic DBL Postcard Display Content
83 special DBL Postcard-R UST User type
84 (Envelope) Postcard LHP Letter head paper
85 Postcard-R PNP Perforated sheet
87 119 x 277 mm RCL Recycled paper
89 120 x 235 mm COL Color paper
08B 90 x 205 mm PLN Standard paper
08D 90 x 185 mm PRP Pre printed
08F 240 x 332 mm OHP OHP Transparency
91 216 x 277 mm HV Heavy paper
93 197 x 267 mm LBL Label sheet
95 190 x 240 mm ENV Envelope
97 162 x 229 mm HG Postcard
99 142 x 205 mm TAB Tab sheet
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 28
Display Content Category Item Content
THN Thin paper Home screen HOME SCREEN LIST Home screen list
US1 User type 1 Copy setting COPY SETTINGS LIST Copy settings list
US2 User type 2 Printer setting PRINTER SETTINGS LIST Printer settings list
US3 User type 3 FAX/Image METADATA SET LIST Meta data set list
US4 User type 4 send SCAN SETTINGS LIST Scan settings list
US5 User type 5 FAX SETTINGS LIST Fax settings list
US6 User type 6 I-FAX SETTINGS LIST Internet fax settings list
US7 User type 7 Document DOCUMENT FILING Document filing settings
HV2 Heavy paper 2 filing list SETTINGS LIST list
PL2 Plain paper 2 (not used) SHARP OSA SHARP OSA SETTINGS SHARP OSA settings list
HV3 Heavy paper 3 setting LIST
HV4 Heavy paper 4 Network NETWORK SETTINGS Network settings list
GLS Glossy paper setting LIST
Security SECURITY SETTINGS Security settings list
Display content detail: Job mode (JOB) setting LIST
Energy save ENERGY SAVE LIST Energy save settings list
Display Content
setting
SHD Shading.
Image quality IMAGE QUALITY Image quality
PCL Process control
adjustment ADJUSTMENT LIST adjustment list
SIM Test mode (Sim)
Image sending IMAGE SENDING Image sending activity
ICP Interruption copy activity report ACTIVITY REPORT (FAX) report (FAX)
CP Copy IMAGE SENDING Image sending activity
FXS FAX send scan ACTIVITY REPORT (SCAN) report (scanner)
AXS AXIS IMAGE SENDING Image sending activity
FXP FAX reception print ACTIVITY REPORT report (Internet FAX)
PR Printer (INTERNET FAX)
FXC FAX communication report print Transfer table ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER Receive rejection
00A Zaurus print list LIST number table
SLF Self/Test print ALLOW/REJECT MAIL Receive rejection/allow
00C Document counter <FmSdata>[amp ] address
RMT Remote maintenance DOMAIN NAME LIST
00E SIM 52-01 INBOUND ROUTING LIST Transfer table list
00F Tandem (Cordless handset) DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST To administrator transfer
list
CFP Confidential print
NET Network scanner * When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK
PRF Proof print model, this setting is invalid.
22-90
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check 23
Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.
Section 23-2
Operation/Procedure Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
1) Change the display with scroll key. Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of
2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel. paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of
troubles of misfeed is considerably great,
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
the judgment is made that repair is
Category Item Content required.)
Machine status MACHINE STATUS LIST Machine status list Section
list Operation/Procedure
Printer test PCL SYMBOL SET LIST SPDL symbol set list
page
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print.
PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST SPDL internal font list
PCL EXTENDED FONT SPDL extended font list The trouble history of paper jams and misfeed is printed.
LIST
PS FONT LIST PS internal font list
KANJI FONT LIST PS KANJI font list 23-80
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST PS extended font list
Purpose Operation test/check
NIC PAGE NIC page
Address INDIVIDUAL LIST Address registration list Function (Purpose) Used to print out list of the paper transport
registration list GROUP LIST Group list time when the paper JAM is occurred.
MEMORY BOX LIST Memory box list Section Paper feed, Paper transport
Document DOCUMENT FILING Document filing folder Operation/Procedure
filing list FOLDER LIST list
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Common PAPER SETTING LIST Paper setting list
MACHINE Machine identification 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the
IDENTIFICATION settings list timing list of paper feed and paper transport is outputted.
SETTINGS LIST
Print item list
OPERATION SETTINGS Operation settings list
LIST Item Content
KEYBOARD SETTINGS Keyboard settings list JAM CODE JAM code
LIST DATE/TIME JAM occurrence date
DEVICE CONTROL LIST Device control list MODE Printing mode when JAM is occurred.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 29
Item Content 24-3
SIZE Paper size
TYPE Paper type
Purpose Data clear
PIC TRAY Paper feed tray Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the
OUT TRAY Paper exit tray scan (reading) unit counter.
SECTION Measurement interval of transport time Section
STANDARD Theoretical value of transport time
Operation/Procedure
JAM-1 Measurement time of the paper right before the JAM
paper 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
JAM Measurement time of the JAM paper 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
POS/STATUS MIOP (Sensor/Load) data of JAM occurrence 3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 30
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
Separation SEPARATE Separation pawl (Counter) Drum blade DRUM BLADE Drum blade K (Counter)
PAWL Separation pawl (Number of use days) K Drum blade K (Number of use days)
Separation pawl Drum blade K
(Accumulated number of rotations) (Accumulated number of rotations)
SEPARATE Separation plate (Counter) DRUM BLADE Drum blade C (Counter)
PLATE Separation plate (Number of use days) C Drum blade C (Number of use days)
Separation plate Drum blade C
(Accumulated number of rotations) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Transfer TC1 BELT Primary transfer belt (Counter) DRUM BLADE Drum blade M (Counter)
Primary transfer belt M Drum blade M (Number of use days)
(Number of use days) Drum blade M
Primary transfer belt (Accumulated number of rotations)
(Accumulated number of rotations) DRUM BLADE Drum blade Y (Counter)
TRANS BLADE Transfer blade (Counter) Y Drum blade Y (Number of use days)
Transfer blade (Number of use days) Drum blade Y
Transfer blade (Accumulated number of rotations)
(Accumulated number of rotations) Other PS PAPER PS paper dust cleaner (Counter)
TC CL ROLLER Transfer cleaning roller (Counter) PS paper dust cleaner
Transfer blade (Number of use days) (Number of use days)
Transfer cleaning roller (Accumulated OZONE FILTER Ozone filter (Counter)
number of rotations) Ozone filter (Number of use days)
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer belt (Counter)
Secondary transfer belt
(Number of use days)
Secondary transfer belt 24-5
(Accumulated number of rotations) Purpose Data clear
PTC PTC counter (Counter)
PTC counter (Number of use days)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. (After
PTC counter
replacement of developer, clear the coun-
(Accumulated number of rotations) ter.)
Drum DRUM UNIT K Drum unit (K) (Counter) Section
Drum unit (K) (Number of use days) Operation/Procedure
Drum unit (K)
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
(Accumulated number of rotations)
Drum DRUM UNIT C Drum unit (C) (Counter) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Drum unit (C) 3) Press [YES] key.
(Number of use days) The target counter is cleared.
Drum unit (C)
(Accumulated number of rotations)
DRUM UNIT M Drum unit (M) (Counter)
Drum unit (M) (Number of use days) When SIM25-2 is executed, this counter is also cleared automati-
Drum cartridge (M) cally.
(Accumulated number of rotations)
DRUM UNIT Y Drum unit (Y) (Counter) Button
Content
display
Drum unit (Y) (Number of use days)
DV_K Developer cartridge print counter (K)
Drum unit (Y)
(Accumulated number of rotations) Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Main MAIN Main charger (K) (Counter) Number of day that used developer (day) (K)
charger CHARGER K Main charger (K) (Number of use days) DV_C Developer cartridge print counter (C)
Main charger (K) Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
(Accumulated number of rotations) Number of day that used developer (day) (C)
MAIN Main charger (C) (Counter) DV_M Developer cartridge print counter (M)
CHARGER C Main charger (C) (Number of use days) Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
Main charger (C) Number of day that used developer (day) (M)
(Accumulated number of rotations) DV_Y Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
MAIN Main charger (M) (Counter) Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
CHARGER M Main charger (M) (Number of use days) Number of day that used developer (day) (Y)
Main charger (M)
(Accumulated number of rotations)
MAIN Main charger (Y) (Counter)
CHARGER Y Main charger (Y) (Number of use days) 24-35
Main charger (Y) Purpose Data clear
(Accumulated number of rotations)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the toner cartridge use status
MC CLEAN K MC Cleaner K (Number of rotations)
data.
MC CLEAN C MC Cleaner C (Number of rotations)
MC CLEAN M MC Cleaner M (Number of rotations) Section
MC CLEAN Y MC Cleaner Y (Number of rotations) Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
The toner cartridge use status data (SIM22-14) are cleared.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 31
1 : ‘16/Feb.
Display Default
25 Division Item/Display
range value
Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_M_K 1 - 255 128
adjustment value in the AT DEVE ADJ_M_C 1 - 255 128
25-1 medium speed process AT DEVE ADJ_M_M 1 - 255 128
Purpose Operation test/check mode AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y 1 - 255 128
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel- Toner density sensor AT DEVE VO_L_K 1 - 255 128
oping section. control voltage level in AT DEVE VO_L_C 1 - 255 128
the low speed process AT DEVE VO_L_M 1 - 255 128
Section Process (Developing section) mode AT DEVE VO_L_Y 1 - 255 128
Operation/Procedure
Toner density sensor AT DEVE VO_M_K 1 - 255 128
1) Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] keys. control voltage level in AT DEVE VO_M_C 1 - 255 128
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. the medium speed AT DEVE VO_M_M 1 - 255 128
process mode AT DEVE VO_M_Y 1 - 255 128
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis- Display during execution of the simulation
played.
Item/Display Content
TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K) TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K)
TCS_C Toner sensor output value (C) TCS_C Toner sensor output value (C)
TCS_M Toner sensor output value (M) TCS_M Toner sensor output value (M)
TCS_Y Toner sensor output value (Y) TCS_Y Toner sensor output value (Y)
TSG_K Toner density sensor control voltage level (K) TSG_K Toner density sensor control voltage level (K)
TSG_C Toner density sensor control voltage level (C) TSG_C Toner density sensor control voltage level (C)
TSG_M Toner density sensor control voltage level (M) TSG_M Toner density sensor control voltage level (M)
TSG_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level (Y) TSG_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level (Y)
Error content
LOW Process speed: Low speed
MIDDLE Process speed: Medium speed Display Error name Error content
EE-EL EL abnormality The sensor output level is less than 77, or
the control voltage exceeds 207.
EE-EU EU abnormality The sensor output level exceeds 177, or the
The toner cartridge must be removed before executing this simula- control voltage is less than 52.
tion. EE-EC EC abnormality The sensor output level is outside of 128 +/-
10.
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridge installed, toner
will be forcibly supplied to the developing unit, resulting in over
toner and a trouble.
25-4
25-2
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner toner supply quantity. (Not used in the mar-
density when replacing developer. (Auto- ket.)
matic adjustment)
Section Process
Section Image process (Photo conductor/Develop-
Operation/Procedure
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
The operation data of the toner supply quantity are displayed.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a color to be adjusted with the touch panel.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
25-5
The developing motor rotates for 1 min, and the toner density sen-
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
sor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level is dis-
played. Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner density correction
After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner data. (Not used in the market.)
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con- Section Process
trol level. Operation/Procedure
The toner density correction data are displayed.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 32
1 : ‘16/Feb.
Default
26 Item/Display Content
value
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10
26-1 AUDITOR (standard mode) operation.
OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
Purpose Setting
AUDITOR vendor is used.
Function (Purpose) Used to set Yes/No of installation of the P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode
right paper exit tray. (Only the copy mode can be
controlled.)
Section Paper exit
P VENDOR3 Vendor mode in which
Operation/Procedure signals for the intercard
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. connected to the PCU are
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) used for communication in
parallel I/F.
This setting is required to use the right paper exit tray unit.
P OTHER Mode for an external auditor
connected to the SCU.
Item/Display Content
VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC
A 0 YES Paper exit tray:
(*1)
1 NO Paper exit tray:
VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job
1 B 0 YES Job separator (MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode
1 NO Job separator S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF
document filing print
OFF No support for the auditor in
26-2 document filing print
Purpose Setting PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF
performed in the duplex print
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the large
mode.
capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size If the remaining money
is changed, this simulation must be exe- expires during continuous
cuted to change the paper size in software.) printing, the sheets in the
Section Paper feed machine are discharged
without being printed on the
Operation/Procedure back surfaces.
Select a paper size and a weight system to be changed. OFF Continuous printing is not
performed in the duplex print
Item Setting value Content mode. (The remaining
0 8.5x11 amount is checked for
Tray4 printing every surface in all
1 A4
(Tandem) the printing process.)
2 B5
If the remaining money
0 8.5x11 expires during printing, the
LCC 1 A4 sheet is discharged without
2 B5 printing on the back surface.
0 Gram VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE
G/LBS Set
1 LBS MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
Destination Setting COUNTUP FUSER_IN Mode in which the detection EXIT_O
TRAY4 LCC G/LBS SET TIMING timing of the paper lead edge UT
(TANDEM) by the sensor after the paper
passes the fusing section is
U.S.A 8.5×11 8.5×11 LBS
used as the money charging
CANADA 8.5×11 8.5×11 LBS
timing.
INCH 8.5×11 8.5×11 LBS
FUSER_OUT Mode in which the detection
JAPAN B5 A4 GRAM timing of the paper rear edge
TAIWAN A4 A4 GRAM by the sensor after the paper
EUROPE A4 A4 GRAM passes the fusing section is
U.K. A4 A4 GRAM used as the money charging
AUS. A4 A4 GRAM timing.
AB A4 A4 GRAM EXIT_OUT Mode in which the detection
timing of the paper rear edge
by the paper exit sensor of
the right paper exit tray or of
the after process unit is used
26-3
as the money charging
Purpose Setting timing.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor. IMS ON Image send mode is limited. OFF
(Setting must be made according to the CONTROL OFF Image send mode is not
auditor use conditions.) limited.
Section Auditor
Operation/Procedure
Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 33
1 : ‘16/Feb.
Default 26-6
Item/Display Content
value
1 PRINTER MODE1 All the items in OUTSIDE MODE Purpose Setting
CONTROL AUDITOR and VENDOR 3 Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed
MODE are allowed to select. magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
MODE2 OUTSIDE AUDITOR is
always set to P VENDOR1
Section
and VENDOR MODE is Operation/Procedure
always set to MODE3. 1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
MODE3 OUTSIDE AUDITOR is
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
always set to P OTHER and
VENDOR MODE is always The selected set content is saved.
set to MODE3.
U.S.A. United States of America
(*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC. CANADA Canada
(*2) Refer to the details of the vendor mode. INCH Inch series, other destinations
JAPAN Japan
Details of the vendor mode
AB_B AB series (B5 detection), other destinations
Completion Insufficient money during Completion EUROPE Europe
of the copy job of the U.K. United Kingdom
specified specified
BW/Color Color AUS. Australia
quantity. quantity.
(no money (Money AB_A AB series (A5 detection), other destinations
(Money (No money
remaining) remaining)
remaining) remaining)
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4
MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1
26-7
MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1
MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3 Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine ID.
Operation 1:
Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,
which can be changed in the system setting. Section
Operation 2: Operation/Procedure
Auto clear is not made. 1) Enter the machine ID with the 10-key.
Operation 3: Max. 30 digits of numerals and alphabetical characters can be
The display is shifted to the initial screen. inputted.
To select a desired character, press the 10-key repeatedly.
Refer to the following list and enter characters.
26-5 Touch the "CONFIRM" section every time a character is input-
Purpose Setting ted.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total To modify an inputted character, delete it with "CLEAR" key
counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/ and enter the correct character.
11x17 size) 2) Press [SET] key to set the contents entered in procedure 1).
Section
Operation/Procedure
The machine ID can be set also by the Web Page service mode
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
function.
2) Enter the setting value with 10-key
Conventionally, the machine ID has been set by the Web Page
1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
function. In this mode, this function is made available in the simula-
3) Press [OK] key. tion mode.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Number of times of key input
Item/Display Content Default value 10-key
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - -
B TOTAL (COL) Total counter (Color) 2 A B C a b c 2 - - -
C MAINTNANCE Maintenance counter (B/W) 2 3 D E F d e f 3 - - -
E (B/W) 4 G H I g h i 4 - - -
D MAINTNANCE Maintenance counter (Color) 5 J K L j k l 5 - - -
E (COL)
6 M N O m n o 6 - - -
E DEV (B/W) Developer counter (B/W)
7 P Q R S p q r s 7 -
F DEV (COL) Developer counter (Color)
8 T U V t u v 8 - - -
9 W X Y Z w x y z 9 -
0 0 - - - - - - - - -
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 34
26-8 26-18
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Counter mode setting (Long scale) Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner
Section save mode operation.
(For the Japan and the UK versions.)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a setting item with the scroll key. Section
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 35
26-32 26-41
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the fusing Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi-
cleaning operation. cation ratio automatic select function (AMS)
Section Fusing in the center binding mode.
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Operation/Procedure
Enable/Disable of the user fusing cleaning function is set. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key.
0 AMS Disable
1 AMS Enable
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
2) Press [OK] key.
A CLEANIN User fusing cleaning 0 YES 0
G PRINT function is Enable. The set value in step 1) is saved.
SET User fusing cleaning 1 NO <Default value of each destination>
function is Disable.
U.S.A 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable)
CANADA 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable)
INCH 0 (Disable) AB_A 0 (Disable)
26-35 JAPAN 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable)
AB_B 0 (Disable) KOREA 0 (Disable)
Purpose Setting
EUROPE 1 (Enable) BRAZIL 0 (Disable)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4
trouble history when a same trouble
occurred repeatedly. There are two display
modes: display as one trouble and display 26-49
as several series of troubles. Purpose Setting
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards
Operation/Procedure mode.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Section
0 Only once display. (Default) Operation/Procedure
1 Any time display. Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW)
26-38
Purpose Setting 26-50
Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the Purpose Setting
maintenance life is reached. Function (Purpose) Used to set functions.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
2) Press [OK] key. panel.
The set value in step 1) is saved. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Default
Item/Display Content
value
Default
A MAINTENANCE 0 Setting of Print Continue/ 0 Item/Display Content
value
LIFE OVER Stop when the maintenance
A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer to *2
(0: CONTINUE life is over (Print Continue)
1 BW reverse copy Enable
1: STOP) 1 Setting of Print Continue/
B COLOR MODE 2-color/Single color copy mode 0 *1
Stop when the maintenance
Enable/Disable setting
life is over (Print Stop)
C FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0 *3
B FUSER WEB END 0 Continue/Stop setting of print 1
FUNCTION The number of paper exit is
(0: CONTINUE when the fusing web is end
limited.
1: STOP) (Print Continue)
1 Finisher special paper
1 Continue/Stop setting of print
The number of paper exit is not
when the fusing web is end
limited.
(Print Stop)
D COLOR MODE 0 All colors and monochrome 2
(PRINTER) counters are displayed.
1 All are displayed except for the
3-color print counter.
2 Monochrome and full color
print counters are displayed.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 36
Default Target Target paper setting
Item/Display Content
value paper 0 1
E FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0 Saddle Postcard, The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1,"
COLOR ON during paper feed Stitch envelope 30 sheets of a same kind are the operation is
1 Paper feed tray color display Finishe discharged continuously. When, stopped when
OFF during paper feed r however, different kinds of the paper exit
F BANNER SIZE 0 Banner size print disable 0 sheets are mixed and tray is full or
PRINT 1 Banner size print enable discharged and 30 or less when 500
G WIRELESS 0 Disables wireless LAN setting. 0 sheets of a kind are sheets of a sheets (67mm
SET kind are continuously thick) are
1 Enables wireless LAN setting.
discharged, the operation is discharged.
H POWER 0 Automatic power shut off is *2
stopped by the paper exit tray
SHUT-OFF displayed.
full detection.
SET 1 Automatic power shut off is not
Saddle Label The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1,"
displayed.
Stitch sheet, 100 sheets of a same kind are the operation is
I USB DEVICE 0 USB device setting is disabled 0 Finishe tab sheet, discharged continuously. When, stopped when
1 USB device is enabled r OHP however, different kinds of the paper exit
J PUNCH UNIT 0 No destination set 0 sheets are mixed and tray is full or
DESTINATION 1 2 holes discharged and 100 or less when 500
2 2, 3 holes sheets of a kind are sheets (67mm
3 2, 4 holes continuously discharged, the thick) are
4 4 holes (4 holes wide) operation is stopped by the discharged.
paper exit tray full detection.
(*1) Default values for each destination of item B
Mode 2-Color/Single
Set value
Single 2-color Counter 26-52
0 OFF OFF OFF Purpose Setting
1 OFF ON OFF
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper
2 ON OFF OFF
(insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
3 ON ON OFF
or not.
4 OFF OFF ON
5 OFF ON ON Section
6 ON OFF ON Operation/Procedure
7 ON ON ON 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
(*2)
0 Count up
<Default value of each destination> 1 No count up
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 37
26-66 Default
Item/Display Content
value
Purpose Setting G TONER MIB UNIT 0 Receive the remaining toner 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password for the simula- level MIB in 1% increment.
tion. 1 Receive the remaining toner
level MIB in 5% increment.
Section
2 Receive the remaining toner
Operation/Procedure level MIB in 25% increment.
1) The current password for the simulation is displayed.
Item E (TONER END COUNT) setting value and printable quan-
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. tity
3) Press [SET] key.
Setting value Printable quantity at A4/5% equivalent conversion
1 0
2 25
26-69 3 50
Purpose Setting
(Contents of set items)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for
A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display.
toner near end.
B: The toner remaining quantity at which the toner preparation
Section
message is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
C: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. when the toner near end status is reached.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. D: Machine operation at toner end
3) Press [OK] key. E: Number of allowable copy/print/FAX when the toner near end
The set value in step 2 is saved. message is displayed. (Range: 0 - 50 sheets)
The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the
Default
Item/Display Content assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 5%.
value
(The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper
A TONER 0 The toner preparation 0
PREPARATION message is displayed.
size and the print ratio.)
(0:YES 1:NO) 1 The toner preparation
message is not displayed.
B REMAINING 5% 0 Toner preparation at remaining 1 When item A is set to "0" and item E is properly set, printing can be
TONER toner level of 5% made after toner near end. However, improper phenomena such as
LEVEL 10% 1 Toner preparation at remaining insufficient density, thin spots, or improper color balance may result
toner level of 10% depending on the using conditions. When item E is set to "1" print-
15% 2 Toner preparation at remaining ing is disabled after toner near end. In this case, toner end display
toner level of 15%
is made in the toner near end status, and copy/print/FAX outputs
20% 3 Toner preparation at remaining
are disabled.
toner level of 20%
25% 4 Toner preparation at remaining
toner level of 25%
30% 5 Toner preparation at remaining 26-73
toner level of 30%
Purpose Setting
35% 6 Toner preparation at remaining
toner level of 35% Function (Purpose) Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide
40% 7 Toner preparation at remaining copy mode image loss (shade delete quan-
toner level of 40% tity) adjustment
45% 8 Toner preparation at remaining Section
toner level of 45%
Operation/Procedure
50% 9 Toner preparation at remaining
toner level of 50% 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
C TONER NEAR END 0 The toner near end message 0 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
(0:YES 1:NO) is displayed. 3) Press [OK] key.
1 The toner near end message
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
is not displayed.
(shade delete quantity) is increased.
D TONER END 1 Operation setup 1 2
2 Operation setup 2
Setting
3 Operation setup 3 Item/Display Content
range
Default value
E TONER END 1 Operation is allowed when 1 A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
COUNT TONER END is detected. SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment
2 Operation is stopped when (M) (shade delete amount:
TONER END is detected. *2 quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
3 Operation is stopped when B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
TONER END is detected. *3 SHADOW ADJ (S) loss quantity (shade (Adjustment
F TONER E-MAIL 0 Low status send of E-mail alert 1 delete quantity) amount:
ALERT (When the toner preparation adjustment 0.1mm/step)
message is displayed) (in near
near toner end)
1 Low status send of E-mail alert
(near toner end)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 38
26-74 26-85
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode. Function (Purpose) Used to set the function of the simulation
Section mode.
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key.
Default
Item/Display Content
value Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
A OSA TRIAL MODE 0 Used to set the OSA trial 1 value
(0: YES 1: NO) mode. A DISP SET Password input display for YES 1 0
1 OSA trial mode is canceled. transferring between each
simulation ON
Password input display for NO 0
transferring between each
26-78 simulation OFF
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote
operation panel.
Section 27
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits) 27-2
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW". Purpose Setting
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. ber and the HOST server telephone num-
2) Press [SET] key. ber. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
26-79 1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
Purpose Setting [USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
of user data security. 3) Press [SET] key.
Section The set value in step 2) is saved.
Operation/Procedure
USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
2) Press [OK] key. * If the connection process is not completed
normally when registering the FSS, calling to the
Default HOST may be continuously made every time
Item/Display Content Setting range
value when the power is turned ON (from OFF) or
A DISP SET Delete result supported the YES 1 0 rebooted.
security pop-up display ON In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to
Delete result supported the NO 0 the HOST.
security display OFF
B SIM Simulation start password YES 1 0
PASSWO input display ON
RD DISP Simulation start password NO 0
input display OFF
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 39
Operation/Procedure
27-4
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
Purpose Setting
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
3) Press [OK] key.
auto send. (FSS function)
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Section
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Remarks
range value
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send in NE-B mode 0-3 0 1
NEB2 Send/Receive in NE-B mode 1
NFB1 Exclusive for send in NE-F mode 2
NFB2 Send/Receive in NE-F mode 3
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 0: No retry
C TIMER(MINUTE)_BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 0: No retry
E TIMER(MINUTE)_ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1
F FAX RETRY Resend number setting when FAX initial connection 0 - 15 2 Unit: Number of times
G TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(K) NEAR_END timing setting (K) Near end 1
0.05 0.05 2
0.1 0.1 3
0.15 0.15 4
0.2 0.2 5
0.25 0.25 6
0.3 0.3 7
0.35 0.35 8
0.4 0.4 9
0.45 0.45 10
0.5 0.5 11
H TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(C) NEAR_END timing setting (C) Near end 1
0.05 0.05 2
0.1 0.1 3
0.15 0.15 4
0.2 0.2 5
0.25 0.25 6
0.3 0.3 7
0.35 0.35 8
0.4 0.4 9
0.45 0.45 10
0.5 0.5 11
I TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(M) NEAR_END timing setting (M) Near end 1
0.05 0.05 2
0.1 0.1 3
0.15 0.15 4
0.2 0.2 5
0.25 0.25 6
0.3 0.3 7
0.35 0.35 8
0.4 0.4 9
0.45 0.45 10
0.5 0.5 11
J TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(Y) NEAR_END timing setting (Y) Near end 1
0.05 0.05 2
0.1 0.1 3
0.15 0.15 4
0.2 0.2 5
0.25 0.25 6
0.3 0.3 7
0.35 0.35 8
0.4 0.4 9
0.45 0.45 10
0.5 0.5 11
K TEMP HISTORY CYCLE Frequency of acquiring the temperature and humidity 1 - 1440 60 Unit: min.
history
L LOG OUTPUT CAPACITY(PCU) Log output capacity 0 - 50 30 Unit: [KB]
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 40
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Remarks
range value
M TONER ORDER TIMING CONTROL Toner order timing Toner order alert call at fixed toner 0-1 0 0
control remaining amount
LOG OUTPUT CAPACITY(PCU) Toner order alert call at predicted 1
toner consumption amount
N TONER ORDER DELIVERY SETTING Toner order delivery setting 0-1 0 0
1
O TONER ORDER DELIVERY INTERVAL Toner order delivery interval setting 1 - 15 3 Unit: Date
P REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE (PULL) Pull type firmware update is inhibited or not allowed. 0-1 0 1 0 : Allowed
1 1 : Inhibited
Q FIRMWARE VER. SEARCH INTERVAL Firmware search interval setting 1 - 90 7 Unit: Date
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 41
2) Press [YES] key. Display Item
The history information of trouble prediction is cleared. Occurrence date Retry Content
Item name
(Display) number
Target history Serial communication retry history DSPF GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits DSPF gain
High density process control error history DSPF GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits adjustment retry
Halftone process control error history DSPF GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history display
Automatic registration adjustment error history DSPF GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits * This is only for
Scanner gain adjustment retry history DSPF supported
DSPF GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
machines.
DSPF gain adjustment retry history
TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Black toner order
Paper transport time between sensors
ORDER(K) alert call date/
time
TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Cyan toner order
ORDER(C) alert call date/
27-11 time
Purpose Others TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits magenta toner
ORDER(M) order alert call
Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication
date/time
retry number and the scanner gain adjust-
TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Yellow toner
ment retry number history. (FSS function)
ORDER(Y) order alert call
Section date/time
Operation/Procedure
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed.
27-12
[RSPF] Purpose Others
Display Item Function (Purpose) Used to check the high density, halftone
Item name
Occurrence date Retry Content process control and the automatic registra-
(Display) number tion adjustment error history. (FSS Func-
LSU1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Serial tion)
LSU2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits communication
retry number Section
DESK1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
DESK2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history display Operation/Procedure
FINISHER1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits The high density, halftone process control and the automatic regis-
FINISHER2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits tration adjustment error history is displayed.
SCAN GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain
SCAN GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits adjustment retry HV_ERR1 High density process control error history 1
SCAN GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history HV_ERR2 High density process control error history 2
SCAN GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits HV_ERR3 High density process control error history 3
SCAN GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain HV_ERR4 High density process control error history 4
adjustment retry HV_ERR5 High density process control error history 5
history H_TONE ERR1 Halftone process control error history 1
TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Black toner order H_TONE ERR2 Halftone process control error history 2
ORDER(K) alert call date/ H_TONE ERR3 Halftone process control error history 3
time H_TONE ERR4 Halftone process control error history 4
TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Cyan toner order H_TONE ERR5 Halftone process control error history 5
ORDER(C) alert call date/ AUTO REG ADJ1 Automatic registration adjustment error history 1
time
AUTO REG ADJ2 Automatic registration adjustment error history 2
TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits magenta toner
AUTO REG ADJ3 Automatic registration adjustment error history 3
ORDER(M) order alert call
AUTO REG ADJ4 Automatic registration adjustment error history 4
date/time
AUTO REG ADJ5 Automatic registration adjustment error history 5
TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Yellow toner
ORDER(Y) order alert call
date/time
[DSPF] 27-13
Display Item Purpose Others
Occurrence date Retry Content Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
Item name
(Display) number time between sensors. (FSS function)
LSU1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Serial
Section
LSU2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits communication
DESK1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits retry number Operation/Procedure
DESK2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history display Change the display with scroll key.
FINISHER1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
FINISHER2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Item/Display Content
DSPF1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1
DSPF2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2
SCAN GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain FEED TIME3 History of paper transport time between sensors 3
SCAN GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits adjustment retry FEED TIME4 History of paper transport time between sensors 4
SCAN GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history FEED TIME5 History of paper transport time between sensors 5
SCAN GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits FEED TIME6 History of paper transport time between sensors 6
SCAN GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain FEED TIME7 History of paper transport time between sensors 7
adjustment retry FEED TIME8 History of paper transport time between sensors 8
history FEED TIME9 History of paper transport time between sensors 9
FEED TIME10 History of paper transport time between sensors 10
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 42
27-14 27-17
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
test mode. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select an item to be set.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The value for the FSS paper order alert operation specification
0 Disable (Default)
is set.
1 Enable
3) Press [SET] key.
2) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 1) is saved. Item/ Setting Default
Content NOTE
Display range value
PAPER Setting of paper kind 0-2 0 0: Standard
TYPE for paper order alert paper and
27-15 SET recycled paper
Purpose Operation test/check 1: Standard
paper only
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FSS connection status. 2: Recycled
Section paper only
Operation/Procedure A3 Paper order number 500 - 1250 Unit: No. of
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
The FSS operating status is displayed. sheets] (A3)
A4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
value
sheets] (A4)
FSS CONNECTION Used to display the 0 Not operated 0
B4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
FSS connection 1 Operated setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
status.
sheets] (B4)
B5 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
sheets] (B5)
27-16 A3: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
Purpose Setting FIRST number setting (A3) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS alert send.
sheets)
Section A4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
Operation/Procedure FIRST number setting (A4) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
sheets)
The value for the FSS alert operation specification is set. B4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
2) Press [OK] key. FIRST number setting (B4) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time
Setting Default sheets)
Item/Display Content
range value B5: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
A MAINTENANC Maintenance Alert send 0 0 FIRST number setting (B5) 10000 sheets for the
E ALERT alert send Enable (Number of used first time
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1 sheets)
Disable
B TONER Toner order Alert send 0 0
ORDER alert send Enable
ALERT (0:YES Enable setting Alert send 1
1:NO) Disable 30
C TONER CTRG Toner cartridge Alert send 0 0
ALERT (0:YES replacement Enable
1:NO) alert send Alert send 1 30-1
Enable setting Disable Purpose Operation test/check
D JAM ALERT Continuous Alert send 0 0
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
(0:YES 1:NO) JAM alert send Enable
Enable setting
sors and the detectors in other than the
Alert send 1
Disable
paper feed section and the control circuits.
E TROUBLE Trouble alert Alert send 0 0 Section
ALERT (0:YES send Enable Enable Operation/Procedure
1:NO) setting Alert send 1
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
Disable
played.
F PAPER Paper order Alert send 0 0
ORDER alert send Enable The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
ALERT (0:YES Enable setting Alert send 1 lighted.
1:NO) Disable
Display Contents
1TUD_CL Transfer mode sensor (CL)
1TUD_K Transfer mode sensor (K)
2TPD 2nd transfer rear paper sensor
2TUD 2nd transfer position sensor
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 43
Display Contents Display Contents
CCHPD_C MC cleaner HP-C * C2SS4 Paper feed tray size detector PWB
CCHPD_K MC cleaner HP-K * C2SSSETD Desk2 installation detection
CCHPD_M MC cleaner HP-M * MPED Paper empty sensor (Manual paper feed tray)
CCHPD_Y MC cleaner HP-Y * MPFD Paper feed sensor (Manual paper feed tray)
CCMD_C MC cleaner shift detection C * MPLD1 Paper length detector (Manual paper feed tray)
CCMD_K MC cleaner shift detection K *
CCMD_M MC cleaner shift detection M *
CCMD_Y MC cleaner shift detection Y *
DHPD_C Drum phase sensor C * 30-30
DHPD_CL Drum phase sensor CL * Purpose Operation test/check
DHPD_K Drum phase sensor K * Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the motion
DHPD_M Drum phase sensor M * sensors, the detectors and the related cir-
DHPD_Y Drum phase sensor Y * cuits.
DSW_C1 Transport cover open/close detector (Paper feed tray 1)
DSW_C2 Cassette 2 transport cover open/close detection
Section
DSW_F Front door open/close detection SW Operation/Procedure
DSW_FU Front door upper open/close detection SW When you enter this simulation, the current status of the sensor is
DSW_R Right transport unit (Right door) open/close detection displayed.
HLPCD Fusing pressure sensor *1: Displayed, but not installed in some models.
POD1 Paper exit sensor 1
POD2 Paper exit sensor 2
POD3 Paper exit sensor 3
POD4 Paper exit sensor 4
PPD2 Paper transport sensor 2 40
PRTPD Paper exit paper sensor (Right paper exit tray)
SHPOS Shifter home positions sensor 40-2
TCED_C Toner cartridge discharge sensor C
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
TCED_K Toner cartridge discharge sensor K
TCED_M Toner cartridge discharge sensor M Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
TCED_Y Toner cartridge discharge sensor Y adjustment.
TFD2 Paper exit tray full sensor (Center paper exit tray) Section Paper feed
TFD3 Paper exit tray full sensor (Right paper exit tray)
Operation/Procedure
TFD4 Upper paper empty detection sensor
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX).
TNFD Waste toner full detection sensor
WEBEND Web end detection * 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized.
* Not used
3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4).
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
30-2 The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized.
5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R).
Purpose Operation test/check
6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and the detectors in the paper feed The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
section and the control circuits. 7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
Section 8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
played. displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high- MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width
lighted. P1(A4)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
P2(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R)
Display Contents
MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width
C1LUD Paper feed tray upper limit sensor (Paper feed tray 1)
C1PED Paper empty sensor (Paper feed tray 1)
C1PFD Paper transport detector (Paper feed tray 1)
C1PFPD Paper feed immediate detection sensor
40-7
C1SPD Paper remaining quantity sensor (Paper feed tray 1)
C1SS Paper feed tray 1 detector Purpose Adjustment/Setup
C1SS1 Paper feed tray size detector PWB Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
C1SS2 Paper feed tray size detector PWB manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
C1SS3 Paper feed tray size detector PWB Section Paper feed
C1SS4 Paper feed tray size detector PWB
Operation/Procedure
C2LUD Paper feed tray upper limit sensor (Paper feed tray 2)
C2PED Paper empty sensor (Paper feed tray 2) 1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
C2PFD Paper transport detector (Paper feed tray 2) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
C2SPD Paper remaining quantity sensor (Paper feed tray 2) 3) Press [OK] key.
C2SS1 Paper feed tray size detector PWB The set value in step 2) is saved.
C2SS2 Paper feed tray size detector PWB
C2SS2ETM Desk2 module empty detection
C2SS3 Paper feed tray size detector PWB
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 44
Default
Item/Display Content
value
43
A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 241
B P1 (A4) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4) 231 43-1
C P2 (A4R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width 140
Purpose Setting
(A4R)
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 19 Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the SW-A or the SW-B.
41 2) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
3) Select an item to be set with displayed value.
41-1
The set value in step 3) is saved.
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu- Display Content
Setting
Default
ment size sensor and the control circuit. range
PLAIN Used to change the fusing -20 0
Section PAP&WUP&RDY GR temperature setting of -15
Operation/Procedure plain paper, WUP, and -10
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- Ready series -5
played. 0
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high- +5
lighted. +10
+15
OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display +20
Close: Highlighted HEAVY PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display temperature setting of -15
sensor status Document present: Highlighted heavy paper series -10
-5
0
+5
41-2 +10
Purpose Adjustment +15
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor +20
detection level. THIN PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
temperature setting of thin -15
Section paper series -10
Operation/Procedure -5
1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without 0
place a document on the document table. +5
The sensor level without document is recognized. +10
2) Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table, and press +15
[EXECUTE] key. +20
RECYCLED PAPER Used to change the fusing -20 0
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed. GR temperature setting of -15
recycled paper series -10
-5
41-3 0
Purpose Operation test/check +5
+10
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
+15
ment size sensor and the control circuit.
+20
Section GLOSSY PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
Operation/Procedure temperature setting of -15
gloss paper series -10
The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document
sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time. -5
0
The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
+5
Item/Display Content Detection level range +10
OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close) +15
PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255 +20
PD2 Document detection 2 0 - 255 ENV PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
temperature setting of -15
PD3 Document detection 3 0 - 255
envelope series -10
PD4 Document detection 4 0 - 255
PD5 Document detection 5 0 - 255 -5
PD6 Document detection 6 0 - 255 0
PD7 Document detection 7 0 - 255 +5
+10
+15
+20
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 45
Setting Setting
Display Content Default Display Content Default
range range
EMBOSS PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0 WUP&RDY GR ADJ WUP/Ready HH -10 0
temperature setting of -15 HH environment fine -7
embossed paper -10 adjustment -5
-5 -3
0 0
+5 +3
+10 +5
+15 +7
+20 +10
OHP PAPER Used to change the fusing -20 0 PLAIN PAP ADJ HH Normal paper HH -10 0
temperature setting of -15 environment fine -7
OHP paper -10 adjustment -5
-5 -3
0 0
+5 +3
+10 +5
+15 +7
+20 +10
FUSING CONDITION Fusing condition 0 0 HEAVY PAPER GR Heavy paper HH -10 0
ADJ adjustment setting 1 ADJ HH environment fine -7
2 adjustment -5
3 -3
4 0
5 +3
ENV PAPER PRESS Envelop paper pressure 0 0 +5
PATTERN adjustment 1 +7
2 +10
WUP&RDY GR ADJ WUP/Ready LL -10 0 SPECIAL PAPER ADJ Special paper HH -10 0
LL environment fine -7 HH environment fine -7
adjustment -5 adjustment -5
-3 -3
0 0
+3 +3
+5 +5
+7 +7
+10 +10
PLAIN PAP ADJ LL Normal paper LL -10 0
environment fine -7 SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/
adjustment -5 device setting/fusing control setting.
-3 SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/
device setting/fusing control setting.
0
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on
+3
plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/
+5 device setting/fusing control setting.
+7 (Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/
+10 device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is
HEAVY PAPER GR Heavy paper LL -10 0 displayed.
ADJ LL environment fine -7
adjustment -5
-3 43-2
0
+3
Purpose Setting
+5 Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature and pre-
+7 heating.
+10 Section
SPECIAL PAPER ADJ Special paper LL -10 0
Operation/Procedure
LL environment fine -7
adjustment -5
1) Select the SW-A or SW-B.
-3 2) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
0 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
+3 4) Press [OK] key.
+5
The set value in step 3) is saved.
+7
+10
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 46
1 : ‘16/Feb.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/
Item / Display Content Setting Default
device setting/fusing control setting.
range value
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on
WARMUP Fusing motor previous rotation List of
plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/
A FUMON start TH_UM set value 0 - 200 Default
device setting/fusing control setting.
TH_UM T values
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/
WARMUP Fusing motor previous rotation and set
B 0 - 255 device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is
FUMOFF complete time values for
displayed.
WARMUP Warm-up complete time each
C 0 - 255 destinatio
END TIME
FM preliminary rotation start n
HI WU FM 43-20
D TH_UM when warming up at 0 - 200
ON TMP
alpha degree C or above Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Warm-up completion time
HI WU END Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction
E when warm-up at alpha 0 - 255
TIME under low temperature and low humidity (L/
degree C or above
Setting value applying time in L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
LO 43-2) in each paper mode.
warm-up of 120 degrees C or
F WARMUP 0 - 255
below (Timer from Ready Section
TIME
completion)
Operation/Procedure
Setting value applying time in
HI 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
warm-up of 120 degree C or
G WARMUP 0 - 255
above (Time from Ready 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
TIME
completion)
3) Press [OK] key.
HI Threshold value alpha to apply
H WARMUP the setting value in warm-up of 1 - 119 The set value in step 2) is saved.
BORDER alpha degree C or above Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
JOBEND After-rotation time after 99)
I FUMON completion of a job 0 - 255
TIME Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
TH_UM E- TH_UM set value when Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
J 30 - 200
STAR preheating
TH_LM E- TH_LM set value when
K 30 - 200 Default
STAR preheating
Setting value
TH_US E- TH_US set value when Item / Display Content
L 30 - 200 range 35/40
STAR preheating 30 ppm
ppm
TH_UM TH_UM set value from
M 30 - 200 Correction value for
PRE-JOB recovering the preheating WARMUP
fusing motor pre-
FUMON
A rotation start TH_UM 1 - 99 50 50
List of destination groups TH_UM T
set value under LL
LL
Group Destination environment
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – – Fusing motor prior
WARMUP
Group C EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A AB_B rotation completion
B FUMOFF 1 - 99 60 60
time under LL
LL
List of Default values and set values for each destination environment
Correction value for
Item Default value (30 ppm) Default value (35/40 ppm) WARMUP
warm-up completion
SW_A SW_B SW_A SW_B C END TIME 1 - 99 75 75
time under LL
Grou Grou Grou Grou Grou Grou Grou Grou LL
environment
pB pC pB pC pB pC pB pC Correction value for
A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FM prior rotation start
HI_WU_F
B 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 TH_UM in warm-up at
D M_ON_TM 1 - 99 50 50
1 C 7 7 30 30 7 7 30 30 alpha degree C or
P_LL
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 above under LL
1 E 7 7 30 30 7 7 30 30 environment
F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Correction value for
G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 warm-up completion
HI_WU_E
time in warm-up at
H 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 E ND_TIME_ 1 - 99 65 65
alpha degree C or
I 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 LL
above under LL
J 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 environment
1 K 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Correction value of
L 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 135 the setting value
M 150 150 155 155 150 150 155 155 applying time in
LO_WARM
warm-up of
F UP_TIME_ 1 - 99 65 65
Code descriptions 120degree C or below
LL
under LL environment
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper)
(Time from Ready
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) completion)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) Correction value of
the setting value
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/ applying time in
device setting/fusing control setting. HI_WARM warm-up of
G UP_TIME_ 120degree C or 1 - 99 65 65
LL above under LL
environment (Time
from Ready
completion)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 47
Default
Item / Display Content Setting Default
Setting value
Item / Display Content range value
range 35/40
30 ppm WARMUP Fusing motor previous List of Default
ppm
A FUMON rotation start TH_UM set 1 - 99 values and
Correction value of TH_UM T HH value set values for
the threshold value each
WARMUP Fusing motor previous
HI_WARM alpha to apply the B 1 - 99
FUMOFF HH rotation completion time destination
H UP_BORD setting value in warm- 1 - 99 50 50
WARMUP Warm-up completion
ER_LL up of alpha degree C
C END TIME time 1 - 99
or above under LL
HH
environment
HI_WU_FM_ FM preliminary rotation
Correction value for
ON_TMP HH start TH_UM when
JOBEND_ the after rotation time D 1 - 99
warming up at alpha
I FUMON_TI when completing a 1 - 99 50 50
degree C or above
ME LL job under LL
environment HI_WU_END Warm-up completion
E _TIME HH time when warm-up at 1 - 99
Correction value for
alpha degree C or above
TH_UM E- preheating TH_UM
J 1 - 99 55 55 LO_WARMU Correction value for AF -
STAR LL set value under LL
environment P_TIME_HH AH application time
F 1 - 99
(Time from Ready
Correction value for
complete)
TH_LM E- preheating TH_LM
K 1 - 99 55 55 HI_WARMUP Correction value for AJ -
STAR LL set value under LL
environment G _TIME HH AL application time (Time 1 - 99
from Ready complete)
Correction value for
TH_US E- preheating TH_US HI_WARMUP Threshold value alpha to
L 1 - 99 55 55 H _BORDER_H which AN - AP is applied 1 - 99
STAR LL set value under LL
environment H
Correction value for JOBEND_FU After-rotation time after
the set value of I MON_TIME completion of a job 1 - 99
TH_UM HH
TH_UM when
M PRE-JOB 1 - 99 55 55 TH_UM E- TH_UM set value when
restoring from J 1 - 99
LL STAR HH preheating
preheating under LL
environment TH_LM E- TH_LM set value when
K 1 - 99
STAR HH preheating
* Item WARMUP END TIME LL: 1 Count = 1s Change TH_US E- TH_US set value when
L 1 - 99
Correction value for the other items: 1 count for 1degrees C STAR HH preheating
change TH_UM PRE- Resetting from
M JOB HH preheating TH_UM set 1 - 99
Code descriptions value
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper)
* Item WARMUP END TIME HH: 1 Count = 1s Change
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) Correction value for the other items: 1 count for 1 degrees C
change
Code descriptions
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 48
1 : ‘16/Feb.
'LOSS CHANGE
Item / Display Content Setting Default SECTION
Value value
COOL_DOWN Cool down time List of Default
A 1-60
_HEAVY (Heavy paper) values and set
.IP WIDTH
COOL_DOWN Cool down time values for each
B 1-60
_OHP (OHP) destination
COOL_DOWN Cool down time
C 1-60
_ENVELOPE (Envelope)
Fusing web motor
D FUS_MOTOR 3-20
operating interval
Power supply voltage
E POWER SET 1:100V, 2 :110 - 1-3
120V, 3 : 220 - 240V
List of Default values and set values for each destination 44-1
Item Default value (30 ppm) Default value (35/40 ppm) Purpose Setting
Group B Group C Group B Group C Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
1 A 8 8 8 8 tion in the image forming (process) section.
B 8 8 8 8 Section Image process (Photo conductor/Develop-
C 8 8 8 8 ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
D 10 10 10 10
Operation/Procedure
E 2 3 2 3
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
(The selected item is highlighted.)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
43-35
Purpose Adjustment and setting
Function (Purpose) Fusing nip operation check Set the items to the default values unless a change is specially
required.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure Item/ Setting Default
Content
1) Prepare a black-background image, and put it on the cassette Display range value
with the black background facing upward. HV Normal operation high density Black text
process control Enable/Disable on white Allow
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (The cassette is specified.) setting backgrou
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. HT Normal operation halftone process nd
Allow
4) [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and printing is started. control Enable/Disable setting (Inhibit:
TN_PIX_ Setting of Enable/Disable of toner 0=NO)
When printing is executed, a jam is always generated. (As white text Allow
SUP supply control for the yield count
shown in the photo below.) on black
TN_FB Enable/Disable setting of FEEDBACK
5) Leave the jam paper for about 30sec, then remove the jam backgrou Allow
toner supply control
paper. nd (Allow:
TN_INT Enable/Disable setting of the interval
1=YES) Allow
6) Measure the width of the gloss change section (nip) of the jam toner supply control
paper, and check to confirm that it is in the range of about TN_REC Enable/Disable setting of developer
Allow
10.5mm - 12mm. V recovery
* If the difference between F and R is considerably great, the TN_ADJ Enable/Disable setting of the sensor
Allow
output adjustment
fusing pressure may be insufficient.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 49
Item/ Setting Default If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.
Content
Display range value
TN_EMP Setting of Enable/Disable of the toner Black text Class
Allow Setting Default
falling distance detection control on white ificati Content
Item/Display range value
backgrou on
TN_EMP Setting of Enable/Disable of the toner
_INT falling distance detection control of nd Allow PROC A REGS_ Light emitting quantity
1 - 255 21
job interruption (Inhibit: ON/ F LED adjustment value
0=NO) EGIS B REGS_
TN_EMP Enable/Disable setting of fall amount 1 - 255 21
white text Allow T R LED
_NEW detection control of a new cartridge
TN_PIX_ Enable/Disable setting of toner supply on black C REGS_ Transfer belt substrate
backgrou Allow F detection level value (F
TBL control by the yield count
nd (Allow: side) when the light 0 - 255 0
PRT_HT Enable/Disable setting of printer
1=YES) emitting quantity
correction feedback of half-tone Allow
adjustment is completed.
process control
D REGS_ Transfer belt substrate
MD VG Enable/Disable setting of the
R detection level value (R
membrane decrease grid voltage Allow
side) when the light 0 - 255 0
correction
emitting quantity
MD EV Enable/Disable setting of the
adjustment is completed.
membrane decrease environment Allow
E REGS_ Specular reflection dark
grid voltage correction
F voltage (F side) 0 - 255 0
MD VG Enable/Disable setting of the grid
DARK
MC correction by the MC total current Allow
F REGS_ Specular reflection dark
correction
R voltage (R side) 0 - 255 0
MD VG Enable/Disable setting of the VG grid
DARK
DV correction by the developer bias Allow
PROC G PCS_F Diffuse reflection dark
absolute value 0 - 255 0
ON _DARK voltage (F side)
MD LD Enable/Disable setting of the
H PCS_R Diffuse reflection dark
membrane decrease laser power Allow 0 - 255 0
_DARK voltage (R side)
voltage correction
I PCS_F Linearity correction
MD LD Enable/Disable setting of 0 - 255 0
_V1 coefficients (F side)
EV environmental area and the
Allow J PCS_F
membrane decrease count laser 0 - 255 0
power voltage correction _V2
MD LD Enable/Disable process control laser K PCS_F
Allow 0 - 255 0
HV power voltage correction _V3
MD DL Enable/Disable setting of the L PCS_F
0 - 255 0
membrane decrease discharge light Allow _V4
quantity correction M PCS_F
0 - 255 0
MD DL Enable/Disable setting of the _V5
EV membrane decrease environment Disable N PCS_R Linearity correction
0 - 255 0
discharge quantity correction _V1 coefficients (R side)
MD MC Enable/Disable setting of the MC total O PCS_R
0 - 255 0
current correction by an increase in Allow _V2
the resistance P PCS_R
0 - 255 0
MD MC Enable/Disable setting of the MC total _V3
EV current correction by environmental Allow Q PCS_R
0 - 255 0
change _V4
AR_AUT Auto registration adjustment Enable/ R PCS_R
Allow 0 - 255 0
O Disable setting _V5
AR_ERR Auto registration adjustment S PCS_F Diffuse reflection 100 -
500
OR execution error check Enable/Disable Allow _CL_ka normalization coefficients 2000
setting T PCS_R 100 -
500
AR_PHA Enable/Disable setting of drum phase _CL_ka 2000
SE fitting calculation feedback Enable/ Allow U BELT_ Belt substrate F side
Disable setting PCS_F monitor max. value 0 - 255 0
DM_PHA Drum phase fitting Enable/Disable MAX (Process control)
Allow
SE setting V BELT_ Belt substrate F side
TC Enable/Disable setting of transfer PCS_F monitor min. value 0 - 255 0
Allow
output correction MIN (Process control)
PTC_EN PTC environment correction Enable/ W BELT_ Belt substrate F side
Allow
V Disable setting PCS_F monitor difference
0 - 255 0
DIF (BELT_PCS_F MAX-
MIN)
X BELT_ Belt substrate R side
44-2 PCS_R monitor max. value 0 - 255 0
MAX (Process control)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Y BELT_ Belt substrate R side
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image PCS_R monitor min. value 0 - 255 0
density sensor (registration sensor). MIN (Process control)
Z BELT_ Belt substrate R side
Section Process
PCS_R monitor difference
Operation/Procedure 0 - 255 0
DIF (BELT_PCS_F MAX-
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto- MIN)
matically.
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis-
played.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 50
Class Error name Error content
Setting Default
ificati Content Registration BELT_REGS_F_ DIF error
Item/Display range value
on substrate F scan The difference between the max. value and the
REGI AA BELT_ Belt substrate F side abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
ST REGS_ monitor max. value greater than the specified value when the transfer
0 - 255 0
F_ (Registration) belt rotates 1 turn
MAX Registration BELT_REGS_R_ DIF error
AB BELT_ Belt substrate F side substrate R scan The difference between the max. value and the
REGS_ monitor min. value 0 - 255 0 abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
F_ MIN (Registration) greater than the specified value when the transfer
AC BELT_ Belt substrate F side belt rotates 1 turn
REGS_ monitor difference
0 - 255 0
F_ DIF (BELT_REGS_F MAX-
MIN)
AD BELT_ Belt substrate R side 44-4
REGS_ monitor max. value Purpose Setting
0 - 255 0
R_ (Registration)
MAX Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high den-
AE BELT_ Belt substrate R side sity process control operation.
REGS_ monitor min. value 0 - 255 0 Section Process
R_ MIN (Registration)
Operation/Procedure
AF BELT_ Belt substrate R side
REGS_ monitor difference 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
0 - 255 0
R_ DIF (BELT_REGS_R MAX- 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
MIN)
3) Press [OK] key.
AG PATCH Toner patch detection
_REGS level F (K) 0 - 255 0
_F_K
AH PATCH Toner patch detection Set the items to the default values unless a change is specially
_REGS level F (C) 0 - 255 0 required.
_F_C
AI PATCH Toner patch detection Setting Default
Item/Display Content
_REGS level F (M) 0 - 255 0 range value
_F_M A PCS_CL TARGET Color image sensor 1 - 255 204
AJ PATCH Toner patch detection adjustment target value
_REGS level F (Y) 0 - 255 0 B PCS_K TARGET Black image sensor 1 - 255 204
_F_Y adjustment target value
AK PATCH Toner patch detection C LED_CL OUTPUT Color image sensor light 1 - 255 21
_REGS level R (K) 0 - 255 0 emitting start level
_R_K D LED_K OUTPUT Black image sensor light 1 - 255 21
AL PATCH Toner patch detection emitting start level
_REGS level R (C) 0 - 255 0 E PCS ADJSTMENT Color image sensor 1 - 255 8
_R_C LIMIT adjustment error
AM PATCH Toner patch detection allowance level
_REGS level R (M) 0 - 255 0 F BELT GROUND Transfer belt one-turn 1 - 255 1
_R_M DIF substrate detection level
AN PATCH Toner patch detection difference allowance
_REGS level R (M) 0 - 255 0 level
_R_Y G BIAS_CL Developing bias (for 0 - 255 60
STANDARD DIF color) reference
Error name Error content correction voltage
F sensor adjustment REGS_F LED error H BIAS_BK Developing bias (for 0 - 255 0
abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of STANDARD DIF black) reference
adjustments. correction voltage
R sensor adjustment REGS_R LED error I BIAS PATCH Toner patch making 1 - 255 60
abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of INTERVAL developing bias interval
adjustments. J Y_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 45
F Color sensor PCS_F_CL_ka calculation error density level (yellow)
adjustment The target is not reached K M_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 45
abnormality density level (magenta)
Process control F BELT_PCS_F DIF error L C_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 45
sensor adjustment The difference between the max. value and the density level (cyan)
abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is M K_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 50
greater than the specified value when the transfer density level (black)
belt rotates 1 turn N HV BK_GROUND Black image sensor 1 - 255 60
R Color sensor PCS_R_CL_ka calculation error LIMIT adjustment error
adjustment The target is not reached allowance level
abnormality
Process control R BELT_PCS_R DIF error
sensor adjustment The difference between the max. value and the
abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
greater than the specified value when the transfer
belt rotates 1 turn
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 51
44-6 Display Default
Mode Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment
TARGET ADK_SL (K/ Development -9.99 - 0
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process C/M/Y) characteristics gradient 9.99
control forcibly. coefficient (High density
Section Process process control
operation)
Operation/Procedure
ADK_INT(K/ Development -999.9 - 0
Press [EXECUTE] key. C/M/Y) characteristics intercept 999.9
In case of a normal completion, the result is saved. level (High density
process control
In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
operation 0V)
(Refer to the table below.)
TARGET (K/ High density process 0.00 - 0
In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved. C/M/Y) control target density 255.00
level (K)
Result display Content description TARGET High density process 0.00 - 0
COMPLETE Normal complete (C/M/Y) control target density 255.00
ERROR Abnormal end level (C/M/Y)
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption PCS_F_ Diffuse reflection dark 0 - 255 0
DARK voltage (F side)
PCS_R_ Diffuse reflection dark 0 - 255 0
Details of error display Content description
DARK voltage (R side)
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color image sensor adjustment abnormality
REGS_F_DA Specular reflection dark 0 - 255 0
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black image sensor adjustment abnormality
RK voltage (F side)
K_HV_ERR K high density process control abnormality
REGS_R_DA Specular reflection dark 0 - 255 0
C_HV_ERR C high density process control abnormality RK voltage (R side)
M_HV_ERR M high density process control abnormality PATCH n-1 High density process 0 - 255 0
Y_HV _ERR Y high density process control abnormality control nth time toner
TIMEOUT_ERR Time out patch density level 1
(n=1-5)
Details of error display Content description n-2 Toner patch data nth 0 - 255 0
time patch 2 (n=1-5)
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color image sensor adjustment abnormality
n-3 Toner patch data nth 0 - 255 0
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black image sensor adjustment abnormality
time patch 3 (n=1-5)
K_EHT_ERR K process control abnormality
n-4 Toner patch data nth 0 - 255 0
C_EHT_ERR C process control abnormality
time patch 4 (n=1-5)
M_EHT_ERR M process control abnormality
n-1 Toner patch data nth 0 - 255 0
Y_EHT_ERR Y process control abnormality time patch 1 (n=6-10)
TIMEOUT_ERR Time out n-2 Toner patch data nth 0 - 255 0
time patch 2 (n=6-10)
n-3 Toner patch data nth 0 - 255 0
time patch 3 (n=6-10)
44-9 n-4 Toner patch data nth 0 - 255 0
Purpose Operation data display time patch 4 (n=6-10)
ENGINE PATCH(1) h1 patch (77) patch data 0 - 255 0
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
HALFTO PATCH(2) h2 patch (103) patch 0 - 255 0
density process control operation. NE data
Section Image process (Photo conductor/Develop- PATCH(3) h3 patch (127) patch 0 - 255 0
ing/Transfer/Cleaning) data
Operation/Procedure TARGET(1) h1 patch (77) target 0 - 255 0
registration value
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN], [OTHER] keys.
TARGET(2) h2 patch (103) target 0 - 255 0
registration value
TARGET(3) h3 patch (127) target 0 - 255 0
44-12 registration value
Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the
high density process control and the image 44-14
density sensor (registration sensor).
Purpose Operation data display
Section Image process (Photo conductor/Develop-
Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem-
ing)
perature and humidity sensor.
Operation/Procedure
Section Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/
Select a display mode with [TARGET] [PATCH] keys.
LSU
Operation/Procedure
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.
Item/Display Content
TH_CL External air temperature sensor temperature
External air temperature sensor AD value
HUD_CL External air humidity sensor humidity
External air sensor AD value
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 52
Item/Display Content Display items and descriptions of contents
TH1_LSU LSU thermistor 1 temperature Display Content
LSU thermistor 1 A/D value
BLADE REFRESH Blade development refresh
TH2_LSU LSU thermistor 2 temperature
DEVE REFRESH Development refresh
LSU thermistor 2 A/D value
* DEVE REFLESH execution consume
TH_UM Fusing upper main thermistor temperature W-Letter A3 100% worth of toner.
Fusing upper main thermistor (AD value)
TH_UM_CS Fusing upper main thermistor (compensation)
temperature
Fusing upper main thermistor (compensation) AD value
44-21
TH_UM_D Fusing upper main thermistor (differential) AD value
TH_SUB2 Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 temperature Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 (AD value) Function (Purpose) Used to set the halftone process control tar-
TH_SUB2_CS Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 (compensation) get.
temperature
Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 (compensation) AD value Section Process
TH_SUB2_D Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 (differential) AD value Operation/Procedure
TH_LM Fusing lower main thermistor temperature Press [EXECUTE] key.
Fusing lower main thermistor (AD value)
The halftone process control target is set and the operation data
TH_US Fusing upper sub thermistor temperature
are displayed.
Fusing upper sub thermistor (AD value)
Display Content
COMPLETE Normal complete
ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor
44-15
ADJUSTMENT sensitivity adjustment error
Purpose Setting ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation. ADJUSTMENT sensitivity adjustment error
[YMCK] High density process control error
Section Process
[YMCK]
Operation/Procedure OTHER Other errors
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
44-22
The initial value must be set unless any special change is required.
Purpose Operation data display
Item/
Content
Setting Default Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density
Display range value level in the halftone process control opera-
A TIME Idle rotation interval (time interval 0 - 255 6 tion.
between the previous OPC drum
idle rotation and the next one)
Section Process
setting (h) Operation/Procedure
B AREA1 Environmental area difference 0-5 2 1) The toner patch density level made in the halftone process
judgment threshold value setting control operation is displayed.
(difference between the previous
OPC drum idle rotation and the Item/Display Content
current one)
ID_n Patch data display (n= 1 to 16)
C AREA2 Environmental area conditions 1 - 15 1
BASE1 Belt substrate data (START)
(AND condition of the previous
BASE5 Belt substrate data (LAST)
OPC drum idle rotation and the
current one)
D CYCLE Previous rotation time setting 0 - 255 0
(sec) in the process control when
recovered from power ON, 44-24
preheating/sleep mode. Purpose Operation data display
E FLAG OPC drum idle rotation is 0-1 0
Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and
allowed or disabled. (0 : Allow
1 : Disable)
the correction level in the halftone process
control operation.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
44-17
1) Select the display category with [NEXT] key.
Purpose Setting 2) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
Function (Purpose) Process refresh execution
Category Item/Display Content
Section Process
Coefficient [DITHER_RAW_VALU Halftone process control
Operation/Procedure E] correction value (before
1) Select a refresh item with the touch panel key. correction)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Reference [SENSOR_TARGET] Halftone process control
value reference value
3) The refresh operation is executed.
Correction [S_VALUE] Halftone process control
NOTE: Do not execute this simulation unless specially required. value correction value
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 53
Category Item/Display Content 2) Press [YES] key.
For printer [PRINTER_S_VALUE] Printer halftone process control The correction data of the halftone process control are cleared.
correction value
[PRINTER_BASE_ Printer halftone process control
DITHER_VALUE] reference dither value
44-28
[PRINTER_AUTO_ Printer auto density adjustment
HT_VALUE] correction value Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Previous [BEFORE S_VALUE] Previous halftone process Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
correction control value conditions.
value [BEFORE Previous printer halftone
PRINTER_S_VALUE] process control value Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.
44-25
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Setting
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the
correction value for the halftone process
control.
Set the items to the default values unless a change is specially
Section Process required.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key. Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
2) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the
A INITI YES When warm-up Enable 0 0
touch panel. AL after clearing the
NO Disable 1
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. counter of the
4) Press [OK] key. OPC drum and the
developer unit
B SW ON When supplying Color 0 3
the power (when process
Set the items to the default values unless a change is specially canceling power control
required. shut-off) Enable
Process 1
Default control
Setting
Item/Display Content value Disable
range
K CMY BK 2
A HIGHTLIGHT Highlight correction 0 - 128 20 20 process
VALUE LIMIT amount limit value control
B MAX VALUE Maximum density value 0 - 128 20 20 Enable
LIMIT correction limit value Pixel 3
count
judgment
C TIME After passing the Color 0 3
44-26 specified time process
from leaving control
Purpose Adjustment/Setup READY Enable
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the halftone process con- continuously Process 1
trol compulsory. (Time can be control
changed by Disable
Section Process INTERVAL TIME) BK 2
Operation/Procedure process
Press [EXECUTE] key. control
Enable
The halftone process control is performed and the operation data
Pixel 3
are displayed.
count
judgment
COMPLETE Normal complete
D HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is Color 0 0
ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor sensitivity
made when process
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
turning ON the control
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity power and after Enable
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error passing Process 1
[YMCK] High density process control error [YMCK] INTERVAL TIME. control
error Disable
OTHER Other errors BK 2
process
control
Enable
44-27
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half-
tone process control.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 54
Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
E HUM The temperature Color 0 0 K HI-COV Setting of the The 0 1
and humidity process execution process
inside the control conditions of the control is
machine are Enable process control for performed
monitored only Process 1 the print ratio by
during a job at the control considerin
interval set by the Disable g the
item of HUM BK 2 average
HOUR. process print ratio
When the control of every
changes in the Enable 10 pages
temperature and as the
the humidity are judgment
greater than the criteria.
specified level (the Print ratio 1
set value of item judgment
HUM DIF) in inhibit
comparison with (The
the previous process
process control. control for
F REV1 YES When the Enable 0 1 the target
NO accumulated Inhibit 1 of print
traveling distance ratio is not
of K or M OPC performed
drum unit reaches .)
the specified level The 2
after turning ON process
the power. control is
G REV2 YES When the Enable 0 1 performed
_BK NO accumulated Inhibit 1 by
traveling distance considerin
of K OPC drum g the
unit reaches the average
specified level print ratio
from execution of of 30
the previous pages as
density correction. the
H REV2 YES When the Enable 0 1 judgment
_CL NO accumulated Inhibit 1 criteria in
traveling distance a
of M OPC drum continuou
unit reaches the s print job
specified level of 30 or
from execution of more
the previous pages.
density correction. L LO-COV Setting of the Enable 0 1
I REFR YES Select of YES/NO Key 0 1 execution Inhibit 1
ESH of the manual operation judgment of the
MOD process control display process control in
E NO key with key Key 1 continuous
operation operation printing of low
NO print ratio images
display M TonerCA- Setting of the Enable 0 1
J DAY When there is no 0: Disable 0 1 END process control Inhibit 1
color job from of the interval reduction
when the previous specified when the toner
color process days cartridge
control was judgment remaining quantity
performed to 1 - 999: 1 - 999 is 25% or less (If
when the number 999 days this is set to
of days set by this passing Enable, item M
item setting, RATIO is
perform the changed.)
process control
when executing
the next warming
up.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 55
Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
N JOB Simplified process High 0 0 Q LIMIT PAGE Setting of the 1: 10 1 10
control judgement density number of pages -
(During Job) process connected jobs of 99: 990
control : the process pages
Allow control and of the 1 step
Engine limit number of the correspon
half-tone process control ds to 10
process A number of pages. 99
control : reservation jobs
Allow are connected.
High 1 When the number
density of jobs exceeds
process the specified
control : number of pages
Inhibit (the set value of
Engine this setting), the
half-tone process control is
process performed. / The
control : process control is
Inhibit performed by AND
High 2 conditions of item
density REV condition and
process the specified
control : number of pages
Allow (the set value of
Engine this setting).
half-tone R PIX_RATIO_ Magnification ratio setting (%) of 1 - 999 10
process BK the BK toner count specified
control : value
Inhibit The set value of 100
High 3 corresponds to K print of A4 at
density the print ratio of 5%.
process S PIX_RATIO_ Magnification ratio setting (%) of 1 - 999 10
control CL the color (CMY) toner count
:Inhibit specified value
Engine The set value of 100
half-tone corresponds to K print of A4 at
process the print ratio of 5%.
control : T INTERVAL Setting of the leaving time when 1 - 255 3
Allow TIME turning ON the power (including
O JOB_END Simplified process High 0 0 the sleep recovery time) (h:
control judgement density hour)
(After Job) process U HUM HOUR Interval setting of the 1 - 24 2
control : temperature and humidity
Allow monitoring time of "HUM" (unit:
Engine 10 minutes)
half-tone V HUM_DIF The specified value of the area 1-9 2
process difference in humidity between
control : the level at execution of the
Allow previous control and the current
High 1 humidity (Applied to item HUM)
density W BK_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of 1 - 999 15
process the specified value of the BK (Entry
control : OPC drum traveling distance of of 20
Allow "REV2_BK" corresp
Engine onds to
half-tone 100,00
process 0mm.)
control : X M_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of 1 - 999 15
Inhibit the M OPC drum traveling (Entry
P AVERAGE- Setting of the 1: 10 1 3 distance of "REV2_CL" of 20
PAGE number of pages pages - 5: 5 corresp
of item 50 pages onds to
1 step 100,00
correspon 0mm.)
ds to 10 Y REV1_RATI Magnification ratio setting (%) of 1 - 255 20
pages. O the REV1 OPC drum traveling
distance of "REV1"
Z SHV_PAGE Interval of number of sheets of 0 - 999 100
simplified process control
standard value"
A SHV_RATIO Interval of number of traveling 0 - 999 20
A distance of simplified process
control standard value
A SHV_DIF Normal process control 1 - 255 60
B execution setting by simplified
process control result
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 56
Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
A SHT_DIF Half tone engine execution 1 - 255 5 A 2TRAN_CLE Secondary transfer cleaning 5 - 999 300
C setting by simplified process M AN_ process time judgment
control result TIME2 threshold value 2 (The total
A COLOR Judgment criteria 0: The BK 0 - 999 20 number of sheets for cleaning
D BORDER whether the BK process execution conditions) (Cleaning
high density control is time: Medium)
process control is executed A 2TRAN_CLE Secondary transfer cleaning 5 - 999 500
individually regardless N AN_ process time judgment
performed or not of the M TIME3 threshold value 3 (The total
(Setting of the OPC drum number of sheets for cleaning
ratio of the M OPC traveling execution conditions) (Cleaning
drum rotation distance. time: Long)
distance for the K 1 - 999: 1 - A BLADE_CLE Blade refresh Enable 0 10
OPC drum rotation 999(%) O AN_TIME interval setting Inhibit 1 - 99
distance (%))
A BK ONLY Setting of the Frequency 0 5
E frequency of of once for
execution of the 4- 5 times 44-29
color high density Frequency 1-5
process control of once for
Purpose Setting
when only 1 - 5 times Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
monochrome The 4- 6 process control during a job.
output is color high
continued (The Section Process
density
result of this process Operation/Procedure
setting is applied control is 1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
only when the M always panel.
OPC drum rotation performed
distance is smaller . 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
than the set value 3) Press [OK] key.
of COLOR
BORDER.) Item/ Default
Content Setting range
A HT_DIF HT process control execution 1 - 255 40 Display value
F judgment developing bias A COPY During copy job 0 0: No execution 2
variation value B PRINTE During print job - 1: HV only 2
A RG_ CL Setting of When the 0 0 R 2 2: HV -> HT
G ON_ execution of the color C FAX During FAX 2
SYNC registration process print job
adjustment when control is
D SELF During self print 2
executing the executed.
PRINT
ALL process control Executed 1
E CPY TO Halftone 0 0:CALC 0: Color 0
when turning ON regardless
PRT process control - ULATED balance
the power of the
TABLE copier - printer 1 1:DEFA calculation
process
conversion ULT value
control.
table select (Revised
CL/ When the 2 every time
BK color when
process SIM46-74 is
control executed.)
and the K 1: Default
process (Fixed
control are value)
executed.
F HT Halftone 0 - 255 20
A RG_TEMP_T Time interval from registration 0 - 240 0 RETRY process control
H IMER adjustment after turning ON the (MINU retry setting
power to the next execution. TE)
G HT Halftone 0 - 255 3
AI RG_PERM_T Setting of inhibit time of 0 - 15 0 TARGE process control
IMER execution of the registration (HOUR T standard value
adjustment ) RETRY registration
A RG_HOUR_ Setting of the interval time of 0 - 15 6 retry
J TIMER execution of the registration (Above
adjustment )+(HO HV: High density process control
UR) HT: Halftone process control
A RG_BW_SY Setting of Enable/ Enable 0 1
K NC Disable of the Inhibit 1
registration
adjustment after a
monochrome job
A 2TRAN_CLE Secondary transfer cleaning 5 - 999 200
L AN_ process time judgment
TIME1 threshold value 1 (The total
number of sheets for cleaning
execution conditions) (Cleaning
time: Short)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 57
44-31 44-62
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Setup/Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Man- Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
ual adjustment) conditions.
Section Process Section Process
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
This simulation allows collective change in the set contents of
SIM44-4 and SIM44-28.
For the OPC drum phase adjustment, do not use this simulation, A suitable one is selected among a number of options depending
but use SIM50-22 (auto adjustment). on the condition.
1) Select item A with scroll key. 1) Select an item to be set.
2) Enter the value corresponding to the adjustment pattern with To change the image density in the high density area, select
10-key. PROCON TARGET.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed out.) To change the frequency of the process control operations,
4) Select an adjustment pattern whose deflection is within two select PROCON MODE.
scale lines on the adjustment pattern of C,M, Y colors.
Display/Item Content
5) Select item B with scroll key.
PROCON CL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, and Y decrease.
6) Enter the adjustment pattern sheet number selected in proce- TARGET (The C/M/Y high density process control
dure 4). target values decrease.)
7) Press [EXECUTE] key. CL ID UP The densities of C, M, and Y increase.
(The C/M/Y high density process control
8) The adjusted adjustment pattern is printed.
target values increase.)
BK ID DOWN The density of K decreases. (The high
density process control target value
44-37 decreases.)
BK ID UP The density of K increases. (The high
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
density process control target value
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correc- increases.)
tion level in the continuous printing opera- ALL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, Y and K decrease.
tion. (The C/M/Y/K high density process
control target values decrease.)
Section
ALL ID UP The densities of C, M, Y and K increase.
Operation/Procedure (The C/M/Y/K high density process
1) Select a set target color with the touch panel. control target values increase.)
2) Select a target item with scroll keys. NORMAL The standard density of C, M, Y and K.
(The C/M/Y/K high density process
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. control target values are the standard
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) values.)
PROCON HIGH QUALITY1 The execution frequency of the process
MODE control is high. (It is set when the color
image quality is given priority.)
When the print density is varied in the continuous printing opera-
HIGH QUALITY2 The execution frequency of the process
tion, this simulation is used. control is highest. (It is set when the color
image quality is given priority.)
Item/Display Content Setting Default
PRINT The execution frequency of the process
range value
PERFORMANCE control is low. (It is set when the job
Multi-grid bias Enable 0 speed is given priority.)
MUL_M
A correction enable/ 1
C_ADJ Disable 1 BW MODE The process control is executed in the
disable setting
normal frequency. (It is set when there
Multi-fusing bias Enable 0 are little color jobs and many
MUL_DV
B correction enable/ 0 monochrome jobs.)
_ADJ Disable 1
disable setting
NORMAL The process control is executed in the
normal frequency.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 58
Setting Default
46 Item/Display Content
range value
T SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
46-1 document)
Purpose Adjustment (Color copy mode) U TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
mode. V TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
Section (copy document)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
46-2
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode)
* When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item
can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
mode.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is Section
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den- Operation/Procedure
sity is decreased. 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
range value
A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50 * When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item
HIGH 1 - 99 50 can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
HIGH 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 sity is decreased.
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 Item/Display Content Setting Default
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 range value
HIGH 1 - 99 50 AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
A
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
B
G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 AUTO3 Auto 3 LOW 1 - 99 50
C
H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
D
I TEXT(COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
E
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 PHOTO HIGH 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50
F
COPY) document) Photograph HIGH 1 - 99 50
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 PRINTED Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy G
HIGH 1 - 99 50 PHOTO HIGH 1 - 99 50
document) PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
L TEXT (COLOR Text (Color tone LOW 1 - 99 50 H
HIGH 1 - 99 50
TONE enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50 MAP MAP LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) I
HIGH 1 - 99 50
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
AUTO1(COPY Auto 1 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (COLOR Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 J
TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
TONE (Color tone
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) AUTO2(COPY Auto 2 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
K
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 AUTO3(COPY Auto 3 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
L
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 TEXT(COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
M
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 N PHOTO(COPY Photo (Copy
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 TO COPY) document)
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) PRINTED Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
Q MAP (COLOR Map LOW 1 - 99 50 O PHOTO(COPY (Copy
TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 TO COPY) document)
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
R LIGHT(COLOR LIGHT LOW 1 - 99 50 P
HIGH 1 - 99 50
TONE DOCUMENT(Co HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) lor tone
enhancement)
S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 59
46-4 Setting Default
Mode Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) HIGH A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
send mode. C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
PHOTO
Section
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
panel. G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. H RIP – 1 - 99 50
* When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item
can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 46-8
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
increased, and vice versa.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color
Setting Default balance RGB.
Mode Item/Display Content
range value Section
LOW A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch
PHOTO panel.
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 2) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel.
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density
H RIP – 1 - 99 50
area and the high density area.
HIGH A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 target color is increased, and vice versa.
PHOTO
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 Default
Item/Display Content
value
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density correction amount 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density correction amount 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
H RIP – 1 - 99 50
46-9
46-5 Purpose Adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image Section
send mode. Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
Operation/Procedure panel.
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
panel. * When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
* When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) mode, and the fax mode.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased, and vice versa. increased, and vice versa.
[RSPF]
Setting Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value
Item/Display Content
LOW A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 range value
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50 A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 adjustment (Low density side)
PHOTO B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 48
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 adjustment (Low density side)
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 C FAX : LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment (Low density side)
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 53
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
adjustment (High density side)
H RIP – 1 - 99 50
E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 53
adjustment (Low density side)
F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53
adjustment (high density)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 60
[DSPF]
Density level
Item/Display Setting range Default value
Setting Default (Point)
Item/Display Content
range value A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
OC A COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47 B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
SIDEA: LOW exposure adjustment C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
(Low density side)
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
SIDEA: LOW exposure adjustment
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
(Low density side)
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
LOW exposure adjustment H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
(Low density side) I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52 J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
SIDEA: HIGH exposure adjustment K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
(High density side) L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 52 M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
SIDEA: HIGH exposure adjustment N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
(Low density side) O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52 P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
HIGH exposure adjustment Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
(high density)
DSPF A COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEB: LOW exposure adjustment
(Low density side)
46-16
B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEB: LOW exposure adjustment Purpose Adjustment
(Low density side) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the monochrome copy den-
C FAX SIDEB : DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47 sity and the gamma (for each monochrome
LOW exposure adjustment copy mode).
(Low density side)
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50 Section
SIDEB: HIGH exposure adjustment Operation/Procedure
(High density side) 1) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel.
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: HIGH exposure adjustment
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
(High density side) * When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item
F FAX SIDEB : DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50 can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
HIGH exposure adjustment 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
(high density)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
G BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: R R
increased, and vice versa.
H BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
Density level
SIDEB: G G Item/Display Setting range Default value
(Point)
I BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
SIDEB: B B
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
46-10
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
Purpose Adjustment G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance and H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
the gamma (for each color copy mode). I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
Section J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
1) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key. M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
touch panel. O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
3) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel. P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
4) Enter the set value with 10-key. Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 61
Default 0 Enable
Item/Display Content Set value
value 1 Inhibit
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1 MODE2
MODE2 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
MODE3
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME PRESCAN Setting Default
Item/Display Content
Stop (for copy) STOP range value
PRESCAN A CMY 0 CMY engine highest 0-1 0
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON (0: ENABLE density correction
Stop (for FAX) 1: DISABLE) mode: Enable
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME STOP 1 CMY engine highest
Stop (for scanner) STOP density correction
PRESCAN mode: Disable
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL B K 0 K engine highest 0-1 1
setting NORMAL (0: ENABLE density correction
SHARP 1: DISABLE) mode: Enable
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL FULL 1 K engine highest
PART density correction
mode: Disable
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET CYAN maximum density
46-21 correction
D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
Purpose Adjustment MAX TARGET MAGENTA maximum density
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Manual correction
adjustment) E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET YELLOW maximum density
Section correction
Operation/Procedure F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the TARGET BLACK maximum density
touch panel. correction
2) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel. * When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set items A
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. and B to "0".
* When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. gap is better.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) * To increase the density in the high density area further, set items
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is A and B to "1".
increased, and vice versa. The tone gap may occur in high density part.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
value. Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these values
are changed, the density in the high density area is changed.
Density level Default
Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500 46-24
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500 Purpose Adjustment
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
(Auto adjustment)
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500 Section
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500 Operation/Procedure
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500 The copy color balance automatic adjustment is performed,
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500 then the adjustment result pattern is printed.
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500 4) Press [OK] key.
The halftone correction target registration is processed.
46-23
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy
high density section (High density tone gap
supported).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 62
46-25 Item/Display Setting Default
Content
(Copy mode) range value
Purpose Adjustment D COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Sin- (INTERCEPT) density adjustment
gle color copy mode) E ED TEXT (SLOPE) Text/Map mode gamma 1 - 99 50
skew adjustment (Text/
Section Map mode)
Operation/Procedure F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment target color with [C][M][Y] keys on the (INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map
touch panel. mode)
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch When the adjustment values of items A and C are changed, the
panel. gamma of character edge and line edge image density section is
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. changed.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjustment
target color is increased, and vice versa. value is decreased, the image contrast of text and line edge is
decreased.
Default value When the adjustment values of items B and D are increased, the
Item/Display Setting range
C M Y image density of character edge and line edge section is
A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200 decreased, and vice versa.
B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255
C BLUE 0 - 255 255 150 0
D CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0
46-30
E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
F YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
G ORANGE 0 - 255 0 150 255 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the resolution in the sub
H NAVY 0 - 255 255 200 0 scanning direction in the copy mode.
I LIGHT GREEN 0 - 255 150 0 150
Section
J LIGHT BLUE 0 - 255 150 20 0
Operation/Procedure
K AQUA MARINE 0 - 255 170 0 50
L PURPLE 0 - 255 128 255 0 1) Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corre-
M PINK 0 - 255 0 150 20 sponding to the resolution mode with 10-key.
N YELLOW GREEN 0 - 255 128 0 255 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
O BEIGE 0 - 255 0 50 170
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A SCAN Scan resolution Mode1 0-1 0 0
46-26 RESOLUTION selection Mode2 1
SW (COPY: COLOR)
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the single color mode color RSPF model
balance set value to the default. Resolution in the sub scanning direction (DPI)
Section Scan 25-99% 100-200% 201-400%
Mode
mode [Magnification [Magnification [Magnification
Operation/Procedure
ratio] ratio] ratio]
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Mode1 OC 600 600 600
2) Press [YES] key. RSPF 600 600 -
The color balance value of the single color mode is reset to the Mode2 OC 300 600 600
default value. RSPF 300 600 -
DSPF model
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 63
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Default value Defa
Setting
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Item/Display Content
range
C M Y ult
value
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
OUTC I LIGHT LG output 0 - 255 150 0 150 -
background and the low density image is increased. When the
OLOR GREEN color
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
(Outp J LIGHT LB output 0 - 255 150 20 0 -
and the low density image is decreased. ut BLUE color
RSPF model color K AQUA AM output 0 - 255 170 0 50 -
coeffic MARINE color
Item / Display Content Setting Default ient) L PURPLE PU output 0 - 255 128 255 0 -
range value
color
A COPY:OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
M PINK P output 0 - 255 0 150 20 -
B COPY:RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 color
C SCAN:OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 N YELLOW YG output 0 - 255 128 0 255 -
D SCAN:RSPF Scanner mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 GREEN color
E FAX:OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 O BEIGE BE output 0 - 255 0 50 170 -
F FAX:RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 color
CHR A RED / Red 0-6 - - - 3
DSPF model OMA BLACK extraction
(Chro mode
Item / Display Content Setting Default
ma (The red
range value
adjust recognitio
A COPY:OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
ment) n area is
COPY DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF top adjusted.)
B 1 - 250 196
SIDE1) side)
B KS:CHR Chromatic 0-6 - - - 3
COPY DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF OMATIC color
C 1 - 250 196
SIDE2) back side) extraction
D SCAN:OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 mode
SCAN DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF (The
E 1 - 250 196
SIDE1) top side) chromatic
SCAN DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF color
F 1 - 250 196
SIDE2) back side) recognitio
G FAX:OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 n area is
FAX DSPF FAX mode (for DSPF top adjusted.)
H 1 - 250 196
SIDE1) side)
FAX DSPF FAX mode (for DSPF back
I 1 - 250 196
SIDE2) side)
46-37
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
46-36 of monochrome mode color.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color Operation/Procedure
copy mode.
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
Section 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch 4) Press [YES] key.
panel.
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of red and yellow
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. images when copying color documents with red and yellow images
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) in the monochrome mode.
By changing the density level of each color, the color adjustment in
the 2-color copy mode can be performed. Item/Display Content
Setting Default value
range RSPF DSPF
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 137 127
Default value Defa B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 827 814
Setting C R-Ratio Print gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 299
Item/Display Content C M Y ult
range RIP
value
OUTC A RED R output 0 - 255 0 255 200 - D G-Ratio Print gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 587
OLOR color RIP
(Outp B GREEN G output 0 - 255 255 0 255 -
ut color B-Ratio Gray making setting (B)
color C BLUE B output 0 - 255 255 150 0 - (1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio)
coeffic color B-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (B)
ient) D CYAN C output 0 - 255 255 0 0 - (1000-R-Ratio RIP - G-Ratio RIP)
color
E MAGENT M output 0 - 255 0 255 0 - * B-Ratio: The value of gray making setting (B) is obtained from
A color the formula below.
F YELLOW Y output 0 - 255 0 0 255 - 1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio
color
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial
G ORANG O output 0 - 255 0 150 255 -
E color values (Default).
H NAVY N output 0 - 255 255 200 0 - When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is increased,
color the copy density of red images is decreased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the density is increased.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 64
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is increased, Item/Display Select Default
the copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjust- Content
(Copy mode) button value
ment value is decreased, the density in also decreased. MANUAL LIGHT (-) LUT2 Pencil NORMAL
ORIGINAL (-) LUT1
NORMAL
46-38 (+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
AUTO AUTO (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black component (-) LUT1 judgment
amount in the color copy mode. NORMAL
Section (+) LUT1
Operation/Procedure (+) LUT2
1) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode
key.
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 46-39
3) Press the black component amount select key. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
This adjusts black component amount in the color copy mode. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send
(except character and line image) images.
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part Section
changes.
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Select Default 1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
Content
(Copy mode) button value 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
MANUAL TEXT PRT (-) LUT2 Text print NORMAL
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
(-) LUT1 (Manual)
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
NORMAL
numeric value to decrease moire.
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Setting Default
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text (Manual) NORMAL Item/Display Content
range value
(-) LUT1 A 200 x 100 [DPI] OFF 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
NORMAL halftone OFF
(+) LUT1 B 200 x 200 [DPI] OFF 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
(+) LUT2 halftone OFF
PRINTED (-) LUT2 Printed photo NORMAL C 200 x 200 [DPI] ON 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual) halftone ON
NORMAL D 200 x 400 [DPI] OFF 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
(+) LUT1 halftone OFF
(+) LUT2 E 200 x 400 [DPI] ON 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
PHOTO (-) LUT2 Photograph/Text NORMAL halftone ON
(-) LUT1 photograph F 400 x 400 [DPI] OFF 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
NORMAL (Manual) halftone OFF
(+) LUT1 G 400 x 400 [DPI] ON 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
halftone ON
(+) LUT2
H 600 x 600 [DPI] OFF 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text/Photograph NORMAL
halftone OFF
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
I 600 x 600 [DPI] ON 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
NORMAL
halftone ON
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
MAP (-) LUT2 Map (Manual) NORMAL
(-) LUT1 46-40
NORMAL
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
CPY TO (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
CPY/TXT (-) LUT1 Text printed Section
PRT NORMAL (Manual)
Operation/Procedure
(+) LUT1
1) Set the document on the document table.
(+) LUT2
CPY TO (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
CPY/TEXT (-) LUT1 Text (Manual) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
NORMAL When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
(+) LUT1 and the scanned document image is outputted.
(+) LUT2
CPY TO (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL Setting Default
Item/Display Content
CPY/ (-) LUT1 Printed photo range value
PHOTO NORMAL (Manual) A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX send 1 - 99 50
(+) LUT1 LEVEL(ALL) image density. (Collective
(+) LUT2 adjustment of all the modes)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 65
46-41 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup M EXECUTE AUTO Print Fine/Auto 1 1
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. MODE EXP1 mode Fine/ 2
(Normal) Exposure 1
EXP2 Fine/ 3
Section
Exposure 2
Operation/Procedure EXP3 Fine/ 4
1) Set the document on the document table. Exposure 3
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. EXP4 Fine/ 5
Exposure 4
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
EXP5 Fine/ 6
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set Exposure 5
and the scanned document image is outputted. AUTO Fine/ 7
H_TONE Automatic/
Item/Display Content
Setting Default halftone
range value EXP1 Fine/ 8
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 1/
B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 Halftone
C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 EXP2 Fine/ 9
D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 2/
E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 Halftone
F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 EXP3 Fine/ 10
G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1 1 H_TONE Exposure 3/
MODE mode Exposure 1 Halftone
EXP1 2
EXP4 Fine/ 11
EXP2 Exposure 2 3
H_ONE Exposure 4/
EXP3 Exposure 3 4
Halftone
EXP4 Exposure 4 5
EXP5 Fine/ 12
EXP5 Exposure 5 6 H_TONE Exposure 5/
Halftone
46-42
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 46-43
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
(Fine) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
Section (Super Fine)
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Set the document on the document table. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1) Set the document on the document table.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
and the scanned document image is outputted. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value Setting Default
A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50 Item/Display Content
range value
B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 Exposure 1
E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 Exposure 2
G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/ 1 - 99 50 D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone Exposure 3
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50 E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone Exposure 4
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50 F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone Exposure 5
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50 G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone Auto/Halftone
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50 H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone Exposure 1/Halftone
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50 I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone Exposure 2/Halftone
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 3/Halftone
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 4/Halftone
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 5/Halftone
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 66
Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Super Fine/ 1 1 M EXECUTE AUTO Print Ultra Fine/ 1 1
MODE mode Auto MODE mode Auto
EXP1 Super Fine/ 2 EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 2
Exposure 1 Exposure 1
EXP2 Super Fine/ 3 EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 3
Exposure 2 Exposure 2
EXP3 Super Fine/ 4 EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 4
Exposure 3 Exposure 3
EXP4 Super Fine/ 5 EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 5
Exposure 4 Exposure 4
EXP5 Super Fine/ 6 EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 6
Exposure 5 Exposure 5
AUTO Super Fine/ 7 AUTO Ultra Fine/ 7
H_TONE Auto/ H_TONE Auto/
Halftone Halftone
EXP1 Super Fine/ 8 EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 8
H_TONE Exposure 1/ H_TONE Exposure 1/
Halftone Halftone
EXP2 Super Fine/ 9 EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 9
H_TONE Exposure 2/ H_TONE Exposure 2/
Halftone Halftone
EXP3 Super Fine/ 10 EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 10
H_TONE Exposure 3/ H_TONE Exposure 3/
Halftone Halftone
EXP4 Super Fine/ 11 EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 11
H_TONE Exposure 4/ H_TONE Exposure 4/
Halftone Halftone
EXP5 Super Fine/ 12 EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 12
H_TONE Exposure 5/ H_TONE Exposure 5/
Halftone Halftone
46-44 46-45
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Ultra fine) (600dpi).
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Set the document on the document table.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted. and the scanned document image is outputted.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 67
Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600dpi/ 1 1 I 600DPI RIP H_TONE For 600dpi/ 1 - 99 50
MODE mode Auto Halftone ON
EXP1 600dpi/ 2 mode
Exposure 1
EXP2 600dpi/ 3
Exposure 2
EXP3 600dpi/ 4 46-47
Exposure 3 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
EXP4 600dpi/ 5
Exposure 4
Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy
EXP5 600dpi/ 6
and scan images (JPEG).
Exposure 5 Section
AUTO 600dpi/ 7 Operation/Procedure
H_TONE Auto/
Halftone
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
EXP1 600dpi/ 8 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
H_TONE Exposure 3) Press [OK] key.
1/Halftone
The set value is saved.
EXP2 600dpi/ 9
H_TONE Exposure
Setting Default
2/Halftone Category Item/Display Content
range value
EXP3 600dpi/ 10
FILLING A FILLING LOW Low
H_TONE Exposure
(COLOR) (C) compression 0
3/Halftone
(Color)
EXP4 600dpi/ 11
MIDDLE Medium
H_TONE Exposure
compression 1 0
4/Halftone
(Color)
EXP5 600dpi/ 12
HIGH High
H_TONE Exposure
compression 2
5/Halftone
(Color)
FILLING B FILLING LOW Low
(GRAY) (G) compression 0
(Gray)
46-46
MIDDLE Medium
Purpose Adjustment/Setup compression 1 0
(Gray)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
HIGH High
(RGB RIP)
compression 2
Section (Gray)
Operation/Procedure PRINT C PRINT LOW Low
HOLD (C) compression 0
1) Select a target mode for adjustment.
(COLOR) (Color)
2) Set the document on the document table. MIDDLE Medium
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. compression 1 0
4) Press [OK] key. (Color)
HIGH High
When the set value is increased, the density becomes higher.
compression 2
When the set value is decreased, the density becomes lower. (Color)
PRINT D PRINT LOW Low
Setting Default
Item/Display Content HOLD (G) compression 0
range value
(GRAY) (Gray)
A STANDARD RIP For Normal/ 1 - 99 50
MIDDLE Medium
Halftone OFF
compression 1 0
mode
(Gray)
B FINE RIP For Fine/Halftone 1 - 99 50
HIGH High
OFF mode
compression 2
C FINE RIP H_TONE For Fine/Halftone 1 - 99 50 (Gray)
ON mode
PUSH E SCAN MIDDLE Medium
D SUPER FINE RIP For Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 SCAN (C) 1 compression 0
Halftone OFF (COLOR) mode 1
mode (Scanner MIDDLE Medium
E SUPER FINE RIP H_TONE For Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 Color) 2 compression 1 1
Halftone ON mode 2
mode
MIDDLE Medium
F ULTRA FINE RIP For Ultra fine/ 1 - 99 50 3 compression 2
Halftone OFF mode 3
mode
PUSH F SCAN MIDDLE Medium
G ULTRA FINE RIP H_TONE For Ultra fine/ 1 - 99 50 SCAN (G) 1 compression 0
Halftone ON (GRAY) mode 1
mode (Scanner MIDDLE Medium
H 600DPI RIP For 600dpi/ 1 - 99 50 Gray) 2 compression 1 1
Halftone OFF mode 2
mode
MIDDLE Medium
3 compression 2
mode 3
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 68
46-48 Item/Display Content Color
DITH1 Black edge K
Purpose Adjustment/Setup DITH2 Color edge KCMY
Function (Purpose) Used to change the copy output resolution DITH3 Color error diffusion KCMY
to 600dpi or 1200dpi depending on the DITH4 Monochrome error diffusion K
printing quality. DITH8 Monochrome dither(600dpi) K
Section DITH9 Monochrome dither(600dpi low) K
Operation/Procedure
Density level Default
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel. Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value
MX-xx60/xx70 series A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
Item Button display Content Default value
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
AUTO 600DPI ED AUTO 600DPI DT
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
600DPI DT
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
TEXT/PRT PHOTO 600DPI ED Text/Printed 600DPI DT
Photo F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
600DPI DT
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
1200DPI DT
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
TEXT/PHOTO 600DPI DT Text/ 600DPI DT
Photograph I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
1200DPI DT
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
PRINTED PHOTO 600DPI DT Printed photo 1200DPI DT
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
1200DPI DT
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
PHOTO 600DPI DT Photograph 1200DPI DT
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
1200DPI DT
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
MX-xx50 series O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
Item Button display Content Default value
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
AUTO 600DPI ED AUTO 600DPI DT
600DPI DT
TEXT/PRT PHOTO 600DPI ED Text/Printed 600DPI DT
600DPI DT Photo
46-52
1200DPI DT
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the gamma default for the copy
mode heavy paper and the image process
46-51 mode. (After execution of either SIM46-54
Purpose Adjustment/Setup or SIM46-51, the adjustment value is reset
to the initial value.)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma for the copy
mode heavy paper mode and the image Section
process mode. Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Select an item to be set to the default with the touch panel key.
Operation/Procedure To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL].
1) Select a target adjustment mode with the touch panel key 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[PAPER/DITHER]. 3) Press [YES] key.
2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the MX-xx60/xx70 series
touch panel.
Display Content
3) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the Dither HEAVYPAPER Copier/Heavy paper gamma
touch panel. BLACK EDGE Black edge
4) Enter the set value with 10-key. COLOR EDGE Color edge
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key. B/W ED Monochrome error diffusion
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is out- B/W 1200 Monochrome dither 1200dpi
putted. B/W 600 Monochrome dither 600dpi
B/W 600 LOW Monochrome dither 600dpi Low
When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is
WOVEN1 Watermark 1
made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust
WOVEN2 Watermark 2
the image density.
WOVEN3 Watermark 3
MX-xx60/xx70 series WOVEN4 Watermark 4
Item/Display Content Color
MX-xx50 series
HEAVY Copier heavy paper gamma KCMY
DITH1 Black edge K Display Content
DITH2 Color edge KCMY Dither HEAVYPAPER Copier/Heavy paper gamma
DITH3 Color error diffusion KCMY BLACK EDGE Black edge
DITH4 Monochrome error diffusion K COLOR EDGE Color edge
DITH7 Monochrome dither (1200dpi) K B/W ED Monochrome error diffusion
DITH8 Monochrome dither(600dpi) K B/W 600 Monochrome dither 600dpi
DITH9 Monochrome dither(600dpi low? K B/W 600 LOW Monochrome dither 600dpi Low
WOVEN1 Watermark 1
MX-xx50 series WOVEN2 Watermark 2
Item/Display Content Color WOVEN3 Watermark 3
HEAVY Copier heavy paper gamma KCMY WOVEN4 Watermark 4
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 69
46-54 46-58
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine halftone auto- Function (Purpose) Used to set the copy mode pseudo resolu-
matic density adjustment (dither). tion. (Smoothing process)
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Select an item (mode) to be set with the button and the scroll
The high density process control is started to make 48 patch key.
self print. (A4 (11" x 8.5") or A3 (11" x 17") paper in the paper 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
feed tray is used.) 3) Press [OK] key.
2) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press 1(ON): 9600 (equivalent) x 600 dpi
[EXECUTE] key.
0 (OFF): 600 x 600 dpi
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started.
The setting is reflected only the image edge area.
After scanning the 48 patch self print, the 17 patch self print is
automatically printed. Content Setting Default
Mode Item/Display
3) Press [OK] key. (copy mode) range value
COLOR A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0
After completion of the correction amount registration, the
ON 1
screen shifts to the dither selection menu.
B TEXT Text OFF 0 1
4) Select an item (dither) to be adjusted. ON 1
C TEXT PRT Text print OFF 0 0
HEAVYPAPER Copier/Heavy paper gamma
ON 1
BLACK EDGE Black edge
D PRINTED Printed Photo OFF 0 0
COLOR EDGE Color edge
PHOTO ON 1
B/W ED Monochrome error diffusion
E TEXT PHOTO Text OFF 0 0
B/W 1200 Monochrome dither 1200dpi (except MX-xx50
photograph ON 1
series)
F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0
B/W 600 Monochrome dither 600dpi
ON 1
B/W 600 LOW Monochrome dither 600dpi Low
G MAP Map OFF 0 1
WOVEN1 Watermark 1
ON 1
WOVEN2 Watermark 2
H LIGHT Light OFF 0 0
WOVEN3 Watermark 3
document ON 1
WOVEN4 Watermark 4
I CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. TEXT document) ON 1
The 48 patch self print is printed. J CPY TO CPY/ Text print OFF 0 0
TXT PRT (copy ON 1
6) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press document)
[EXECUTE] key. K CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started. PHOTO (copy ON 1
After scanning the patch, the screen automatically shifts to the document)
dither selection menu. MONO A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0
ON 1
7) After completion of the adjustment of all the density adjustment
B TEXT Text OFF 0 1
items (dither), press [OK] key.
ON 1
C TEXT PRT Text print OFF 0 0
ON 1
46-55 D PRINTED Printed Photo OFF 0 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setup PHOTO ON 1
E TEXT PHOTO Text OFF 0 0
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the drop out color in the
photograph ON 1
image send mode (monochrome manual
F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0
text mode).
ON 1
Section G MAP Map OFF 0 1
Operation/Procedure ON 1
In the image send mode (monochrome manual text mode), the H LIGHT Light OFF 0 0
range where color images are reproduced as monochrome images document ON 1
is adjusted. I CPY TO CPY/ Auto (copy OFF 0 0
AUTO document) ON 1
1) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
J CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1
When the adjustment value is increased, colors dropout TEXT document) ON 1
becomes easy to narrow the reproduction range. When the
K CPY TO CPY/ Text print OFF 0 0
adjustment value is decreased, color dropout becomes difficult TXT PRT (copy ON 1
to widen the reproduction range. document)
L CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0
Setting Default PHOTO (copy
Item/Display Content ON 1
range value document)
A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 70
46-60 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup L COLOR OFF Setting of ON/ OFF 0 0
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color PRINT: ON OFF of soft filter ON 1
auto copy mode. CMY application to
color print C, M, Y
Section images
Operation/Procedure M COLOR OFF Setting of ON/ OFF 0 0
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel. PRINT: ON OFF of soft filter ON 1
K application to
2) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter color print K
process mode) with 10-keys. images
3) Press [OK] key. N B/W OFF Setting of ON/ OFF 0 0
This is used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode PRINT ON OFF of soft filter ON 1
and the smoothness (roughness) in the dark area. application to
monochrome print
images
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A SCREE H Sharpness (filter) Strong 1 3
N adjustment of dot empha
FILTER pattern image in sis 46-61
LEVEL L auto copy mode Soft 2 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
empha
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni-
sis
tion level.
AUTO Auto 3
B CPY CL SOFT Sharpness (filter) SOFT 1 2 Section
AUTO CENT adjustment for the CENT 2 Operation/Procedure
FILTER ER automatic copy ER 1) Select an adjustment mode.
LEVEL HIGH mode (Text, HIGH 3
Printed Photo / 2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
Printed Photo panel.
images) 3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
C CPY SOFT Sharpness (filter) SOFT 1 2
4) Press [OK] key.
PUSH CENT adjustment for the CENT 2
AUTO ER automatic push ER
FILTER HIGH scan mode (Text, HIGH 3
LEVEL Printed Photo / This Sim is overwritten by changing Image “Quality Adjustment” ->
Printed Photo “Copy Image Quality” -> “Image Quality Priority”.
images)
(It is overwritten just by pressing the “Store” on screen without
D COLOR OFF Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
COPY : setting to C, M, Y changing the setting.)
ON ON 1
CMY image in color Make sure to set corresponding item Z to “1” after changing the
copy mode value.
E COLOR OFF Soft filter applying OFF 0 1 Then the adjustment of “Image Quality Priority” in System Settings
COPY : ON setting to K image ON 1 will be invalidated. (The adjustment itself is allowed from UI point of
K in color copy
view however, the image quality won’t change because the setting
mode
won’t be reflected to the Sim.)
F SINGLE OFF Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
COLOR ON setting to C, M, Y ON 1 - When “AUTO” in “COLOR” or “MONO” has been adjusted:
: CMY image in single Go to COLOR -> AUTO -> and set Z to 1…. Image Quality Priority
color copy mode “Auto” will be invalidated.
G 2 OFF Setting of YES/ OFF 0 1
- When “TPP” or “COPY (AUTO&TPP)” in “COLOR” or ”MONO”
COLOR ON NO of applying ON 1
COPY : the soft filter to C/ has been adjusted:
CMY M/Y images of the Go to COLOR -> TPP -> and set Z to 1…. Image Quality Priority
2-color copy mode “Text/Prtd.Photo” will be invalidated.
H 2 OFF Setting of YES/ OFF 0 1 (The item Z is not available in “MONO” and “COPY (AUTO&TPP)”)
COLOR ON NO of applying ON 1
COPY : the soft filter to K The adjustment of “MONO” -> “TPP” will affect FAX.
K images of the 2- This must be set to the default unless any change is specially
color copy mode required.
I B/W OFF Soft filter applying OFF 0 1 When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from
COPY ON setting in ON 1 the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some docu-
monochrome
ments.
copy mode
J COLOR OFF Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
Item/Display Content
PUSH : ON setting to image in ON 1
COLOR AUTO [Color/Gray] Auto
RGB push scan color
mode TPP [Color/Gray] Manual (Text print)
K B/W OFF Soft filter applying OFF 0 1 COPY(TPP and [Color/Gray] Copy document (Text print
PUSH setting to image in AUTO) and auto)
ON ON 1
push scan MONO AUTO [Monochrome] Auto
monochrome TPP [Monochrome] Manual (Text print)
mode COPY(TPP and [Monochrome] Copy document (Text print
AUTO) and auto)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 71
Setting Default
Setting Default Item/Display Content
Item/Display Content range value
range value
Image Quality
SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF:
A 0-1 0 SEGMENT: SWITCH Priority ON/OFF :
[TXT ON SCR] Text on dot Z 0-1 0
[LOCK] Image Quality
SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF:
B 0-1 0 Priority lock
[LINE SCR] line screen
SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF:
C 0-1 0
[SMALL SCR] Dot in a small area
Detection ON/OFF:
SEGMENT: SWITCH 46-62
D High line number 0-1 0
[HIGH LPI] Purpose Adjustment/Setup
judgment select
SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
E [TXT ON SCR IMAGE Text on image send 0-1 0 ACS, the area separation, the background
SEND] dots image process, and the auto exposure
Detection level mode.
SEGMENT: ADJUST
F adjustment: Black 1 - 99 50
[BK TXT 1] Section
text 1
Detection level Operation/Procedure
SEGMENT: ADJUST
G adjustment: Color 1 - 99 50
[CL TXT 1] 1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
text 1
panel.
Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST 2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
H adjustment: Black 1 - 49 25
[BK TXT 2, CL TXT 2]
text 2, Color text 2 3) Press [OK] key.
Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
I adjustment: Thine 1 - 99 50
[THIN LINE]
line
Detection level
This must be set to the default unless any change is specially
SEGMENT: ADJUST required.
J adjustment: Text 1 1 - 99 50
[TXT ON SCR 1]
on dots When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from
Detection level the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some docu-
SEGMENT: ADJUST
K adjustment: Text 2 1 - 99 50 ments.
[TXT ON SCR 2]
on dots
Detection level Setting Default
Item/Display Content
SEGMENT: ADJUST adjustment: range value
L 1 - 15 8
[TXT ON SCR AREA 1] Detection area 1 of A SW_ACS ACS judgment reference 0-1 1
text on dots area select
Detection level B TEXT_IMAGE Text/Image judgment 0-6 3
SEGMENT: ADJUST adjustment: priority level adjustment
M 1 - 99 50
[TXT ON SCR AREA 2] Detection area 2 of C TEXT_BLANK Text/Blank judgment 0-6 4
text on dots priority level adjustment
Detection level D HT_LV Dot area judgment 0-6 1
SEGMENT: ADJUST adjustment: High threshold value
N 1 - 49 25
[HIGH LPI] line number adjustment
judgment
E AE_AREA_LV Color AE judgment target 0-6 3
Detection level area adjustment
SEGMENT: ADJUST
O adjustment: No 1 - 99 50
[BK] F AE_LV_CC AE background detection 0-8 4
chrome judgment
division result
Detection level adjustment:
SEGMENT: ADJUST
P adjustment: Chrome 1 - 99 50 For color copy
[CL]
judgment
G AE_LV_MC AE background detection 0-8 4
Detection level division result
SEGMENT: ADJUST
Q adjustment: Text on 1 - 99 50 adjustment:
[TXT ON BG]
background For monochrome copy
Detection level H AE_LV_CS AE background detection 0-8 4
SEGMENT: ADJUST
R adjustment: High 1 - 49 25 division result
[SCR 1 HIGH]
density dots 1 adjustment:
Detection level For color scan
SEGMENT: ADJUST
S adjustment: Medium 1 - 49 25 I AE_LV_MS AE background detection 0-8 4
[SCR 1 MIDDLE]
density dots 1 division result
Detection level adjustment:
SEGMENT: ADJUST
T adjustment: Low 1 - 49 25 For monochrome scan
[SCR 1 LOW]
density dots 1 J AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0-4 0
SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level _LV_L_U density threshold value
U 1 - 15 8
[SCR 2] adjustment: Dot 2 adjustment (lower limit)
SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level K AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0 - 10 0
V 1 - 15 8
[SCR 3] adjustment: Dot 3 LV_L_O density threshold value
Detection level adjustment (upper limit)
SEGMENT: ADJUST
W adjustment: line 1 - 49 25 L AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0 - 10 5
[LINE HALFTONE]
screen LV_C detection level
Detection level adjustment (chroma)
SEGMENT: ADJUST
X adjustment: Small 1 - 49 25 M AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0
[SMALL SCR 1]
Dot Area 1 _ONOFF OFF OFF switch: OFF 1
Detection level _CC For color copy
SEGMENT: ADJUST
Y adjustment: Small 1 - 99 50 N AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0
[SMALL SCR 2]
Dot Area 2 _ONOFF OFF OFF switch: OFF 1
_MC For mono-
chrome copy
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 72
Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
O AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1 PRINTED PHOTO (COPY Printed photo
_CS For color scan TO COPY) (color copy)
P AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 K COLOR PUSH : Text print 1-9 5
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1 TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
_MS For mono- L COLOR PUSH : TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 5
chrome copy M COLOR PUSH : Printed photo 1-9 5
Q BLANK_JUDGE Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0 PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
_LV_L adjustment (value) N COLOR PUSH : Photograph 1-9 5
R BLANK_JUDGE Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0 PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
_LV_C adjustment (chroma) O COLOR PUSH : Text/Photograph 1-9 5
S MODE0_UNDE Mode 0 developing 0-6 0 TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
R paper mode select P COLOR PUSH : MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
T MODE1_UNDE Mode 1 developing 0-6 0
R paper mode select
U MODE5_UNDE Mode 5 developing 0-6 0
R paper mode select 46-65
V MODE6_UNDE Mode 6 developing 0-6 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
R paper mode select
W SW_CHANGE_ Mode 0: Mode judgment 0-6 0 Function (Purpose) Used to set the color correction table.
MODE0 select Section
X SW_CHANGE_ Mode 1: Mode judgment 0-6 1
Operation/Procedure
MODE1 select
Y SW_CHANGE_ Mode 2: Mode judgment 0-6 2 1) Select an adjustment mode.
MODE2 select 2) Select an item (mode) to be set with the scroll key.
Z SW_CHANGE_ Mode 3: Mode judgment 0-6 3 3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
MODE3 select
4) Press [OK] key.
AA SW_CHANGE_ Mode 4: Mode judgment 0-6 4
MODE4 select When the setting is changed, the color tone is changed. This func-
AB SW_CHANGE_ Mode 5: Mode judgment 0-6 5 tion is used to make copies of different color tone for each copy
MODE5 select mode.
AC SW_CHANGE_ Mode 6: Mode judgment 0-6 6 The initial value must be set unless any special change is required.
MODE6 select
Category Mode Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value
OC COPY A TEXT Text print
46-63 PRINTED 0 - 12 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setup PHOTO
B TEXT Text 0 - 12 3
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low
C PRINTED Printed
density section. 0 - 12 0
PHOTO Photo
Section D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 1
Operation/Procedure E TEXT Text
0 - 12 1
PHOTO photograph
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
F MAP Map 0 - 12 3
panel.
G LIGHT Pencil
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. 0 - 12 0
ORIGINAL
3) Press [OK] key. H COPY TO Copy
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the COPY/ document/
TEXT Text print 0 - 12 2
background and the low density image is increased. When the
PRINTED
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
PHOTO
and the low density image is decreased.
I COPY TO Copy
COPY/ document/ 0 - 12 3
Setting Default
Item/Display Content TEXT Text
range value
J COPY TO Copy
A COLOR COPY : Text print 1-9 3
COPY/ document/
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color copy) 0 - 12 2
PHOTO Printed
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3 Photo
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5 K AUTO0 Automatic
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy) mode 0 - 12 0
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5 judgment 0
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy) L AUTO1 Automatic
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3 mode 0 - 12 0
TEXT/PHOTO (color copy) judgment 1
F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5 M AUTO2 Automatic
G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6 mode 0 - 12 1
(color density) judgment 2
H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5 N AUTO3 Automatic
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Character print mode 0 - 12 1
(COPY TO COPY) (color copy) judgment 3
I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, 1-9 5 O AUTO4 Automatic
(COPY TO COPY) Character mode 0 - 12 0
(color copy) judgment 4
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 73
Category Mode Item/Display Content Setting Default Category Mode Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value range value
OC COPY P AUTO5 Automatic SPF1 COPY K AUTO0 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 0 (Docume mode 0 - 12 4
judgment 5 nt feeder judgment 0
Q AUTO6 Automatic (RSPF)/ L AUTO1 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 0 (DSPF)To mode 0 - 12 4
judgment 6 p) judgment 1
PREVI A TEXT Text print M AUTO2 Automatic
EW PRINTED 0 - 12 0 mode 0 - 12 5
PHOTO judgment 2
B TEXT Text 0 - 12 3 N AUTO3 Automatic
C PRINTED Printed mode 0 - 12 5
0 - 12 0
PHOTO Photo judgment 3
D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 1 O AUTO4 Automatic
E TEXT Text mode 0 - 12 4
0 - 12 1 judgment 4
PHOTO photograph
F MAP Map 0 - 12 3 P AUTO5 Automatic
G LIGHT Pencil mode 0 - 12 4
0 - 12 0 judgment 5
ORIGINAL
H COPY TO Copy Q AUTO6 Automatic
COPY/ document/ mode 0 - 12 4
TEXT Text print 0 - 12 2 judgment 6
PRINTED PREVI A TEXT Text print
PHOTO EW PRINTED 0 - 12 4
I COPY TO Copy PHOTO
COPY/ document/ 0 - 12 3 B TEXT Text 0 - 12 7
TEXT Text C PRINTED Printed
0 - 12 4
J COPY TO Copy PHOTO Photo
COPY/ document/ D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 5
0 - 12 2
PHOTO Printed E TEXT Text
0 - 12 5
Photo PHOTO photograph
K AUTO0 Automatic F MAP Map 0 - 12 7
mode 0 - 12 0 G LIGHT Pencil
0 - 12 4
judgment 0 ORIGINAL
L AUTO1 Automatic H COPY TO Copy
mode 0 - 12 0 COPY/ document/
judgment 1 TEXT Text print 0 - 12 6
M AUTO2 Automatic PRINTED
mode 0 - 12 1 PHOTO
judgment 2 I COPY TO Copy
N AUTO3 Automatic COPY/ document/ 0 - 12 7
mode 0 - 12 1 TEXT Text
judgment 3 J COPY TO Copy
O AUTO4 Automatic COPY/ document/
0 - 12 6
mode 0 - 12 0 PHOTO Printed
judgment 4 Photo
P AUTO5 Automatic K AUTO0 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 0 mode 0 - 12 4
judgment 5 judgment 0
Q AUTO6 Automatic L AUTO1 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 0 mode 0 - 12 4
judgment 6 judgment 1
SPF1 COPY A TEXT Text print M AUTO2 Automatic
(Docume PRINTED 0 - 12 4 mode 0 - 12 5
nt feeder PHOTO judgment 2
(RSPF)/ B TEXT Text 0 - 12 7 N AUTO3 Automatic
(DSPF)To C PRINTED Printed mode 0 - 12 5
p) 0 - 12 4
PHOTO Photo judgment 3
D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 5 O AUTO4 Automatic
E TEXT Text mode 0 - 12 4
0 - 12 5 judgment 4
PHOTO photograph
F MAP Map 0 - 12 7 P AUTO5 Automatic
G LIGHT Pencil mode 0 - 12 4
0 - 12 4 judgment 5
ORIGINAL
H COPY TO Copy Q AUTO6 Automatic
COPY/ document/ mode 0 - 12 4
TEXT Text print 0 - 12 6 judgment 6
PRINTED
PHOTO
I COPY TO Copy
COPY/ document/ 0 - 12 7
TEXT Text
J COPY TO Copy
COPY/ document/
0 - 12 6
PHOTO Printed
Photo
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 74
Category Mode Item/Display Content Setting Default Category Mode Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value range value
SPF2(Do COPY A TEXT Text print SPF2(Do PREVI A TEXT Text print
cument PRINTED 0 - 12 8 cument EW PRINTED 0 - 12 8
feeder PHOTO feeder PHOTO
(DSPF) B TEXT Text 0 - 12 11 (DSPF) B TEXT Text 0 - 12 11
Back) C PRINTED Printed Back) C PRINTED Printed
0 - 12 8 0 - 12 8
PHOTO Photo PHOTO Photo
D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 9 D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 9
E TEXT Text E TEXT Text
0 - 12 9 0 - 12 9
PHOTO photograph PHOTO photograph
F MAP Map 0 - 12 11 F MAP Map 0 - 12 11
G LIGHT Pencil G LIGHT Pencil
0 - 12 8 0 - 12 8
ORIGINAL ORIGINAL
H COPY TO Copy H COPY TO Copy
COPY/ document/ COPY/ document/
TEXT Text print 0 - 12 10 TEXT Text print 0 - 12 10
PRINTED PRINTED
PHOTO PHOTO
I COPY TO Copy I COPY TO Copy
COPY/ document/ 0 - 12 11 COPY/ document/ 0 - 12 11
TEXT Text TEXT Text
J COPY TO Copy J COPY TO Copy
COPY/ document/ COPY/ document/
0 - 12 10 0 - 12 10
PHOTO Printed PHOTO Printed
Photo Photo
K AUTO0 Automatic K AUTO0 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 8 mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 0 judgment 0
L AUTO1 Automatic L AUTO1 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 8 mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 1 judgment 1
M AUTO2 Automatic M AUTO2 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 9 mode 0 - 12 9
judgment 2 judgment 2
N AUTO3 Automatic N AUTO3 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 9 mode 0 - 12 9
judgment 3 judgment 3
O AUTO4 Automatic O AUTO4 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 8 mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 4 judgment 4
P AUTO5 Automatic P AUTO5 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 8 mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 5 judgment 5
Q AUTO6 Automatic Q AUTO6 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 8 mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 6 judgment 6
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 75
46-66
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
of watermarks in the copy/printer mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of watermarks in the
copy/printer mode.
1) Select the adjustment mode.
2) Select an adjustment item according to the necessity.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
4) Make a copy, and check the adjustment result.
Setting Default
Category Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
PATTERN A WOVEN DEN BK LOW Watermark density level (Black LOW) 0 - 255 15 The adjustment value is
B WOVEN DEN BK MIDDLE Watermark density level (Black MIDDLE) 0 - 255 19 changed to increase or
C WOVEN DEN BK HIGH Watermark density level (Black HIGH) 0 - 255 23 decrease the density of the
D WOVEN DEN C LOW Watermark density level (Cyan LOW) 0 - 255 19 watermark of background
documents (primary output).
E WOVEN DEN C MIDDLE Watermark density level (Cyan MIDDLE) 0 - 255 23
To increase the watermark
F WOVEN DEN C HIGH Watermark density level (Cyan HIGH) 0 - 255 27
density, increase the
G WOVEN DEN M LOW Watermark density level (Magenta LOW) 0 - 255 15 adjustment value.
H WOVEN DEN M MIDDLE Watermark density level (Magenta MIDDLE) 0 - 255 18 To decrease the watermark
I WOVEN DEN M HIGH Watermark density level (Magenta HIGH) 0 - 255 21 density, decrease the
adjustment value.
NOTE:
When the adjustment value
is increased, the watermark
area which is originally not
reproduced becomes
difficult to disappear.
When the adjustment value
is decreased, the watermark
area which is originally
reproduced becomes easy
to disappear.
J CONTRAST Contrast adjustment 0 - 255 2 This is used to adjust the
variation in the watermark
density when the adjustment
value of the watermark print/
contrast adjustment in the
system setting is changed
by 1.
When this value is
increased, the variation is
also increased. When the
value is decreased, the
variation is also decreased.
When the adjustment value
is 0, the result of the
contrast adjustment is not
reflected. (* The adjustment
value must be set to 1 or
greater.)
PATTERN K HT TYPE (POSI) For halftone index watermark type positive 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing
L HT TYPE (NEGA) For halftone index watermark type negative 42 - 43 42 characters of watermark
copy (secondary output)
more clearly, set to 43.
In that case, however, the
containing characters of the
watermark document
(primary output) can be
easily reproduced.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 76
Setting Default
Category Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
COPY MODE A TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed Photo mode OFF 0-1 0 1 Normally set to the default.
select Enable/Disable ON 1 No need to change in the
B TEXT Text mode select Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1 market.
Disable ON 1
C PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo mode OFF 0-1 0 1
select Enable/Disable ON 1
D PHOTOGRAPH Photograph mode select OFF 0-1 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph mode OFF 0-1 0 1
select Enable/Disable ON 1
F MAP Map mode select Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1
Disable ON 1
G LIGHT Light density document OFF 0-1 0 1
mode select Enable/ ON 1
Disable
H TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Copy document: Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1
(CPY TO CPY) Disable of selection of the ON 1
text print mode
I TEXT (CPY TO CPY) Copy document: Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1
Disable of selection of the ON 1
text mode
J PRINTED PHOTO (CPY Copy document: Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1
TO CPY) Disable of selection of the ON 1
printed photo mode
K AUTO Automatic mode select OFF 0-1 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
L DEFAULT MODE When the default TEXT/ 0-5 0 0
exposure mode PRINTED PHOTO
background is ON, the TEXT 1
exposure mode to be set PRINTED PHOTO 2
is specified. PHOTOGRAPH 3
TEXT/PHOTO 4
MAP 5
POSITION A LINE SPACE 1 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 50
(24P - 36P)
B LINE SPACE 2 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 60
(37P - 48P)
C LINE SPACE 3 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 70
(49P - 64P)
D LINE SPACE 4 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 80
(65P - 80P)
E BLANK H/B 1 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print 0 - 200 25
box (24P - 36P)
F BLANK H/B 2 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print 0 - 200 30
box (37P - 48P)
G BLANK H/B 3 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print 0 - 200 35
box (49P - 64P)
H BLANK H/B 4 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print 0 - 200 40
box (65P - 80P)
I BLANK L/R 1 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box 0 - 200 60
(24P - 36P)
J BLANK L/R 2 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box 0 - 200 90
(37P - 48P)
K BLANK L/R 3 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box 0 - 200 120
(49P - 64P)
L BLANK L/R 4 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box 0 - 200 150
(65P - 80P)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 77
46-68
Purpose Adjustment/Setup The adjustment result becomes effective only when the adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the automatic resolution procedure for both copy and print mode have completed success-
judgement. (For MX-xx60/xx70 series) fully. For example, when the copy color balance adjustment (auto-
Section matic adjustment) is performed and the simulation is canceled, the
adjustment result is not effective.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
46-90
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment
3) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process operation of high-
Item/Display Content
Setting Default compression PDF images.
range value
Section
RESULT HIGH Judgement result : High
A 0-3 3 Operation/Procedure
RESOLUTION resolution
RESULT MID Judgement result : 1) Select a target adjustment mode.
B 0-3 2
RESOLUTION1 Slight high resolution 2) Select an adjustment target item with the scroll key.
RESULT MID Judgement result :
C 0-3 1 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
RESOLUTION2 Slight low resolution
RESULT LOW Judgement result : Low 4) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
D 0-3 1
RESOLUTION1 resolution
MX-xx60/xx70 series
RESULT UNKNOWN Judgement result :
E 0-3 1
RESOLUTION Cannot judge Setting Default
Mode Item / Display Content
F LANGUAGE SEL Language setting 0-1 0 value value
AUTO RESOLUTION Automatic resolution TEXT GLYPH Text handling
G 0-2 1 A 0-2 0
MODE judgement mode SENSITIVITY selection
BG SW FOR Line handling
B 0-1 0
FINDLINES selection
HOR Line detection
C 0-2 0
46-74 FINDLINES SW SW(H)
VERT Line detection
Purpose Adjustment D
FINDLINES SW SW (V)
0-2 0
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Auto Text color
FGCOLOR
adjustment)/Printer color balance adjust- E number 0-3 0
INDEXING SEL
ment (Auto adjustment) adjustment SW
FGCOLOR Text color
Section F 0-4 2
INDEXING ADJ adjustment
Operation/Procedure COLO LUMINANCE Luminance
A 0-4 2
This simulation is used to perform SIM46-24 and SIM67-24 contin- R ADJUSTMENT adjustment
uously. CHROMA Chroma
B 0-2 1
To perform both the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic INTENT selection
adjustment) and the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic NEUTRAL Neutral
C 0-2 0
ADJUSTMENT adjustment
adjustment), use this simulation for efficient adjustment operations.
R-RATIO Gray scale
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the high density process control is D 0 - 1000 299
ADJUSTMENT adjustment
performed. Then, the copy color balance adjustment pattern is G-RATIO Gray scale
printed. E 0 - 1000 587
ADJUSTMENT adjustment (G)
2) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, BG BG LAYER Speed priority
A 0-2 1
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. LAYER INTENT 1 setting
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment BG LAYER Image quality
B 0-2 1
INTENT 2 priority setting
is performed and the adjustment result pattern is printed.
SOFT SKEW Skew correction
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust- A 0-1 0
CIC CORRECTION switch
ment pattern is printed. B FILTER Filter switch 0-1 0
5) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, High
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. C CIC MODE compression 0-1 0
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust- mode switch
ment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the adjustment OUTPUT Resolution
D 0-3 0
RESOLUTION setting
result pattern is printed.
7) Press [OK] key, and the halftone correction target is registered.
8) When [EXECUTE] key is displayed, press it.
When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the adjust- In the table above, the valid items in MX-xx60/xx70 (Standard
ment is completed. equipped compact PDF) are COLOR[A-B], BG LAYER[A-B] and
SOFT CIC[A-D].
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 78
MX-xx50 series Default
Item Display Content Description
value
Mode Item / Display Content Setting Default
value value D BG: JPEG JPEG 0: Low 1
QUALITY LV recompression 1: Middle
TEXT GLYPH Text handling
A 0-2 0 [GRY: COMPACT] level adjustment 2: High
SENSITIVITY selection
[Gray: High
BG SW FOR Line handling
B 0-1 0 compression
FINDLINES selection
mode]
HOR Line detection
C 0-2 0 E BG: JPEG JPEG 1
FINDLINES SW SW(H)
QUALITY LV recompression
VERT Line detection [GRY: ULTRA level adjustment
D 0-2 0
FINDLINES SW SW (V) FINE] [Gray: Ultra fine
Text color mode]
FGCOLOR
E number 0-3 0 F FG: TYPE0 Front ground 0: type0 0
INDEXING SEL
adjustment SW TARGE extraction area 1: type1
TYPE1
FGCOLOR Text color T AREA select 2: type2
F 0-4 2 TYPE2
INDEXING ADJ adjustment
G FG: TEXT Front ground 0: Dark - 5
COLO LUMINANCE Luminance
A 0-4 2 DENSITY [COL] black text density 5: Default -
R ADJUSTMENT adjustment
adjustment 10: Light
CHROMA Chroma [Color]
B 0-2 1
INTENT selection
H FG: TEXT Front ground 5
NEUTRAL Neutral DENSITY [GRY] black text density
C 0-2 0
ADJUSTMENT adjustment adjustment
R-RATIO Gray scale [Gray]
D 0 - 1000 299
ADJUSTMENT adjustment I ULTRA ON High 0: High 0
G-RATIO Gray scale FINE OFF compression/ compression
E 0 - 1000 587
ADJUSTMENT adjustment (G) MODE Ultra Fine mode mode
BG BG LAYER Speed priority select 1: Ultra fine
A 0-2 1
LAYER INTENT 1 setting mode
BG LAYER Image quality
B 0-2 1 NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe-
INTENT 2 priority setting
cially required.
When the adjustment value is changed greatly from the ini-
tial value, an image quality trouble may occur.
46-91
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
of black text. 48
Section
Operation/Procedure 48-1
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key. Purpose Adjustment
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica-
3) Press [OK] key. The adjustment value is set. tion ratio (in the main scanning direction
When COLOR key or MONO key is pressed, the adjustment value and the sub scanning direction).
is set and a copy is made simultaneously. Section
Operation/Procedure
Default
Item Display Content Description
value 1) Select a target adjustment item on the touch panel.
A SEGME COMM Area separation 0: Other than 0 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
NT ON setting select image send 3) Press [OK] key.
PARAM SPECI mode black
The set value is saved.
AL text emphasis
(simple, high When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification
compression) ratio is increased.
1: Image send A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corre-
mode black
sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio.
text emphasis
(simple, high A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B, D, or F corre-
compression) sponds to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.
B BG: JPEG JPEG 0: Low 1 [RSPF]
QUALITY LV recompression 1: Middle
[COL: COMPACT] level adjustment 2: High Setting Default
Item/Display Content
[Color: High range value
compression A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
mode] magnification ratio adjustment
C BG: JPEG JPEG 1 (CCD)
QUALITY LV recompression B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
[COL: ULTRA level adjustment magnification ratio adjustment
FINE] [Color: Ultra fine (CCD)
mode] C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scan)
D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment
(Sub scan)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 79
1 : ‘16/Feb.
Setting Default 48-5
Item/Display Content
range value
E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50 Purpose Adjustment
magnification ratio adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnifi-
(Main scan) cation ratio (in the sub scanning direction).
F SPFB (SUB) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment
Section Scanner section
(Sub scan) Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item on the touch panel.
[DSPF]
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
3) Press [OK] key.
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50 The set value is saved.
magnification ratio adjustment When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is
(CCD) adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci-
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50 fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform
magnification ratio adjustment this adjustment.
(CCD)
C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,
magnification ratio adjustment change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there
(Main scan) is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50 the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
magnification ratio adjustment
(Sub scan) Item/Display Content
Setting Default
E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50 range value
magnification ratio adjustment A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50
(Main scan) B MR(MID) Scanner motor (Reference speed) 1 - 99 50
C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50
D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
(High speed)
E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
(Reference speed)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 80
Default value
Setting
Mode Select Item/Display Content North
range Europe Other
America
COLOR/MONO MID K POM Paper exit motor correction value 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A E 50
1 - 99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
COLOR/MONO MID L SBM Reverse motor correction value 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A F 50
1 - 99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
COLOR/MONO MID M POM(OUT) Paper exit motor correction value (From Tray 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A G exit) 50
1 - 99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
COLOR/MONO MID N SBM(OUT) Reverse motor correction value (From Tray 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A H exit) 50
1 - 99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
COLOR/MONO MID O ADUM1(OUT) ADU motor correction value (From Right 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A I paper exit tray exit) 50
1 - 99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A J FUSER-SETTING Fusing speed switch timing value 50
HEAVY3 LOW B 1 - 99 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A K RRM-START RRM acceleration start timing 150
HEAVY3 LOW B 0 - 255 150
HEAVY4 LOW C 150
HEAVY1,2 LOW A L RRM-END RRM acceleration end timing 200
HEAVY3 LOW B 0 - 255 200
HEAVY4 LOW C 200
HEAVY1,2 LOW A M RRM-OFFSET RRM acceleration ratio 50
HEAVY3 LOW B 50 - 99 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
COLOR/MONO MID P COR-IM Imaging motors all correction values 1 - 99 50
COLOR/MONO MID Q COR-PP Paper transport motors all correction values 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A N 50
1 - 99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
The greater the correction value is, the higher the speed is, and vice versa. Change by +/-1 corresponds to 0.1%.
List of destination groups
Group Destination
North America U. S. A CANADA INCH
Europe EUROPE U. K AUS.
Other AB TAIWAN
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 81
1 : ‘16/Feb.
Error display 5) Press [YES] key.
Item/Display Content in case or The selected OCR is updated.
abnormality
DESK Desk unit program DESK
DESK(TANDEM) Tandem desk unit program DESKT
49-10
LCC LCC program LCC
FINISHER(1KFIN) 1K Finisher program FIN1 Purpose
FINISHER(3KFIN) 3K Finisher program FIN3M Function (Purpose) Used to perform the ACU firmware update.
FINISHER(INNER) Inner finisher program INFIN
Section
JOGGER 3K Finisher jogger program JOG
FIN-SUB 3K Finisher sub program FINS
Operation/Procedure
SADDLE Saddle program SDL 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
PUNCH(3K) 3K Punch unit program 3PUN 2) Press [YES] key.
PUNCH(IN) Inner punch unit program INPUN
FAX Standard FAX program FAX
FAX OPT1 Optional FAX 1st line program FXOT1
High compression PDF unit
ACU
program
ACU 50
50-1
49-3 Purpose Adjustment
Purpose Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust-
ment
Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel.
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E-
MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1. default.
2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis- RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment
play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.) LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment
The current version and the update version are displayed. SIDE: Side image loss adjustment
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes
Setting Default
active from gray out. Item/Display Content
range value
4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
updated. edge edge reference
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis- adjust- position (OC)
B ment RRCB-CS Regis- Standard 1 - 99 50
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
value tration Tray
C RRCB-DSK motor Desk 1 - 99 50
D RRCB-LCC ON LCC 1 - 99 50
49-5 E RRCB-MFT timing Manual 1 - 99 50
adjust- paper
Purpose
ment feed
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the watermark update.
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
Section G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40
Operation/Procedure loss area loss area setting
H setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
value area adjustment
2) Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 40
update. adjust- area adjustment
3) The current version and the update version are displayed. J ment DENB Rear edge void 1 - 99 30
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. area adjustment
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 23 1
5) Press [YES] key.
REAR area adjustment
The selected watermark is updated. L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjust- OC center adjustment
ment
49-6 M Magnificat SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
ion ratio SPEED_ magnification ratio
Purpose correc- OC adjustment (CCD)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the OCR update. tion
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
2) Select the button of the folder to perform the OCR update.
3) The current version and the update version are displayed.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 82
1 : ‘16/Feb.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value Item/Display Content
range value
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print lead 1 - 99 30
scanning correction value
edge image position.
O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50 (PRINTER MODE)
print area value
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50 adjustment
value value
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 23 1
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50 adjustment
value
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void 1 - 99 50
R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50 area adjustment correction
value value
S DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 - 99 50 E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
value adjustment correction value
T DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 50 F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
value adjustment correction value
U DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50 G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
correction value adjustment correction value
A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifying H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value
the image lead edge reference is adjusted. (01.mm/step)
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void aria 1 - 99 50
* When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When adjustment correction value
the value is increased, the timing is delayed. J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria 1 - 99 50 1
B - F. (RRC-B) Timing of paper (registration roller ON) for the adjustment correction value
image position on the transfer belt is adjusted. (0.1mm/step) K DENB-HV Heavy paper correction 1 - 99 50
* When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the value
value is increased, the timing is advanced. L MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
M PAPER MFT Tray Manual paper 1 2
G. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
selection feed
step)
CS1 Tray 1 2
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased. CS2 Tray 2 3
H. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted. CS3 Tray 3 4
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased. CS4 Tray 4 5
(0.1mm/step) LCC LCC 6
N DUPLE YES Duplex Yes 0 1
I. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
X NO print No 1
step)
selection
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.
J. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
step) paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.
edge to the image lead edge is decreased.
K. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
about 0.1mm.
50-5
50-6
Purpose Adjustment
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
position. (PRINTER MODE)
the image loss. (SPF mode)
Section
Section SPF
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with scroll key on the
1) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel.
touch panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is [RSPF]
printed. Setting Default
Item/Display Content
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment range value
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
in the standard adjustment value range. document scan
position
Standard reference value: 4.0 +/- 2.0mm adjustment (CCD)
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the document scan
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased. position
adjustment (CCD)
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
about 0.1mm.
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
amount amount setting
setting
SIDE1
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 83
Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
D Image FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20 J OFSET_SPF2 DSPF back 1 - 99 50
loss (SIDE1) image loss amount surface document
amount setting off-center
E setting TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 40 adjustment
SIDE1 (SIDE1) edge image loss K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document 1 - 99 50
amount setting front surface
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 20 magnification ratio
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss (Sub scan)
amount amount setting
setting Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing
G FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount is delayed.
setting Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 40 is increased.
(SIDE2) edge image loss Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,
amount setting
increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
I OFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off- All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
center adjustment
J OFSET_SPF2 RSPF back 1 - 99 50
surface document 50-10
off-center
adjustment Purpose Adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust print image position
front surface
Section
magnification ratio
(Sub scan) Operation/Procedure
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50 1) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel.
back surface 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
magnification ratio
(Sub scan) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing Setting Default
Item/Display Content
is delayed. range value
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss A BK-MAG Main scan print 60 - 140 102
magnification ratio BK
is increased.
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 59
Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge, value (Manual paper feed)
increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow. C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change value (Tray 1)
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
[DSPF]
value (Tray 2)
Setting Default E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content
range value value (Tray 3)
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50 F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
document scan value (Tray 4)
position G MAIN-LC Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
adjustment (CCD) value (Large capacity tray)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50 H MAIN-ADU 1 - 99 67
document scan I SUB-MFT Registration Manual 1 - 99 43
position motor ON paper feed
adjustment (CCD) timing
J SUB-CS1 Standard 1 - 99 50
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20 adjustment cassette
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
K SUB-DSK DESK 1 - 99 50
amount amount setting
L SUB-LC LCC 1 - 99 50
setting
SIDE1 M SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
D Image FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20 N MAIN-STD Combined Standard 1 - 99 44
loss (SIDE1) image loss amount correction correction
amount setting value amount
setting (Off center
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 40
SIDE1 direction)
(SIDE1) edge image loss
amount setting O SUB-STD Standard 1 - 99 67
correction
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 40
amount
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
(Paper
amount amount setting
feed
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
direction)
SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount
P SUB-HV-A Shifting Heavy1, 2 1 - 99 50
setting
Q SUB-HV-B amount value Heavy3, 4 1 - 99 50
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) edge image loss R SUB-GLOSSY Gross 1 - 99 50
amount setting PAPER
I OFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50 S SUB-EMBOSS Emboss 1 - 99 50
document off- T SUB-OHP OHP 1 - 99 50
center adjustment U SUB-ENV Envelop 1 - 99 50
V MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 84
Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
W PAPE MFT Tray selection Manual 1 2 (CS1) G CYAN(SUB) Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
R paper feed value sub scanning direction
CS1 Tray 1 2 CYAN (Black drum
CS2 Tray 2 3 reference)
CS3 Tray 3 4 H MAGENTA(SU Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
CS4 Tray 4 5 B) value sub scanning direction
MAGENTA (Black drum
LCC LCC 6
reference)
X DUPL YES Duplex print Yes 0 1 (NO)
I YELLOW(SUB) Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
EX NO selection No 1
value sub scanning direction
YELLOW (Black drum
reference)
J OFFSET_C_M Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
50-12 AIN_F value main scanning
Purpose Adjustment direction offset value CYAN
(FRONT)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center
K OFFSET_C_M Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
position adjustment. (The adjustment is
AIN_R value main scanning
made separately for each scan mode.) direction offset value CYAN
Section (REAR)
Operation/Procedure L OFFSET_M_M Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
AIN_F value main scanning
1) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel. direction offset value
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. MAGENTA (FRONT)
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) M OFFSET_M_M Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
AIN_R value main scanning
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is
direction offset value
shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is MAGENTA (REAR)
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side. N OFFSET_Y_M Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
1step = 0.1mm AIN_F value main scanning
direction offset value
Setting Default YELLOW (FRONT)
Item/Display Content
range value O OFFSET_Y_M Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50 AIN_R value main scanning
center adjustment direction offset value
B SPF (SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50 YELLOW (REAR)
center adjustment P OFFSET_C_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 51
C SPF (SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50 UB value sub scanning direction
center adjustment offset value CYAN
Q OFFSET_M_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 51
UB value sub scanning direction
offset value MAGENTA
50-20 R OFFSET_Y_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 51
UB value sub scanning direction
Purpose Adjustment offset value YELLOW
Function (Purpose) Image registration adjustment (Main scan- S OFFSET_C_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
ning direction) UB_HV12 value sub scanning direction
offset value CYAN (HEAVY
Section
1/2)
Operation/Procedure T OFFSET_M_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch UB_HV12 value sub scanning direction
panel. offset value MAGENTA
(HEAVY 1/2)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
U OFFSET_Y_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.) UB_HV12 value sub scanning direction
offset value YELLOW
Setting Default (HEAVY 1/2)
Item/Display Content
range value V OFFSET_C_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
A CYAN(FRONT) Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200 UB_HV34 value sub scanning direction
value main scanning offset value CYAN (HEAVY
direction CYAN F side 3/4)
B CYAN(REAR) Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200 W OFFSET_M_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
value main scanning UB_HV34 value sub scanning direction
direction CYAN R side offset value MAGENTA
C MAGENTA(FR Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200 (HEAVY 3/4)
ONT) value main scanning X OFFSET_Y_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
direction MAGENTA F side UB_HV34 value sub scanning direction
D MAGENTA(RE Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200 offset value YELLOW
AR) value main scanning (HEAVY 3/4)
direction MAGENTA R side Y MULTICOUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
E YELLOW(FRO Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
NT) value main scanning
direction YELLOW F side
F YELLOW(REA Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
R) value main scanning
direction YELLOW R side
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 85
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Z PAPE MFT Tray selection Manual 1 2
R paper feed
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
A DUPL YES Duplex print Yes 0 1
A EX NO selection No 1
50-22
Purpose Adjustment The contents of the following list are mainly used by the technical
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image registration. (Main division, and are not necessary for the market.
scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto
adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment is automatically performed, and the adjust-
ment data are displayed.
Color/ Default
Item/Display Content Setting range (unit) NOTE
History value
MAIN F - REG_M_F Registration adjustment 1.0 - 399.0 (+/-0.1) CMY/- 200
(VALUE) correction amount main scanning
direction F
() REG_M_F (DIF) Registration value correction -399.0 - 399.0 (+/-0.1) CMY/- 0
amount from the previous one,
main scanning F
MAIN R - REG_M_R Registration adjustment 1.0 - 399.0 (+/-0.1) CMY/- 200
(VALUE) correction value, main scanning
direction R
() REG_M_R (DIF) Registration value correction -399.0 - 399.0 (+/-0.1) CMY/- 0
amount from the previous one,
main scanning R
SUB - REG_SUB Registration adjustment 1.0 - 399.0 (+/-0.1) CMY/- 200
(VALUE) correction value, sub scanning
direction
() REG_SUB (DIF) Registration value correction -399.0 - 399.0 (+/-0.1) CMY/- 0
amount from the previous one,
sub scanning
SKEW CMY SKEW_CLC SKEW adjustment rotating L99.9 - R99.9 (+/-0.1) KCMY/- 0 If the value is plus, L is
direction and the number of clicks displayed to left side of
(CMY) numerical value. If the value
is minus, R is displayed to left
side of numerical value.
ALL_ SKEW adjustment rotating If the value is plus, L is
ROTATE direction and the number of clicks displayed to left side of
(K) numerical value. If the value
is minus, R is displayed to left
side of numerical value.
PHASE PHASE_ADJ Phase adjustment value (1: Value 1 - 8 (+/-1) More than 1 -
of this time, 2: Value of the 50cpm :
previous time) CMY/2
Angle step 0 (1) -> 45 (2) -> 90 Less than
(3) -> 135 (4) -> 180 (5) -> 225 50 cpm : -/2
(6) -> 270 (7) -> 315 (8)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 86
50-23 Item/Display Contents Setting Default
range value
Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the CP_N CP_NORM_ Normal correction
market.) SUB_M operation rate
Function (Purpose) Used to set the registration for temperature F correction coefficient 1 - 199 100
adjustment. (Magenta sub
scanning)
Section CP_NORM_ Normal correction
Operation/Procedure MAIN_F_Y operation rate
G correction coefficient 1 - 199 100
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
(Yellow main scanning
panel.
F side)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. CP_NORM_ Normal correction
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.) MAIN_R_Y operation rate
H correction coefficient 1 - 199 100
Item/Display Contents Setting Default (Yellow main scanning
range value R side)
CT_N CT_NORM_ Normal correction CP_NORM_ Normal correction
MAIN_F_C temperature correction SUB_Y operation rate
A 1 - 199 104 I 1 - 199 100
coefficient (Cyan main correction coefficient
scanning F side) (Yellow sub scanning)
CT_NORM_ Normal correction CT_J CT_JOB_M Correction during job
MAIN_R_C temperature correction AIN_C temperature correction
B 1 - 199 104 A 1 - 199 104
coefficient (Cyan main coefficient (Cyan main
scanning R side) scanning)
CT_NORM_ Normal correction CT_JOB_S Correction during job
SUB_C temperature correction UB_C temperature correction
C 1 - 199 103 B 1 - 199 103
coefficient (Cyan sub coefficient (Cyan sub
scanning) scanning)
CT_NORM_ Normal correction CT_JOB_M Correction during job
MAIN_F_M temperature correction AIN_M temperature correction
D 1 - 199 107 C 1 - 199 107
coefficient (Magenta coefficient (Magenta
main scanning F side) main scanning)
CT_NORM_ Normal correction CT_JOB_S Correction during job
MAIN_R_M temperature correction UB_M temperature correction
E 1 - 199 107 D 1 - 199 97
coefficient (Magenta coefficient (Magenta
main scanning R side) sub scanning)
CT_NORM_ Normal correction CT_JOB_M Correction during job
SUB_M temperature correction AIN_Y temperature correction
F 1 - 199 97 E 1 - 199 107
coefficient (Magenta coefficient (Yellow main
sub scanning) scanning)
CT_NORM_ Normal correction CT_JOB_S Correction during job
MAIN_F_Y temperature correction UB_Y temperature correction
G 1 - 199 107 F 1 - 199 97
coefficient (Yellow main coefficient (Yellow sub
scanning F side) scanning)
CT_NORM_ Normal correction CP_J CP_JOB_M Correction during job
MAIN_R_Y temperature correction AIN_C operation rate
H 1 - 199 107 A 1 - 199 100
coefficient (Yellow main correction coefficient
scanning R side) (Cyan main scanning)
CT_NORM_ Normal correction CP_JOB_S Correction during job
SUB_Y temperature correction UB_C operation rate
I 1 - 199 97 B 1 - 199 100
coefficient (Yellow sub correction coefficient
scanning) (Cyan sub scanning)
CP_N CP_NORM_ Normal correction CP_JOB_M Correction during job
MAIN_F_C operation rate AIN_M operation rate
A correction coefficient 1 - 199 100 C correction coefficient 1 - 199 120
(Cyan main scanning F (Magenta main
side) scanning)
CP_NORM_ Normal correction CP_JOB_S Correction during job
MAIN_R_C operation rate UB_M operation rate
B correction coefficient 1 - 199 100 D correction coefficient 1 - 199 100
(Cyan main scanning R (Magenta sub
side) scanning)
CP_NORM_ Normal correction CP_JOB_M Correction during job
SUB_C operation rate AIN_Y operation rate
C 1 - 199 100 E 1 - 199 120
correction coefficient correction coefficient
(Cyan sub scanning) (Yellow main scanning)
CP_NORM_ Normal correction CP_JOB_S Correction during job
MAIN_F_M operation rate UB_Y operation rate
F 1 - 199 100
D correction coefficient 1 - 199 100 correction coefficient
(Magenta main (Yellow sub scanning)
scanning F side)
CP_NORM_ Normal correction
MAIN_R_M operation rate
E correction coefficient 1 - 199 100
(Magenta main
scanning R side)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 87
50-24 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the When A Image LEAD_ED OC lead 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
market.) image loss GE (OC) edge image
Function (Purpose) Used to display the detail data of automatic send amount loss amount
registration data. mode setting setting
(Excep B OC FRONT_R OC side 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
Section t for EAR(OC) image loss
Operation/Procedure FAX amount
and setting
copy) C TRAIL_ED OC rear 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
GE(OC) edge image
50-27 loss amount
Purpose Adjustment setting
D Image LEAD_ED Front 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment
loss GE surface lead
of scanned images in the FAX or image amount (SPF_SID edge image
send mode. setting E1) loss amount
Section SPF setting
E SIDE1 FRONT_R Front 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
Operation/Procedure
EAR surface side
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER] (SPF_SID image loss
key. E1) amount
2) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel. setting
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. F TRAIL_ED Front 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
GE(SPF_ surface rear
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) SIDE1) edge image
[RSPF] loss amount
setting
Setting Default G Image LEAD_ED Back 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
Item/Display Content
range value loss GE surface lead
FAX A Image LEAD_ED OC lead 0 - 100 30 amount (SPF_SID edge image
send loss GE (OC) edge image (3mm) setting E2) loss amount
amount loss amount SPF setting
setting setting H SIDE2 FRONT_R Back 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
B OC FRONT_R OC side 0 - 100 20 EAR surface side
EAR (OC) image loss (2mm) (SPF_SID image loss
amount E2) amount
setting setting
C TRAIL_ED OC rear 0 - 100 20 I TRAIL_ED Back 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
GE (OC) edge image (2mm) GE(SPF_ surface rear
loss amount SIDE2) edge image
setting loss amount
FAX D Image LEAD_ED Front 0 - 100 20 setting
send loss GE surface lead (2mm)
amount (SPF_SID edge image [DSPF]
setting E1) loss amount Setting Default
SPF setting Item/Display Content
range value
E SIDE1 FRONT_R Front 0 - 100 20
FAX A Image LEAD_ED OC lead 0 - 100 30
EAR surface side (2mm)
send loss GE (OC) edge image (3mm)
(SPF_SID image loss
amount loss amount
E1) amount
setting setting
setting
B OC FRONT_R OC side 0 - 100 20
F TRAIL_ED Front 0 - 100 30 EAR (OC) image loss (2mm)
GE surface rear (3mm) amount
(SPF_SID edge image setting
E1) loss amount
C TRAIL_ED OC rear 0 - 100 20
setting
GE (OC) edge image (2mm)
G Image LEAD_ED Back 0 - 100 20 loss amount
loss GE surface lead (2mm) setting
amount (SPF_SID edge image
D Image LEAD_ED Front 0 - 100 20
setting E2) loss amount
loss GE surface lead (2mm)
SPF setting
amount (SPF_SID edge image
H SIDE2 FRONT_R Back 0 - 100 20 setting E1) loss amount
EAR surface side (2mm) SPF setting
(SPF_SID image loss SIDE1
E FRONT_R Front 0 - 100 20
E2) amount
EAR surface side (2mm)
setting
(SPF_SID image loss
I TRAIL_ED Back 0 - 100 30
E1) amount
GE surface rear (3mm)
setting
(SPF_SID edge image
F TRAIL_ED Front 0 - 100 30
E2) loss amount
GE surface rear (3mm)
setting
(SPF_SID edge image
E1) loss amount
setting
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 88
Setting Default * Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (Man-
Item/Display Content ual adjustments)
range value
FAX G Image LEAD_ED Back 0 - 100 30 1) Select an adjustment item with the menu button.
send loss GE surface lead (2mm)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.
amount (SPF_SID edge image
setting E2) loss amount 3) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
SPF setting 4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
H SIDE2 FRONT_R Back 0 - 100 20 5) Press [OK] key.
EAR surface side (2mm)
(SPF_SID image loss Item/Display Content Content
E2) amount
OC ADJ OC Adjustment Image loss off-center sub
setting
scanning direction image
I TRAIL_ED Back 0 - 100 20 magnification ratio
GE surface rear (3mm) adjustment (Document table
(SPF_SID edge image mode)
E2) loss amount
BK-MAG ADJ BK main scanning BK main scanning direction
setting
direction image image magnification ratio
When A Image LEAD_ED OC lead 0 - 100 0 (0mm) magnification ratio adjustment
image loss GE (OC) edge image adjustment
send amount loss amount
SPF ADJ SPF Adjustment RSPF/DSPF (Top/Back)
mode setting setting
sheet front edge and off-
(Excep B OC FRONT_R OC side 0 - 100 0 (0mm) center sub scanning
t for EAR(OC) image loss direction image
FAX amount magnification ratio
and setting adjustment
copy) C TRAIL_ED OC rear 0 - 100 0 (0mm) SETUP/PRINT ADJ Printing position Print image edge
GE(OC) edge image adjustment adjustment / all tray print
loss amount off-center adjustment
setting (individual tray, ADU)
D Image LEAD_ED Front 0 - 100 0 (0mm) RESULT Display the result Adjustment result is
loss GE surface lead displayed
amount (SPF_SID edge image
DATA Data display Used data for the
setting E1) loss amount
adjustment is displayed.
SPF setting
E SIDE1 FRONT_R Front 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
EAR surface side
(SPF_SID image loss
E1) amount
setting 51
F TRAIL_ED Front 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
GE(SPF_ surface rear
51-1
SIDE1) edge image
loss amount Purpose Adjustment/Setup
setting
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the
When G Image LEAD_ED Back 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
secondary transport voltage.
imag loss GE surface lead
e amount (SPF_SID edge image Section
setting E2) loss amount Operation/Procedure
send
SPF setting
mode 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
H SIDE2 FRONT_R Back 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
(Exce panel.
EAR surface side
pt for (SPF_SID image loss 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
FAX E2) amount 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
and setting
copy) When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF tim-
I TRAIL_ED Back 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
ing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value is
GE(SPF_ surface rear
SIDE2) edge image increased, the timing is delayed.
loss amount When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed
setting by about 10ms. The setting range is -490 - +490ms.
Default
Item/Display Content
value
50-28 A TC2 ON TIMING Secondary transfer voltage ON 55
Purpose Adjustment timing setting
B TC2 OFF TIMING Secondary transfer voltage OFF 47
Function (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image timing setting
loss, void area, image off-center, and image C FRONT EDGE ON Front edge bias ON timing setting 30
magnification ratio. TIMING
Section D BACKEND OFF Rear edge bias OFF timing setting 60
TIMING
Operation/Procedure
E DHV ON TIMING Separation output ON timing setting 30
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with F DHV OFF TIMING Separation output OFF timing setting 80
SIM50-28.
* Print image position, image magnification ratio, void area, off-
center adjustments (Manual adjustments)
* Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual adjustment)
* Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 89
51-2 Default
Mode Display/Item Content
value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup ENGINE D TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec- HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment
tion amount) on paper by the main unit and PAPER(L) value
the SPF registration roller. (This adjustment (Heavy paper A/Large size)
is performed when there is a considerable E TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40
HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
variation in the print image position on the
PAPER(S) value
paper or when paper jams frequently (Heavy paper B/Small size)
occur.) F TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40
Section HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
Operation/Procedure PAPER(L) value
(Heavy paper B/Large size)
1) (When RSPF model) G TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Lower 40
Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment
[ENGINE] keys. PAPER (S) value
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys. (Plain paper/Small size)
H TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Lower 40
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) PAPER (L) value
(Plain paper/Large size)
[RSPF]
I TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40
Default HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment
Mode Display/Item Content
value PAPER(S) value
SIDE1 A NORMAL_P RSPF front surface document 50 (Heavy paper A/Small size)
LAIN_HIGH deflection amount adjustment J TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40
value (Normal/Plain paper/ HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment
HIGH) PAPER(L) value
B NORMAL_P RSPF front surface document 50 (Heavy paper A/Large size)
LAIN_LOW deflection amount adjustment K TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40
value (Normal/Plain paper/ HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
LOW) PAPER(S) value
C NORMAL_T RSPF front surface document 50 (Heavy paper B/Small size)
HIN _HIGH deflection amount adjustment L TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40
value (Normal/Thin paper/ HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
HIGH) PAPER(L) value
D NORMAL_T RSPF front surface document 50 (Heavy paper B/Large size)
HIN _LOW deflection amount adjustment M MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
value (Normal/Thin paper/ PLAIN adjustment value
LOW) PAPER (S) (Plain paper/Small size)
E RANDOM_P RSPF front surface document 50 N MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
LAIN_HIGH deflection amount adjustment PLAIN adjustment value
value (Random/Plain paper/ PAPER (L) (Plain paper/Large size)
HIGH) O MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
F RANDOM_P RSPF front surface document 50 HEAVY A adjustment value
LAIN _LOW deflection amount adjustment PAPER(S) (Heavy paper A/Small size)
value (Random/Plain paper/ P MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
LOW) HEAVY A adjustment value
G RANDOM_T RSPF front surface document 50 PAPER(L) (Heavy paper A/Large size)
HIN_HIGH deflection amount adjustment Q MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
value (Random/Thin paper/ HEAVY B adjustment value
HIGH) PAPER(S) (Heavy paper B/Small size)
H RANDOM_T RSPF front surface document 50 R MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
HIN_LOW deflection amount adjustment HEAVY B adjustment value
value (Random/Thin paper/ PAPER (L) (Heavy paper B/Large size)
LOW) S MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
SIDE2 A NORMAL_P RSPF back surface document 50 OHP adjustment value (OHP)
LAIN_ deflection amount adjustment T MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
HIGH_1 value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/ ENV adjustment value
HIGH) (Envelop)
B NORMAL_P RSPF back surface document 50 U MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 30
LAIN_ deflection amount adjustment LABEL adjustment value
LOW_1 value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/ (Label)
LOW) V ADU PLAIN ADU/deflection adjustment 30
ENGINE A TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40 PAPER (S) value
PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment (Plain paper/Small size)
PAPER (S) value W ADU PLAIN ADU/deflection adjustment 30
(Plain paper/Small size) PAPER (L) value
B TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40 (Plain paper/Large size)
PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment X ADU HEAVY ADU/deflection adjustment 40
PAPER (L) value A PAPER (S) value
(Plain paper/Large size) (Heavy paper A/Small size)
C TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40 Y ADU HEAVY ADU/deflection adjustment 40
HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment A PAPER (L) value
PAPER(S) value (Heavy paper A/Large size)
(Heavy paper A/Small size)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 90
Default Defaul
Mode Display/Item Content Mode Display/Item Content
value t value
ENGIN Z ADU HEAVY ADU/deflection adjustment 40 SIDE2 E RANDOM DSPF back surface document 70
E B PAPER (S) value _PLAIN_ deflection amount adjustment
(Heavy paper B/Small size) HIGH value 2 (Normal/Plain paper/
AA ADU HEAVY ADU/deflection adjustment 40 HIGH)
B PAPER (L) value F RANDOM DSPF back surface document 50
(Heavy paper B/Large size) _PLAIN_L deflection amount adjustment
AB DESK (S) DESK/deflection adjustment 40 OW value 2 (Normal/Plain paper/
value LOW)
(Plain paper/Small size) G RANDOM DSPF back surface document 70
AC DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40 _THIN_HI deflection amount adjustment
HEAVY A value GH value 2 (Normal/Thin paper/
PAPER(S) (Heavy paper A/Small size) HIGH)
AD DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40 H RANDOM DSPF back surface document 50
HEAVY B value _THIN_L deflection amount adjustment
PAPER(S) (Heavy paper B/Small size) OW value 2 (Normal/Thin paper/
AE DESK (L) DESK/deflection adjustment 40 LOW)
value ENGINE A TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40
(Plain paper/Large size) PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment
AF DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40 PAPER value
HEAVY value (S) (Plain paper/Small size)
PAPER (L) (Heavy paper A/Largel size) B TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40
AG DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40 PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment
HEAVY value PAPER value
PAPER (L) (Heavy paper B/Large size) (L) (Plain paper/Large size)
AH LCC(S) LCC/deflection adjustment 40 C TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40
value (Plain paper/Small size) HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment
AI LCC HEAVY LCC/deflection adjustment 40 PAPER(S) value
A PAPER(S) value (Heavy paper /Small (Heavy paper A/Small size)
size) D TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40
HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment
[DSPF] PAPER(L) value
(Heavy paper A/Large size)
Defaul
Mode Display/Item Content E TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40
t value
HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
REGI1 A NORMAL DSPF front surface document 50 PAPER(S) value
_PLAIN_ deflection amount adjustment (Heavy paper B/Small size)
HIGH value (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
F TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40
B NORMAL DSPF front surface document 50 HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
_PLAIN_L deflection amount adjustment PAPER(L) value
OW value (Normal/Plain paper/LOW) (Heavy paper B/Large size)
C NORMAL DSPF front surface document 50 G TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Lower 40
_THIN deflection amount adjustment PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment
_HIGH value (Normal/Thin paper/HIGH) PAPER value
D NORMAL DSPF front surface document 50 (S) (Plain paper/Small size)
_THIN deflection amount adjustment H TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Lower 40
_LOW value (Normal/Thin paper/LOW) PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment
E RANDOM DSPF front surface document 50 PAPER value
_PLAIN_ deflection amount adjustment (L) (Plain paper/Large size)
HIGH value (Random/Plain paper/ I TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40
HIGH) HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment
F RANDOM DSPF front surface document 50 PAPER(S) value
_PLAIN deflection amount adjustment (Heavy paper A/Small size)
_LOW value (Random/Plain paper/LOW) J TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40
G RANDOM DSPF front surface document 50 HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment
_THIN_HI deflection amount adjustment PAPER(L) value
GH value (Random/Thin paper/HIGH) (Heavy paper A/Large size)
H RANDOM DSPF front surface document 50 K TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40
_THIN_L deflection amount adjustment HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
OW value (Random/Thin paper/LOW) PAPER(S) value
REGI2 A NORMAL DSPF back surface document 70 (Heavy paper B/Small size)
_PLAIN_ deflection amount adjustment L TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40
HIGH value 2 (Normal/Plain paper/ HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
HIGH) PAPER(L) value
B NORMAL DSPF back surface document 50 (Heavy paper B/Large size)
_PLAIN_L deflection amount adjustment M MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
OW value 2 (Normal/Plain paper/ PLAIN adjustment value
LOW) PAPER (Plain paper/Small size)
C NORMAL DSPF back surface document 70 (S)
_THIN_HI deflection amount adjustment N MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
GH value 2 (Normal/Thin paper/ PLAIN adjustment value
HIGH) PAPER (Plain paper/Large size)
D NORMAL DSPF back surface document 50 (L)
_THIN_L deflection amount adjustment O MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
OW value 2 (Normal/Thin paper/ HEAVY A adjustment value
LOW) PAPER(S) (Heavy paper A/Small size)
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 91
Defaul (When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is
Mode Display/Item Content changed by 0.1mm.)
t value
ENGINE P MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
HEAVY A adjustment value
PAPER(L) (Heavy paper A/Large size)
Q MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
HEAVY B adjustment value 53
PAPER(S) (Heavy paper B/Small size)
R MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40 53-6
HEAVY B adjustment value
PAPER (Heavy paper B/Large size) Purpose Adjustment
(L) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the
S MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40 SPF document width.
OHP adjustment value (OHP)
Section
T MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
ENV adjustment value (Envelop) Operation/Procedure
U MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 30 1) Open the SPF paper feed guide to the maximum width.
LABEL adjustment value (Label)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
V ADU ADU/deflection adjustment value 30
PLAIN (Plain paper/Small size) The maximum width detection level is recognized.
PAPER 3) Open the SPF paper feed guide to the A4R width.
(S) 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
W ADU ADU/deflection adjustment value 30
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
PLAIN (Plain paper/Large size)
PAPER 5) Open the SPF paper feed guide to the A5R width.
(L) 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
X ADU ADU/deflection adjustment value 40
The A5R width detection level is recognized.
HEAVY A (Heavy paper A/Small size)
PAPER 7) Open the SPF paper feed guide to the minimum width.
(S) 8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Y ADU ADU/deflection adjustment value 40 The minimum width detection level is recognized.
HEAVY A (Heavy paper A/Large size)
PAPER When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
(L) displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally,
Z ADU ADU/deflection adjustment value 40 "COMPLETE" is displayed.
HEAVY B (Heavy paper B/Small size)
PAPER 1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value
(S) 2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value
AA ADU ADU/deflection adjustment value 40 3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
HEAVY B (Heavy paper B/Large size) 4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value
PAPER
(L)
AB DESK (S) DESK/deflection adjustment 40
value (Plain paper/Small size) 53-7
AC DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
HEAVY A value (Heavy paper A/Small size)
PAPER(S) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the SPF document size
AD DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40 width sensor.
HEAVY B value (Heavy paper B/Small size)
Section
PAPER(S)
AE DESK (L) DESK/deflection adjustment 40 Operation/Procedure
value (Plain paper/Large size) 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
AF DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40 panel.
HEAVY value (Heavy paper A/Large size) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
PAPER
(L) 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
AG DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40 [RSPF]
HEAVY value (Heavy paper B/Large size)
PAPER Setting Default
Item/Display
(L) range value
AH LCC(S) LCC/deflection adjustment value 40 A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 84
(Plain paper/Small size) B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 509
AI LCC LCC/deflection adjustment value 40 C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 808
HEAVY A (Heavy paper /Small size) D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 961
PAPER(S)
[DSPF]
Note on “Large size” and “Small size”
Setting Default
Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter Item/Display
range value
than the LT size (216mm). A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 66
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 438
than the LT size (216mm). C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 699
Adjustment value D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 893
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp
amount is decreased.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 92
53-8 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment C SIDEA_ WEA SPF front Low 0 1
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge ref- SCAN_ K surface optimum
erence and the SPF mode document scan POSITI MIDD scan position Medi 1
position. ON_LV LE detection level um
STRO setting High 2
Section NG
Operation/Procedure D OC_DIR WEA OC dirt level Low 0 1
Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key. T_LV K setting
MIDD Medi 1
<AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment>(Auto
LE um
adjustment)
STRO High 2
1) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document NG
table. E SIDEA_ WEA SPF front Low 0 1
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the DIRT_A K surface dirt
adjustment value is saved.) LARM_L MIDD alarm level Medi 1
V LE setting um
Setting Default STRO High 2
Item/Display Content
range value NG
MEASUREMENT Document lead edge 0-255 - F SIDEA_ OFF SPF front OFF 0 1
DISTANCE measurement distance (0.1mm unit) DIRT_S ON surface streak ON 1
RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50 HADING delete shading
reference position _SET setting
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 93
Setting Default 55-2
Item/Display Content
range value
I SIDEB_EXT_SH SPF back side Defa 0 0 Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
ADING_SET expansion ult required.)
shading setting Both 1 Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan-
OFF ner control operation. (SOFT SW)
Both 2
ON
Section
Powe 3 Operation/Procedure
r on
ON/
OFF
after
55-3
JOB Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
Powe 4 required.)
r on
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control-
OFF/
ON
ler operation. (SOFT SW)
after Section
JOB Operation/Procedure
53-10 55-10
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) SPF dirt detection execution. Function (Purpose) Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan
Section only)
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set (digit, color, type) with the scroll key.
[RSPF]
2) Enter the value corresponding to the setting item with 10-key.
Item Content
3) Press [OK] key.
SPF SIDEA SPF front surface dirt detection position (main scan
position 1 to 8)
Setting Default
"-": No dirt, A"*": Dirt Item/Display Content
range value
OC OC surface dirt detection position (main scan position
A 1ST DIGIT First digit (left edge) 1 - 90 1
1 to 8)
B 2ND DIGIT Second digit 32 [blank:
"-": No dirt, "*": Dirt
C 3RD DIGIT Third digit 20H]
D 4TH DIGIT Fourth digit 65 - 90
[DSPF]
[Alphabet:
E 5TH DIGIT Fifth digit
Item Content 41H("A) -
F 6TH DIGIT Sixth digit (right
SPF SIDEA SPF front surface dirt detection position (main scan 5AH("Z")]
edge)
position 1 to 8) 48 - 57
"-": No dirt, A"*": Dirt [Numeral:
SPF SIDEB DSPF back surface dirt detection position (main scan 30H("0") -
position 1 to 8) 39H("9")]
"-": No dirt, A"*": Dirt G COLOR K Color specification 0 0
OC OC surface dirt detection position (main scan position C input 1
1 to 8) M 2
"-": No dirt, "*": Dirt Y 3
R 4
G 5
B 6
H TYPE PATTERN Print Edging 0 1
55 1 com- type
PATTERN posing OR 1
2 method process
55-1 type
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially PATTERN No- 2
required.) 3 delete-
compo-
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine sition type
control operations. (SOFT SW)
Section Input value
Operation/Procedure Print Blank A B C E F G
Input value 32 65 66 67 69 70 71
Print H I J K L M N
Input value 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
Print O P Q R T U V
Input value 79 80 81 82 84 85 86
Print W X Y Z 0 1 2
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 94
Input value 87 88 89 90 48 49 50 When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Print 3 5 6 7 8 9
Input value 51 53 54 55 56 57
56-4
Purpose Data backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the
56 USB flash drive.
Section
56-1 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Backup 1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD- 2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key.
EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Section Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
Operation/Procedure When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
1) Select a target content of data transfer.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
56-5
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB
EEPROM -> HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD flash drive in the TEXT format.
HDD -> EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
56-2 2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
Purpose Data backup 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. Procedure 2) The selected data are imported.
HDD (including user authentication data When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
and address data) to the USB flash drive. displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
(Corresponding to the device cloning and
the storage backup.)
Section 56-6
Operation/Procedure Purpose Operation data check
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
Function (Purpose) Used to import the SIM23-2 data to a USB
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. flash drive in the TEXT format.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. Section
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed Operation/Procedure
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is 1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
(Machine with the DSK installed)
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
3) Enter the password with 10-key. 56-7
4) Press [SET] key.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to import the syslog data to a USB
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. flash drive.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
Section
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
56-3 2) Select SYSLOG EXPORT to be imported.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Purpose Data backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to
the USB flash drive.
56-8
Section
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to import the ICC profile data to a
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
USB flash drive.
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
Section
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 95
2) Select the ICC profile data to be imported.
61-3
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power
56-99 Section
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to import the log data to a USB flash 1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY600],
drive. [COPY1200], [PR600/FAX], [PR1200] on the touch panel.
2) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel.
Section
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
Operation/Procedure
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
When the laser power are increased, the print density is
2) Select the log item data to be imported.
increased and the line width of line images are increased.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
MX-xx60/xx70 series
Item Contents
Mode Item / Display Content Default
SIM56-5 Import SIM56-5 data.
COPY LASER POWER Laser power setting
SIM56-6 Import SIM56-6 data. A 149
600 MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K
SIM00-11 Import SIM00-11 data. LASER POWER Laser power setting
SIM56-4 Import SIM56-4 job log data. B 149
MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C
SIM56-7 Import SIM56-7 system log data. LASER POWER Laser power setting
C 149
SIM56-2 Perform simplified output of SIM56-2. MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M
LASER POWER Laser power setting
D 149
MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y
LASER POWER Laser power setting low
E 117
LOW(K) speed/K
60 F
LASER POWER Laser power setting low
117
LOW(C) speed/C
LASER POWER Laser power setting low
60-1 G 117
LOW(M) speed/M
Purpose Operation test/check H
LASER POWER Laser power setting low
117
LOW(Y) speed/Y
Function (Purpose) Used to check the memory operations
LASER POWER Laser power setting
(read/write). I 149
MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW
Section LASER POWER Laser power setting low
J 117
Operation/Procedure LOW(BW) speed/BW
LASER DUTY Laser duty select
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. K 0
MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K
Start the test. LASER DUTY Laser duty select
L 0
MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C
Result display Description
LASER DUTY Laser duty select
OK Success M 0
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M
NG Fail LASER DUTY Laser duty select
NONE DIMM trouble N 0
MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y
INVALID Execution disable LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
O 0
LOW(K) speed/K
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
P 0
LOW(C) speed/C
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
Q 0
61 LOW(M) speed/M
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
R 0
LOW(Y) speed/Y
61-1 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
S 0
Purpose Operation test/check MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota- T 0
LOW(BW) speed/BW
tion and laser detection.
U LASER POWER K1 Laser power setting K1 100
Section LSU V LASER POWER K2 Laser power setting K2 100
Operation/Procedure LASER POWER Laser power setting C1
W 100
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. C1
LASER POWER Laser power setting C2
When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed. X
C2
100
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed. LASER POWER Laser power setting M1
Y 100
M1
Display Content
LASER POWER Laser power setting M2
LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality Z 100
M2
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K)
AA LASER POWER Y1 Laser power setting Y1 100
LSU TESTRESULT NG: CL Laser light emitting abnormality (C,M,Y)
AB LASER POWER Y2 Laser power setting Y2 100
COPY LASER POWER Laser power setting
A 149
1200 MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW
LASER POWER Laser power setting low
B 117
LOW(BW) speed/BW
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 96
Mode Item / Display Content Default Mode Item / Display Content Default
COPY LASER DUTY Laser duty select LASER POWER Laser power setting low
C 0 F 117
1200 MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW LOW(C) speed/C
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low LASER POWER Laser power setting low
D 0 G 117
LOW(BW) speed/BW LOW(M) speed/M
PRINT LASER POWER Laser power setting LASER POWER Laser power setting low
A 149 H 117
ER MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K LOW(Y) speed/Y
600/ LASER POWER Laser power setting LASER POWER Laser power setting
B 149 I 149
FAX MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW
LASER POWER Laser power setting LASER POWER Laser power setting low
C 149 J 117
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M LOW(BW) speed/BW
LASER POWER Laser power setting LASER DUTY Laser duty select
D 149 K 0
MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K
LASER POWER Laser power setting low LASER DUTY Laser duty select
E 117 L 0
LOW(K) speed/K MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C
PRINT
LASER POWER Laser power setting low LASER DUTY Laser duty select
F 117 ER M 0
LOW(C) speed/C MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M
1200
LASER POWER Laser power setting low LASER DUTY Laser duty select
G 117 N 0
LOW(M) speed/M MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y
LASER POWER Laser power setting low LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
H 117 O 0
LOW(Y) speed/Y LOW(K) speed/K
LASER POWER Laser power setting LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
I 149 P 0
MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW LOW(C) speed/C
LASER POWER Laser power setting low LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
J 117 Q 0
LOW(BW) speed/BW LOW(M) speed/M
LASER DUTY Laser duty select LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
K 0 R 0
MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K LOW(Y) speed/Y
LASER DUTY Laser duty select LASER DUTY Laser duty select
L 0 S 0
MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW
LASER DUTY Laser duty select LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
M 0 T 0
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M LOW(BW) speed/BW
LASER DUTY Laser duty select
N 0 MX-xx50 series
MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low Mode Item / Display Content Default
O 0
LOW(K) speed/K COPY LASER Laser power setting middle
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low 600 A POWER speed/K 100
P 0
LOW(C) speed/C MIDDLE(K)
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low LASER Laser power setting middle
Q 0
LOW(M) speed/M B POWER speed/C 100
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low MIDDLE(C)
R 0
LOW(Y) speed/Y LASER Laser power setting middle
LASER DUTY Laser duty select C POWER speed/M 100
S 0
MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW MIDDLE(M)
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low LASER Laser power setting middle
T 0
LOW(BW) speed/BW D POWER speed/Y 100
LASER DUTY Laser duty select MIDDLE(Y)
U 0
MIDDLE(K 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/K LASER Laser power setting low
LASER DUTY Laser duty select E POWER speed/K 79
V 0
MIDDLE(C 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/C LOW(K)
LASER DUTY Laser duty select LASER Laser power setting low
W 0
MIDDLE(M 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/M F POWER speed/C 79
LASER DUTY Laser duty select LOW(C)
X 0
MIDDLE(Y 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/Y LASER Laser power setting low
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low G POWER speed/M 79
Y 0 LOW(M)
LOW(K 1BIT) speed (1BIT)/K
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low LASER Laser power setting low
Z 0 H POWER speed/Y 79
LOW(C 1BIT) speed (1BIT)/C
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low LOW(Y)
AA 0 LASER Laser power setting middle
LOW(M 1BIT) speed (1BIT)/M
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low I POWER speed/BW 100
AB 0 MIDDLE(BW)
LOW(Y 1BIT) speed (1BIT)/Y
LASER DUTY Laser duty select LASER Laser power setting low
AC MIDDLE(BW 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/ 0 J POWER speed/BW 79
BW LOW(BW)
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle
AD 0 K 0
LOW(BW 1BIT)) speed (1BIT)/BW MIDDLE(K) speed/K
PRINT LASER POWER Laser power setting LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle
A 149 L 0
ER MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K MIDDLE(C) speed/C
1200 LASER POWER Laser power setting LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle
B 149 M 0
MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C MIDDLE(M) speed/M
LASER POWER Laser power setting LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle
C 149 N 0
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M MIDDLE(Y) speed/Y
LASER POWER Laser power setting LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed/
D 149 O 0
MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y LOW(K) K
LASER POWER Laser power setting low LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed/
E 117 P 0
LOW(K) speed/K LOW(C) C
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 97
Mode Item / Display Content Default Mode Item / Display Content Default
COPY LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed/ PRINT LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed
Q 0 AB 0
600 LOW(M) M ER LOW(Y 1BIT) (1BIT)/Y
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed/ 600/ LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle
R 0
LOW(Y) Y FAX AC MIDDLE(BW speed (1BIT)/BW 0
LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle 1BIT)
S 0
MIDDLE(BW) speed/BW LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed/ AD LOW(BW (1BIT)/BW 0
T 0
LOW(BW) BW 1BIT))
PRINT LASER Laser power setting middle
ER A POWER speed/K 100
600/ MIDDLE(K)
FAX LASER Laser power setting middle 61-4
B POWER speed/C 100 Purpose Adjustment
MIDDLE(C)
LASER Laser power setting middle
Function (Purpose) Used to print the print image skew adjust-
C POWER speed/M 100 ment pattern. (LSU unit)
MIDDLE(M) Section
LASER Laser power setting middle
Operation/Procedure
D POWER speed/Y 100
MIDDLE(Y) 1) Select a target item on the touch panel.
LASER Laser power setting low 2) Enter the print conditions setting value with 10-key.
E POWER speed/K 79 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
LOW(K)
The print image skew adjustment pattern is printed.
LASER Laser power setting low
F POWER speed/C 79
Default
LOW(C) Item/Display Content
value
LASER Laser power setting low
A MULTICOUNT Print quantity (1-999) 1
G POWER speed/M 79
LOW(M) B PAPER MFT Tray 1 Manual paper feed 2
CS1 selection 2 Paper feed tray 1 (CS 1)
LASER Laser power setting low
H POWER speed/Y 79 CS2 3 Paper feed tray 2
LOW(Y) CS3 4 Paper feed tray 3
LASER Laser power setting middle CS4 5 Paper feed tray 4
I POWER speed/BW 100 LCC 6 LCC
MIDDLE(BW)
LASER Laser power setting low
J POWER speed/BW 79
LOW(BW) 61-11
LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle
K 0 Purpose Adjustment
MIDDLE(K) speed/K
LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle Function (Purpose) Used to correct the laser power automati-
L 0
MIDDLE(C) speed/C cally.
LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle Section
M 0
MIDDLE(M) speed/M
Operation/Procedure
LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle
N 0 1) Select a target item on the touch panel.
MIDDLE(Y) speed/Y
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed/ 2) Press [AUTO CORRECTION] key.
O 0
LOW(K) K 3) Select a density to be corrected.
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed/
P
LOW(C) C
0 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed/ 5) Check pattern is printed.
Q 0
LOW(M) M 6) Place the printed pattern for scanning on the OC in the
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low speed/ A4R(LTR) direction.
R 0
LOW(Y) Y
LASER DUTY Laser duty select middle
S 0 /DVHUSRZHUDXWRFRUUHFWLRQ02'(0,''/(
MIDDLE(BW) speed/BW 3OHDVHSODFHWKHSULQWHGWHVWSDWFK
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 98
61-12 61-14
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Laser power manual correction Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power at once.
Section LSU Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
Press an item button to be adjusted. This Sim mode allows change of laser power settings easily, and all
at once. However, this change will not change the initial value of
Item / Display Content Outline SIM 61-3 (Laser power settings).
MEASURING Density meter Adjustment with density meter
The laser power set in this Sim mode will be:
INSTRUMENT adjustment
VISUAL Visual check Adjustment by visual check Initial value of Sim 61-3 x Initial value of Sim 61-14 (%)
INSPETION adjustment 1) Press a target item.
DATA Data display Data display during execution of
screen the manual correction Item Setting range Default
K/BW -2 Fine (80%) 0
When [MEASURING INSTRUMENT] is pressed: -1 Slight fine (90%)
1) Select the adjustment density pattern. 0 Normal (100%)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1 Slight thick (110%)
2 Thick (120%)
3) The adjustment pattern is printed out.
C -2 Fine (80%) 0
4) Enter the adjustment value of 5points by the density meter.
-1 Slight fine (90%)
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. 0 Normal (100%)
Execute the manual correction of the laser power. Then the 1 Slight thick (110%)
adjustment result pattern is outputted and the data are dis- 2 Thick (120%)
played. M -2 Fine (80%) 0
6) Press [RETRY] key if adjustment is still required. -1 Slight fine (90%)
0 Normal (100%)
Item/Display Contents Setting range Default 1 Slight thick (110%)
A POSITION(4) Point 4 0 - 300 0 2 Thick (120%)
B POSITION(10) Point 10 0 - 300 0 Y -2 Fine (80%) 0
C POSITION(16) Point 16 0 - 300 0 -1 Slight fine (90%)
D POSITION(22) Point 22 0 - 300 0 0 Normal (100%)
E POSITION(29) Point 29 0 - 300 0 1 Slight thick (110%)
2 Thick (120%)
When [VISUAL INSPECTION] is pressed:
1) Select the adjustment density pattern.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) The adjustment pattern is printed out.
4) Press [5POINT CORRECTION] or [32POINT CORRECTION].
62
5) Enter an adjustment value of 5 points.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. 62-1
Execute the manual correction of the laser power. Then the Purpose Data clear
adjustment result pattern is outputted and the data are dis- Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (HDD:
played. Excluding the Operation manual and the
7) Press [RETRY] key if adjustment is still required. watermark data)
8) Press [DATA] key, display manual adjustment result. Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
61-13 2) Press [YES] key.
Purpose Adjustment Used to execute the HDD format.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the laser power correction When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
value. normal display.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 62-2
2) Press [YES] key. Purpose Operation test/check
3) Laser power auto correction value (K-Y) 32 points and laser Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
power manual correction value (K-Y) 32 points are return back (partial).
to the default value. Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
MX-4070N SIMULATION 6 – 99
62-3 62-10
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk Function (Purpose) Used to clear the job completion list data.
(all areas). Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [YES] key.
2) Press [YES] key. Used to delete the job log data.
Read/write operations are performed. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
62-6
Purpose Operation test/check 62-11
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the Purpose Data clear
hard disk. Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select the self diagnosis area. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [YES] key.
The self diagnosis operation is performed. Used to delete the document filing data.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
SHORT S.T Partial area diagnosis
normal display.
EXTENDED S.T All area diagnosis
Default
63-7 Item/Display Content
value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup TARGET DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment DEF 1
TBL target in the automatic color balance
Function (Purpose) Used to register the service target of the
operation is slightly shifted to Magenta.
copy mode auto color balance adjustment. When this target is selected, the color
Section balance is converted into natural gray
color balance by the color table in an
Operation/Procedure
actual copy mode and print is made.
1) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel. DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment
2) Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with target in the automatic color balance
SIM46-21 on the document table. operation is slightly shifted to natural gray
color balance. When this target is
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
selected, the color balance is slightly
The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned. shifted to Cyan by the color table in an
4) Press [OK] key. actual copy mode and print is made.
The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment
target in the automatic color balance
adjustment is registered according to the patch image of the
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When
scanned adjustment pattern sheet.
this target is selected, the color balance is
The registered color balance and the density are displayed. converted into the color balance with
Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key. enhanced Cyan by the color table in an
actual copy mode and print is made.
MX-xx60/xx70 series
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1 - 58 (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 1
(1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 22, 29) (* For details, refer to the description below.) 22, 29)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-255 1
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of blank dot number (N parameter) 0-255 254
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2, 11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE NONE Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 17 - 19) TEXT/PRINTED specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 17-19: 2-8 2
PHOTO except above:1-8)
TEXT/PHOTO Text/ Photograph 3
TEXT Text 4
PHOTO Photograph 5
PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1
NO selection No 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-6 1 1
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 5
GLOSSY Glossy paper 6
HEAVY3 Heavy paper 3 7
HEAVY4 Heavy paper 4 8
MX-xx50 series
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1 - 58 (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 1
(1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 22) (* For details, refer to the description below.) 22)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-255 1
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of blank dot number (N parameter) 0-255 254
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2, 11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE NONE Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 17 - 19) TEXT/PRINTED specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 17-19: 2-8 2
PHOTO except above:1-8)
TEXT/PHOTO Text/ Photograph 3
TEXT Text 4
PHOTO Photograph 5
PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
64-2
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.
64-4
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) The test print (self print) is performed.
MX-xx60/xx70 series
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-6 6
(* For details, refer to the description below.)
B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
MX-xx50 series
MX-xx50 series
64-6
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
Select a print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.
MX-xx60/xx70 series
MX-xx50 series
65-5
65
Purpose Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key
65-1
input.
Purpose Adjustment
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis-
Operation/Procedure
play section) detection coordinates.
Press [HOME] key.
Section Operation panel section
If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key
Operation/Procedure is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the is displayed.
screen. <Check target key>
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to
the simulation sub number entry menu. 10 Inch LCD model
In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu. HOME
66
66-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2
- 150) on the LCD to allow changing the
soft SW while checking with the LCD.
Section FAX
65-2 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Operation check/test 1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD dis- * When [C] key is pressed, the entered value of [SW NO] is
play section) detection coordinates. cleared.
Section 2) Press [DATA] button.
Operation/Procedure The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
Touch the touch panel. * When [SW NO] button is pressed, the display returns to the
initial screen.
The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of
the touched position is displayed in real time. 3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
10-key.
* [1] -> [0]
[0] -> [1]
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
setting is saved.
After saving the setting, [EXECUTE] button returns to the nor-
mal display.
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-02, the following
screen is displayed. 66-3
* When [DEST CODE] button is pressed, the display is shifted Purpose Operation test/Check
to the country code list screen.
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the EEPROM
* The currently set country code is displayed in the column of and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller
"PRESENT:". and display the result.
2) Enter the country code (8 digits) with 10-key([0]/[1]). The
Section FAX
entered country code is displayed in the column of "NEW:" and
[SET] key becomes active. Operation/Procedure
* When [CLEAR] key is pressed, the column of “NEW:” is 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-03, the following
screen is displayed.
cleared.
* Select the page of memory check item with the scroll key.
3) When [SET] button is pressed after entering the country code,
[EXECUTE] button becomes active. The country code is dis- 2) When the memory check item button is selected, the display is
played in the column of "PRESENT:", and the column of shifted to the memory check screen.
"NEW:" is cleared. 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and memory check of the selected item is started.
[YES] and [NO] buttons become active. The country name is 4) After completion of memory check, [EXECUTE] button returns
displayed on the tile line. to the normal display and the result of memory check is dis-
5) When [YES] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the soft SW played.
corresponding to the country code is initialized. Memory check status
6) After completion of initialization of the soft SW, [EXECUTE],
NO CHECK No check
[YES], and [NO] buttons become inactive.
CHECKING During checking
Operation/Procedure (Shifting to the country page) OK Check complete OK
* When [DEST CODE] button is pressed on the initial screen, the NG A## Check complete NG Error occurring address or data
display is shifted to the country code list screen. line is displayed for each item.
Use scroll keys to select the country select page.
Check item
<Country code list>
Check memory item Remark
JAPAN 00000000 1 All Memory Device Check (once) All the items are checked
U.S.A. 10110101 once.
AUSTRALIA 00001001 2 MODEM EEPROM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE1
U.K. 10110100 3 MODEM EEPROM <1> (repeat) Repeat check in LINE1
FRANCE 00111101 4 MODEM SDRAM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE1
GERMANY 00000100 5 MODEM SDRAM<1>(repeat) Repeat check in LINE1
SWEDEN 10100101 6 MODEM EEPROM <2> (once) Check only once in LINE 2
NEWZEALAND 01111110 7 MODEM EEPROM <2> (repeat) Repeat check in LINE2
CHINA 00100110 8 MODEM SDRAM <2> (once) Check only once in LINE 2
SINGAPORE 10011100 9 MODEM SDRAM<2>(repeat) Repeat check in LINE2
TW 11111110 10 MODEM EEPROM <3> (once) Check only once in LINE3
MIDDLEANDNEAREAST 11111101 11 MODEM EEPROM <3> (repeat) Repeat check in LINE3
SLOVAKIA 11111100 12 MODEM SDRAM <3> (once) Check only once in LINE3
OTHER3 11111011 13 MODEM SDRAM<3>(repeat) Repeat check in LINE3
FINLAND 00111100
NORWAY 10000010 The number in < > indicates the line.
DENMARK 00110001
NETHERLANDS 01111011
ITALY 01011001 66-4
SWITZERLAND 10100110
Purpose Operation test/Check
AUSTRIA 00001010
INDONESIA 01010100 Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signals to the
THAILAND 10101001 line and the main unit speaker. (Send level:
MALAYSIA 01101100 max.)
INDIA 01010011 Section FAX
PHILIPPINES 10001001 Operation/Procedure
HONGKONG 01010000
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-04, the screen on the
RUSSIA 10111000
right is displayed. (Default, left upper selected.)
SOUTHAFRICA 10011111
SPAIN 10100000
* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page.
PORTUGUESE 10001011 2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high-
LUXEMBURG 01101001 lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal
BELGIUM 00001111 display.
CZECH 00101110
66-12
Purpose Operation test/Check 66-15
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps Purpose Adjustment
to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS)
Soft SW setting) send test and to adjust the make time.
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps, Section FAX
refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal
Operation/Procedure
table.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-15, the adjustment
Section FAX
item screen is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-12, the item selection dial pulse is sent from the line in the set make time.
screen is displayed.
* The dial pulse in this example is up to 20 digits registered
2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is with SIM66-13.
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal 3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button again. The but-
display.
ton returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a
sound message is sent.
4) To end signal send: 66-16
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
Purpose Adjustment
nal send is interrupted.
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the DTFM signal send test
and to adjust the send level.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-16, the item selection
screen is displayed.
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
dial pulse signal is sent from the line by the setting of high/low
group of the signal send level.
66-18
Purpose Operation test/Check 66-29
Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line Purpose Clear
and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW set- Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the telephone book data
ting) (the one-touch registration table, the FTP/
Section FAX Desktop expansion table, the group expan-
Operation/Procedure sion table, the program registration table,
the interface memory box table, the meta
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-18, the number selec-
data, InboundRouting, and the Documen-
tion screen is displayed.
tAdmin table).
2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and
Section FAX
the previously set button returns to the normal display.
Operation/Procedure
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
nals are sent. 1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
4) To stop signal sending: 2) Press [YES] button.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normal The telephone book data area cleared.
display and signal sending is interrupted. 3) After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] button returns
to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
66-21
Purpose Check 66-30
Function (Purpose) Used to print the selected items (system Purpose Operation test/Check
error, protocol monitor). Function (Purpose) Used to display the TEL/LIU status change,
Section FAX The display is highlighted by status change.
Operation/Procedure Section FAX
1) When an item button to be printed is selected, it is highlighted Operation/Procedure
and the previously set button returns to the normal display. 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-30, the item selection
2) Press [EXECUTE] button. screen is displayed.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and printing is started. 2) RGDT, RHS, EXHS and SiDAA are highlighted when the sig-
nal is detected, and displayed normally when the signal is not
3) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display. detected.
<TEL/LIU status change item description>
<FAX information print content table>
RGDT Telephone line voltage
PROTOCOL LINE 1 SYSTEM ERROR LINE 1
RHS Handset hook SW
PROTOCOL LINE 2 SYSTEM ERROR LINE 2
EXHS External telephone hook SW
PROTOCOL LINE 3 SYSTEM ERROR LINE 3
SiDAA Polarity inversion signal
MX-xx50 series
Display Content Button
HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper CMYK
SCREEN1 600dpi 1bit Photo
SCREEN2 600dpi 1 bit Graphics
SCREEN3 600dpi 4 bit Photo
SCREEN4 600dpi 4 bit Graphics
SCREEN7 B/W 600dpi 1bit Photo K
SCREEN8 B/W 600dpi 4bit Photo
SCREEN11 B/W 600dpi 1bit Graphics
SCREEN12 B/W 600dpi 4bit Graphics
SCREEN14 DotScreen1 CMYK
SCREEN15 DotScreen2
SCREEN16 DotScreen1_BW K
SCREEN18 SHIGH CMYK
67-34
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction in the
printer high density section. (Support for
the high density section tone gap)
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 Enable
1 Disable
Item/Display Content
Setting Default 67-52
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
A C1 Mode1 : Threshold of Saturation 0 - 255 5
B V1 Mode1 : Threshold of Brightness 0 - 255 0 Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the gamma of the
C C2 Mode2 : Threshold of Saturation 0 - 255 5 printer screen.
D V2 Mode2 : Threshold of Brightness 0 - 255 0 Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target default setting mode with the touch panel.
67-42 Press [ALL] key to select all the modes.
Purpose Adjustment 2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gradation by increasing / When the printer screen gamma was changed by SIM 67-33,
decreasing the selected color component SIM67-54, it is reset to the default.
amount or the black color component MX-xx60/xx70 series
amount in the black and white mode.
Item/Display Content
Section Printer Screen HEAVYPAPER Heavy paper screen
Operation/Procedure Printer heavy paper automatic density
1) Select Mode1 or Mode2. correction amount
1200DPI_1BIT SCREEN5 (1200dpi 1bit Photo)
2) Select an item to be set.
SCREEN6 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics)
600DPI_1BIT SCREEN1 (600dpi 1bit Photo)
SCREEN2 (600dpi 1bit Graphics)
B/W SCREEN7 (600dpi 1bit Graphics)
SCREEN8 (600dpi 4bit Graphics)
SCREEN9 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics)
SCREEN11(600dpi 1bit Graphics)
SCREEN12 (600dpi 4bit Graphics)
Warning
࠙࣬ A consumable No
OP
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime
Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬऔ the cause. કΩȜΜ۟¦༞ݯ
the consumable part.
ਘၑ
Repair
Reset
໘ܦ
Standby
ఞેܥఠ state
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6, F3 trouble check When the power is turned on,
Trouble check is preformed in each block, check is made in each block.
and the result is sent to the MFP. Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP
U2 Saved in each block
U6 Saved in the PCU
F3 Saved in the PCU
The process has priority when the power is turned ON with the When booting, two or more troubles in the list below may be
MFP. detected. In this case, the trouble code of higher priority is dis-
played.
A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error A0-18 Conflict firmware version ASIC-MAIN
C4-20 1st transfer High-voltage output trou- C4-30 2nd transfer High-voltage output trou-
ble ble (open)
E7-21 LSU laser detection error (C) E7-26 LSU LD driver error (M)
E7-22 LSU laser detection error (M) E7-27 LSU LD driver error (Y)
E7-23 LSU laser detection error (Y) E7-28 LSU - PCU connection error
E7-93 Decode error (Usual processing) E7-A1 LSU EEP ROM/LD-driver read/write
error (C)
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Cause Compression dater abnormality.
Image compression/transmission data corruption. Trouble detection PCU
SCN-MFP PWB trouble Cause EEPROM/LD-driver trouble.
DRAM memory trouble or contact error EEPROM/LD-driver access circuit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of Check & Remedy Check connection between PCU PWB and LSU
the memory. PWB.
(FAX Job case) Check the LSU PWB and replace the PCU PWB.
Check the FAX PWB. Replace the LSU.
(Other case)
Check connection SCN-MFP PWB and HDD
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB. E7-A2 LSU EEP ROM/LD-driver read/write
error (M)
E7-94 Decode error (additional processing)
Trouble detection PCU
Cause EEPROM/LD-driver trouble.
Trouble detection SCN-MFP EEPROM/LD-driver access circuit trouble.
Cause Compression dater abnormality. Check & Remedy Check connection between PCU PWB and LSU
Image compression/transmission data corruption. PWB.
SCN-MFP PWB trouble Check the LSU PWB and replace the PCU PWB.
DRAM memory trouble or contact error Replace the LSU.
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
the memory.
(FAX Job case) check the FAX PWB.
(Other case) check connection SCN-MFP PWB and
HDD
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
F1-20 Rear alignment motor trouble F1-28 Flap motor trouble (1K FIN)
F1-47 Paddle trouble (Saddle section) (3K F1-50 Main unit - Finisher combination error
FIN)
Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection PCU Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit
Cause Motor lock. model is installed.
Control PWB trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Disconnection of harness. Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher.
Connector connection trouble. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
paper exit motor. F1-51 Communication trouble between the
Check the harness and the connector connection
from the control PWB to the motor and the sensor.
master and the sub software at fin-
Replace the saddle control PWB. isher (3K FIN)
Replace the saddle paper exit motor.
Replace the saddle paddle home position sensor.
Trouble detection PCU
Replace the harness from the control PWB to the
motor and the sensor. Cause Control PWB trouble.
Firmware of the finisher is not the latest version.
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware of the finisher.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
F1-53 Unsupported after-process unit main F1-89 Shift motor trouble (1K FIN)
unit trouble
Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection PCU Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Shift motor trouble
Cause Firmware of the finisher is not the latest version.
Home position sensor trouble
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware of the finisher.
Finisher control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the shift motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
F1-54 Unset finisher punch unit destination position sensor.
trouble (INF) Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the shift motor.
Replace the home position sensor.
Trouble detection PCU
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Cause Incorrect destination setting of the punch unit.
Check & Remedy Set the correct destination setting for the punch unit
in the service mode.
F2-22 Discharge lamp trouble (K)
Trouble detection PCU F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble
Cause Ejecting sensor trouble.
Harness connection trouble.
Trouble detection PCU
Toner motor trouble.
Cause LUD1 sensor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Paper feed tray 1 lift up motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM10-03 to check the operation of the eject
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
arm.
at the PCU PWB and lift up unit and paper feed unit.
Check the harness connection at the eject sensor.
Replace the eject sensor. Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
Check the harness connection at the toner motor. of LUD1.
Replace the toner motor. Replace the lift-up unit.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Section FAX
F6-01 FAX PWB EEPROM read/write error Case 1 Cause Program writing trouble to the 1-chip microprocessor,
or no program data written.
Check Use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor
Section FAX
and program.
Case 1 Cause FAX PWB EEPROM trouble
Remedy
Check Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of
Case 2 Cause FAX 1-chip microprocessor circuit trouble.
and PIC.
Check Replace the FAX PWB and
Remedy Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to insure that
and Use SIM66-42 to rewrite the program.
EEPROM can be accessed.
Remedy
Case 2 Cause FAX PWB PIC access circuit trouble
Check Replace the FAX PWB.
and
Remedy
F6-97 Incompatibility between FAX PWB and
the main machine
F6-02 FAX power supply trouble Section FAX
Case 1 Cause The FAX PWB installed is improper.
Trouble detection PCU FAX PWB trouble.
Cause DC power supply trouble at the main machine. Check and Install a proper FAX PWB.
SCN-MFP PWB trouble (Fuse break trouble). Remedy Replace the FAX PWB.
24 volt detection circuit Trouble at FAX PWB.
Harness trouble between the FAN PWB and SCN-
MFP PWB. F6-98 Incompatibility between the FAX PWB
Check & Remedy Check the 24 volt supply circuit between the machine destination and the main machine
and the FAX PWB.
Replace the DC power supply unit at the machine. destination
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
Replace the FAX PWB. Section FAX
REplace the harness between the machine and the
Case 1 Cause Incompatibility between the destination information
FAX PWB.
written into the FAX PWB PCI and that in the main
machine (set with SIM26-6)
Check Check the destination of the FAX control PWB.
and Check the destination of the main machine (SIM26-
Remedy 06)
L4-06 Transfer unit lift trouble L4-16 Fusing pressure release trouble
L8-20 Communication error of power con- U2-11 SCN-MFP PWB EEPROM counter
troller PWB check
sum error
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Cause SCN-MFP PWB trouble. Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Check & Remedy Check the ground of the main unit. Cause SCN-MFP PWB EEPROM trouble
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB. EEPROM socket contact trouble
SCN-MFP PWB trouble
Strong external noises.
PC-- Personal counter not detected Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The previous writing
data (about the latest 8 sheets) are written into the
Trouble detection SCN-MFP EEPROM.)
1
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
Cause The personal counter is not installed.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
The personal counter is not detected.
replacing the SCN-MFP PWB in the Service Manual,
SCN-MFP PWB trouble.
and perform the works.)
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
U2-42 Machine adjustment data lost error U2-81 SCN-MFP PWB EEPROM check sum
error
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Cause The system data partition of mSATA SSD and the Trouble detection SCN-MFP
versatile partition for the backup HDD are broken.
Cause EEPROM trouble
Check & Remedy Backup the data by following the procedure for the SCN-MFP PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
mSATA SSD and the HDD breakage and format the
Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is attached correctly.
HDD by SIM62.
Take notes of the counter data and the adjustment
Or, replace the HDD and perform SIM16.
values to prevent from deleting the data. (When the
Perform the mechanical adjustment because the
printer option is attached, take notes of the
mechanical adjustment values are formatted.
adjustment values by SIM22-01.)
Replace the PCU PWB.
Release this error with SIM16.
U2-50 HDD user authentication data check
sum error
U2-90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Cause HDD trouble Trouble detection PCU
SCN-MFP PWB trouble Cause EEPROM trouble
Strong external noises. Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
Check & Remedy Check the data related to the check sum error PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
(address book, image send system registration data Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is attached correctly.
(senders record, meta data)) and register again. Check that the 256kBit EEPROM is attached.
Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble. Take notes of the counter data and the adjustment
Replace the HDD. values to prevent from deleting the data. (When the
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB. printer option is attached, take notes of the
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after adjustment values by SIM22-01.)
replacing the HDD and the SCN-MFP PWB in the Replace the PCU PWB.
Service Manual, and perform the works.) Release this error with SIM16.
U2-60 Watermark check error U2-91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
U6-02 Desk tray 2 lift motor trouble U6-22 LCC 24V power trouble
LED status
Process operation content Countermeasure at error
(Lighting)
●●●● Normal status
○○○●--●○○○ Error SCN-MFP PWB trouble. Replace SCN-MFP PWB.
LED status
Process operation content Countermeasure at error
(Lighting)
●●●● Normal status
other status Error Replace mSATA SSD. IF still error. --> Replace SCN-MFP PWB.
SCN-MFP PWB
1. Outline
A. Cases where update is required C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware
ROM update is required in the following cases: There are following methods of update of the firmware.
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. 1) Update method using SIM 49-1
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the machine. 2) Update method using FTP
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for repair 3) Update method using the Web page
to the machine. 4) Update method using the CN update function (There are three
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be methods.)
repaired. Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.
B. Notes for update When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as power-
off during updating, etc., and when retries of these methods are
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update failed, the method 4) is employed.
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’s Firmware types
installed in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinations of
The firmware type can be displayed by SIM22-5.
each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.
Use SIM22-5 to check the firmware type.
2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or USB
memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Firmware.sfu Adapter
USB Host
Firmware.sfu +
*1:
• Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand.
• The media used for the update must have an enouch capacity for storing the firmware data.
• The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.
Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2 Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52 10.36.101.53
USB port
Version Check
Conf : 00050000
=/'07?
=&190? =1-? Display when booting is completed
Firm Update
From USB Memory
Display of the firmware update mode
Firm Update
> F xxxxxxxx.sfu
Display of file selection
Firm Update
Reading Data
Display of file reading
A. Maintenance counter
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Maintenance required: TA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Total) When SIM21-1 set value is Enable
reached
1 (Print stop) When 90% of SIM21-1 set value
is reached
□Maintenance required: TA 1 (Print stop) When SIM21-1 set value is Disable
reached
Maintenance required: CA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Color) When SIM21-1 set value is Enable
reached
1 (Print stop) When 90% of SIM21-1 set value
is reached
□Maintenance required: CA 1 (Print stop) When SIM21-1 set value is Disable
reached
Maintenance required: AA 0 (Print continue) Both of Total and Color When SIM21-1 set value is Enable
reached
1 (Print stop) When 90% of SIM21-1 set value
is reached
□Maintenance required: AA 1 (Print stop) When SIM21-1 set value is Disable
reached
* After execution of maintenance, be sure to execute SIM24-4 to clear the maintenance counter (Total) and the maintenance counter (Color).
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the primary transfer unit print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter
and the use day counter.
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the secondary transfer print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter and
the use day counter.
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 1
D. PTC unit
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Maintenance required: TK3 0 (Print continue) PTC unit print counter 30 ppm machine: Enable
When 250K is reached
1 (Print stop) 35/40 ppm machine:
When 300K is reached
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the PTC unit print counter, accumulated number of rotations counter and the use day
counter.
E. Fusing unit
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Maintenance required: FK1 0 (Print continue) Fusing belt print counter 30 ppm machine: Enable
1 (Print stop) When 250K is reached
Maintenance required: FK2 0 (Print continue) Pressure roller print counter 35/40 ppm machine: Enable
1 (Print stop) When 300K is reached
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the fusing roller counter, fusing belt counter, the accumulated rotation number counter
and the use day counter.
F. OPC drum
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Maintenance required: DK 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter (K) 30/35 ppm machine: Enable
OPC drum accumulated rotation When 230K is reached or When
1 (Print stop) number counter (K) 1350K rotation is reached
40 ppm machine:
When 285K is reached or
When 1350K rotation is reached
Maintenance required: D (C/M/Y) 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter (C/M/Y) 30/35 ppm machine: Enable
OPC drum accumulated rotation When 170K is reached or When
1 (Print stop) number counter (C/M/Y) 1350 rotation is reached
40 ppm machine:
When 230K is reached or
When 1350K rotation is reached
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear OPC drum print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter and the use
day counter.
G. Developer
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Maintenance required: VK 0 (Print continue) Developer print counter (K) 30/35 ppm machine: Enable
DV unit accumulated number of When 460K is reached or When
1 (Print stop) rotations (K) 2700K rotation is reached
40 ppm machine:
When 570K is reached or
When 2700K rotation is reached
Maintenance required: V (C/M/Y) 0 (Print continue) Developer print counter (C/M/Y) 30/35 ppm machine: Enable
DV unit accumulated number of When 340K is reached or When
1 (Print stop) rotations (C/M/Y) 2700K rotation is reached
40 ppm machine:
When 460K is reached
When 2700K rotation is reached
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the developer print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter and the use
day counter.
* When the waste toner box is replaced with an empty one, the message disappears
I. Toner
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
(K/C/M/Y) Prepare a toner No relation Toner motor rotation time Specified time of rotations Enable
(Near near end)
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 2
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Toner supply is low (K/C/M/Y) No relation Toner supply amount is decreasing ATC sensor output variation Enable
(Near end)
Replace the toner cartridge (K) 0 (Print continue) The pixel count from near end Specified pixel count Disable
(End) 1 (Print stop) reaches the specified value
Replace the toner cartridge (C/M/Y) 0 (Print continue) The pixel count from near end Specified pixel count Enable for
(End) 1 (Print stop) reaches the specified value monochrome Disable
for color
3. Maintenance list
30 ppm machine
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
Section/ Work
When 1000
Unit work Name Unit name seque Part name 250K 300K 500K 600K 750K 900K Remarks
calling K
sequence nce
1 Document feed DSPF unit 1 Paper pickup roller Replace at 100K of the
section 2 Paper feed roller SPF paper feed counter
3 Separation roller or 1 year of use
4 Torque limiter x x x x x Replace at 800K of the
SPF paper feed counter
5 Transport roller 1
6 Transport roller 2
7 Registration roller
8 Transport roller 3
9 Transport roller 4
10 Paper exit roller
11 Discharge brush x x x x x
12 Sensors x x x x x
13 No.1 scanning plate
14 No.2 scanning section,
scanning glass
15 No.2 scanning section,
white reference glass
16 Mirror
17 Lens, CCD
18 Lamp, Reflector Blow air to clean LED
section
19 OC mat
20 Gears x x x x x
21 Belts x x x x x
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 3
Section/ Work
When 1000
Unit work Name Unit name seque Part name 250K 300K 500K 600K 750K 900K Remarks
calling K
sequence nce
1 Document feed RSPF unit 1 Paper pickup roller Replace at 100K of the
section 2 Paper feed roller SPF paper feed counter
3 Separation roller or 1 year of use. When
replacing the paper feed
roller, apply grease
(UKOG-0013QSZZ) to
the paper feed shaft
4 Torque limiter SPF x x x x x Replace at 400K of the
5 Torque limiter pickup x x x x x SPF paper feed counter
or 2 year of use
6 Discharge brush x x x x x
7 Registration roller
8 Transport roller 1
9 Transport roller 2
10 Paper exit roller
11 Sensors x x x x x
12 Scan plate
13 Gears x x x x x
14 Belts x x x x x
15 OC mat
2 Scanner Scanner 1 Drive belt x x x x x
section unit 2 Drive wire x x x x x
3 Sensors x x x x x
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Apply grease (UKOG-
0158FCZZ)
5 Mirror
6 Reflector
7 Lamp
8 Lens
9 CCD
10 Table glass
11 SPF glass
5 Transfer Primary 1 Separation pawl - x x x x Replace as needed
section transfer unit 2 Primary transfer belt - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
3 Primary transfer belt - x x x x Replace as needed
drive gear
4 Primary transfer belt - Clean with alcohol
drive roller
5 Primary transfer belt - Clean with alcohol
follower roller
6 Primary transfer blade - Clean with alcohol
backup roller
7 BK auxiliary roller - Clean with alcohol
8 Y auxiliary roller - Clean with alcohol
9 Pre-transfer roller - Clean with alcohol
10 Primary transfer roller - x x x x Replace as needed
11 Resist face stay cushion - x x x x Replace as needed
12 Primary transfer blade - x x x x Replace as needed
backup roller sheet
13 Primary transfer toner - x x x x Replace as needed
reception sheet F/R
14 Cleaning roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at same time
15 Primary transfer cleaner - x x x x Replace as needed
sub blade
16 Transfer cleaner seals F/ - x x x x Replace as needed
R
17 Primary transfer cleaner - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
blade
Secondary 1 Secondary transfer roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
transfer unit 2 Secondary transfer - x x x x Replace as needed
separation plate
3 Paper guide
4 Sensors x x x x x
Other 1 PTC unit - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Image registration /
Density sensor unit
6 LSU section LSU 1 Dust-proof glass
Other 2 Cleaning base x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 4
1 : ‘16/Feb.
Section/ Work
When 1000
Unit work Name Unit name seque Part name 250K 300K 500K 600K 750K 900K Remarks
calling K
sequence nce
7 Manual paper Manual 1 Paper pickup roller x Replace at 100K of
feed section paper feed 2 Paper feed roller x manual paper feed
unit 3 Separation roller x counter or 1 year of use
4 Torque limiter x x x x x
5 Transport roller 10 x
6 Sensors x x x x x
8 Tray paper Tray paper 1 Paper pickup roller x Replace at 200K of each
feed section feed unit 2 Paper feed roller x paper feed counter or 1
3 Separation roller x year of use
4 Torque limiter x x x x x
5 Transport roller 3 x
6 Transport roller 1 x
7 Transport roller 2 x
8 Sensors x x x x x
9 Paper PS unit 1 Registration roller (idle) x
registration 2 Registration roller (drive) x
section/Paper 3 Transport roller 5 x
exit section/ 4 Sensors x x x x x
ADU section
Right door 5 Transport roller 9 x
unit 6 Transport roller 10 x
7 Transport roller 8 x
1 8
9
10 Sensors x x x x x
Fusing rear 11 Transport roller 7 x
unit
Paper exit 12 Paper exit roller 2 x
unit 13 Discharge brush x x x x x
14 Sensors x x x x x
Other 15 Paper dust removing
unit
— Paper guides
10 Drive section Main drive 1 Gears (grease) - x x x x Apply grease
unit (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
2 Shafts (grease) - x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
3 Shaft earth section - x x x x Apply grease
(conductive grease) (UKOG-0012QSZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
4 Belts - x x x x
5 Sensors x x x x x
Transport 6 Gears (grease) - x x x x Apply grease
drive unit (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
7 Gears (grease) - x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0299FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
8 Shafts (grease) - x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
9 Belts - x x x x
10 Connection arm - x x x x
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 5
Section/ Work
When 1000
Unit work Name Unit name seque Part name 250K 300K 500K 600K 750K 900K Remarks
calling K
sequence nce
10 Drive section Fusing 11 Gears (grease) - x x x x Apply grease
drive unit (UKOG-0299FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
12 Gears (grease) - x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
13 Shafts (grease) - x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
14 Belts - x x x x
Paper exit 15 Belts - x x x x
drive unit
11 Fusing section Fusing unit 1 Fusing transport roller x
lower
2 Fusing transport roller x
upper
3 Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
4 Separation plate x x x x x
5 Pressure roller gear x x x x x Replace as needed
6 Pressure roller bearing x x x x x Replace as needed
7 Pressure roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease
(UKOG-0235FCZZ) to
the shaft section when
replacing and after
completion of
replacement, clean the
new pressure roller
surface with alcohol
8 Upper thermistor x x x x x Replace as needed
9 Fusing belt unit x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
10 Lower thermistor x x x x x Replace as needed
11 Main thermistor x x x x x
12 Sub thermistor x x x x x Replace as needed
13 Sensors x x x x x
14 Paper guides
12 Other Other 1 Ozone filter x ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Right cover filter x
3 Front cover cushion x x x x x x x x Do not give damage to
the cushion when
cleaning the front cover
4 Toner cartridge K Replaced by the user when replacing message is
5 Toner cartridge C displayed
6 Toner cartridge M
7 Toner cartridge Y
8 Waste toner box Replaced by the user every full detection Replace at 50K
35 ppm machine
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 6
Section/ every every
Work When
Unit work Name Unit name Part name 1350K 2700K Remarks
sequence calling
sequence rotation rotation
4 OPC drum section OPC drum unit 1 Charger unit x ▲ ▲ Maximum Printable number: 230K
(Monochrome) 2 Drum x ▲ ▲
3 Cleaning blade x ▲ ▲
4 Toner reception sheet x x x Replace as needed
5 Side seal F/R x x x
6 Charger cleaner x ▲ ▲
OPC drum unit 1 Charger unit x ▲ ▲ Maximum Printable number: 170K
(Color) 2 Drum x ▲ ▲
3 Cleaning blade x ▲ ▲
4 Toner reception sheet x x x Replace as needed
5 Side seal F/R x x x
6 Charger cleaner x ▲ ▲
Section/ Work
When
Unit work Name Unit name seque Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
calling
sequence nce
1 Document feed DSPF unit 1 Paper pickup roller Replace at 100K of the
section 2 Paper feed roller SPF paper feed counter
3 Separation roller or 1 year of use
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x Replace at 800K of the
SPF paper feed counter
5 Transport roller 1
6 Transport roller 2
7 Registration roller
8 Transport roller 3
9 Transport roller 4
10 Paper exit roller
11 Discharge brush x x x x x x
12 Sensors x x x x x x
13 No.1 scanning plate
14 No.2 scanning section,
scanning glass
15 No.2 scanning section,
white reference glass
16 Mirror
17 Lens, CCD
18 Lamp, Reflector Blow air to clean LED
section
19 OC mat
20 Gears x x x x x x
21 Belts x x x x x x
RSPF unit 1 Paper pickup roller Replace at 100K of the
2 Paper feed roller SPF paper feed counter
3 Separation roller or 1 year of use. When
replacing the paper feed
roller, apply grease
(UKOG-0013QSZZ) to
the paper feed shaft
4 Torque limiter SPF x x x x x x Replace at 400K of the
5 Torque limiter pickup x x x x x x SPF paper feed counter
or 2 year of use
6 Discharge brush x x x x x x
7 Registration roller
8 Transport roller 1
9 Transport roller 2
10 Paper exit roller
11 Sensors x x x x x x
12 Scan plate
13 Gears x x x x x x
14 Belts x x x x x x
15 OC mat
2 Scanner Scanner 1 Drive belt x x x x x x
section unit 2 Drive wire x x x x x x
3 Sensors x x x x x x
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Apply grease (UKOG-
0158FCZZ)
5 Mirror
6 Reflector
7 Lamp
8 Lens
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 7
1 : ‘16/Feb.
Section/ Work
When
Unit work Name Unit name seque Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
calling
sequence nce
2 Scanner Scanner 9 CCD
section unit 10 Table glass
11 SPF glass
5 Transfer Primary 1 Separation pawl - x x x x x Replace as needed
section transfer unit 2 Primary transfer belt - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
3 Primary transfer belt - x x x x x Replace as needed
drive gear
4 Primary transfer belt - Clean with alcohol
drive roller
5 Primary transfer belt - Clean with alcohol
follower roller
6 Primary transfer blade - Clean with alcohol
backup roller
7 BK auxiliary roller - Clean with alcohol
8 Y auxiliary roller - Clean with alcohol
9 Pre-transfer roller - Clean with alcohol
10 Primary transfer roller - x x x x x Replace as needed
11 Resist face stay cushion - x x x x x Replace as needed
12 Primary transfer blade - x x x x x Replace as needed
backup roller sheet
13 Primary transfer toner - x x x x x Replace as needed
reception sheet F/R
14 Cleaning roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at same time
15 Primary transfer cleaner - x x x x x
sub blade
16 Transfer cleaner seals - x x x x x
F/R
17 Primary transfer belt - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
cleaner blade
Secondary 1 Secondary transfer roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
transfer unit 2 Secondary transfer - x x x x x Replace as needed
separation plate
3 Paper guide
4 Sensors x x x x x x
Other 1 PTC unit - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Image registration /
Density sensor unit
6 LSU section LSU 1 Dust-proof glass
Other 2 Cleaning base x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
7 Manual paper Manual 1 Paper pickup roller x Replace at 100K of
feed section paper feed 2 Paper feed roller x manual paper feed
unit 3 Separation roller x counter or 1 year of use
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x
5 Transport roller 10 x
6 Sensors x x x x x x
8 Tray paper Tray paper 1 Paper pickup roller x Replace at 200K of each
feed section feed unit 2 Paper feed roller x paper feed counter or 1
3 Separation roller x year of use
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x
5 Transport roller 3 x
6 Transport roller 1 x
7 Transport roller 2 x
8 Sensors x x x x x x
9 Paper PS unit 1 Registration roller (idle) x
registration 2 Registration roller (drive) x
section/Paper 3 Transport roller 5 x
exit section/ 4 Sensors x x x x x x
ADU section
Right door 5 Transport roller 9 x
unit 6 Transport roller 10 x
7 Transport roller 8 x
1 8
9
10 Sensors x x x x x x
Fusing rear 11 Transport roller 7 x
unit
Paper exit 12 Paper exit roller 2 x
unit 13 Discharge brush x x x x x x
14 Sensors x x x x x x
Other 15 Paper dust removing
unit
— Paper guides
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 8
Section/ Work
When
Unit work Name Unit name seque Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
calling
sequence nce
10 Drive section Main drive 1 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
unit (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
2 Shafts (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
3 Shaft earth section - x x x x x Apply grease
(conductive grease) (UKOG-0012QSZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
4 Belts - x x x x x
5 Sensors x x x x x x
Transport 6 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
drive unit (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
7 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0299FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
8 Shafts (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
9 Belts - x x x x x
10 Connection arm - x x x x x
Fusing 11 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
drive unit (UKOG-0299FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
12 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
13 Shafts (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
14 Belts - x x x x x
Paper exit 15 Belts - x x x x x
drive unit
11 Fusing section Fusing unit 1 Fusing transport roller x
lower
2 Fusing transport roller x
upper
3 Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
4 Separation plate x x x x x x
5 Pressure roller gear x x x x x x Replace as needed
6 Pressure roller bearing x x x x x x Replace as needed
7 Pressure roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease
(UKOG-0235FCZZ) to
the shaft section when
replacing and after
completion of
replacement, clean the
new pressure roller
surface with alcohol
8 Upper thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
9 Fusing belt unit x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
10 Lower thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
11 Main thermistor x x x x x x
12 Sub thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
13 Sensors x x x x x x
14 Paper guides
12 Other Other 1 Ozone filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Right cover filter x
3 Front cover cushion x x x x x x Do not give damage to
the cushion when
cleaning the front cover
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 9
Section/ Work
When
Unit work Name Unit name seque Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
calling
sequence nce
12 Other Other 4 Toner cartridge K Replaced by the user when replacing message is
5 Toner cartridge C displayed
6 Toner cartridge M
7 Toner cartridge Y
8 Waste toner box Replaced by the user every full detection Replace at 50K
40 ppm machine
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
Section/ Work
When
Unit work Name Unit name seque Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
calling
sequence nce
1 Document feed DSPF unit 1 Paper pickup roller Replace at 100K of the
section 2 Paper feed roller SPF paper feed counter
3 Separation roller or 1 year of use
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x Replace at 800K of the
SPF paper feed counter
5 Transport roller 1
6 Transport roller 2
7 Registration roller
8 Transport roller 3
9 Transport roller 4
10 Paper exit roller
11 Discharge brush x x x x x x
12 Sensors x x x x x x
13 No.1 scanning plate
14 No.2 scanning section,
scanning glass
15 No.2 scanning section,
white reference glass
16 Mirror
17 Lens, CCD
18 Lamp, Reflector Blow air to clean LED
section
19 OC mat
20 Gears x x x x x x
21 Belts x x x x x x
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 10
Section/ Work
When
Unit work Name Unit name seque Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
calling
sequence nce
1 Document feed RSPF unit 1 Paper pickup roller Replace at 100K of the
section 2 Paper feed roller SPF paper feed counter
3 Separation roller or 1 year of use. When
replacing the paper feed
roller, apply grease
(UKOG-0013QSZZ) to
the paper feed shaft
4 Torque limiter SPF x x x x x x Replace at 400K of the
5 Torque limiter pickup x x x x x x SPF paper feed counter
or 2 year of use
6 Discharge brush x x x x x x
7 Registration roller
8 Transport roller 1
9 Transport roller 2
10 Paper exit roller
11 Sensors x x x x x x
12 Scan plate
13 Gears x x x x x x
14 Belts x x x x x x
15 OC mat
2 Scanner Scanner 1 Drive belt x x x x x x
section unit 2 Drive wire x x x x x x
3 Sensors x x x x x x
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Apply grease (UKOG-
0158FCZZ)
5 Mirror
6 Reflector
7 Lamp
8 Lens
9 CCD
10 Table glass
11 SPF glass
5 Transfer Primary 1 Separation pawl - x x x x x Replace as needed
section transfer unit 2 Primary transfer belt - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
3 Primary transfer belt - x x x x x Replace as needed
drive gear
4 Primary transfer belt - Clean with alcohol
drive roller
5 Primary transfer belt - Clean with alcohol
follower roller
6 Primary transfer blade - Clean with alcohol
backup roller
7 BK auxiliary roller - Clean with alcohol
8 Y auxiliary roller - Clean with alcohol
9 Pre-transfer roller - Clean with alcohol
10 Primary transfer roller - x x x x x Replace as needed
11 Resist face stay cushion - x x x x x Replace as needed
12 Primary transfer blade - x x x x x Replace as needed
backup roller sheet
13 Primary transfer toner - x x x x x Replace as needed
reception sheet F/R
14 Cleaning roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at same time
15 Primary transfer cleaner x x x x x
sub blade
16 Transfer cleaner seals F/ - x x x x x
R
17 Primary transfer belt - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
cleaner blade
Secondary 1 Secondary transfer roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
transfer unit 2 Secondary transfer - x x x x x Replace as needed
separation plate
3 Paper guide
4 Sensors x x x x x x
Other 1 PTC unit - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Image registration /
Density sensor unit
6 LSU section LSU 1 Dust-proof glass
Other 2 Cleaning base x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 11
1 : ‘16/Feb.
Section/ Work
When
Unit work Name Unit name seque Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
calling
sequence nce
7 Manual paper Manual 1 Paper pickup roller x Replace at 100K of
feed section paper feed 2 Paper feed roller x manual paper feed
unit 3 Separation roller x counter or 1 year of use
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x
5 Transport roller 10 x
6 Sensors x x x x x x
8 Tray paper Tray paper 1 Paper pickup roller x Replace at 200K of each
feed section feed unit 2 Paper feed roller x paper feed counter or 1
3 Separation roller x year of use
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x
5 Transport roller 3 x
6 Transport roller 1 x
7 Transport roller 2 x
8 Sensors x x x x x x
9 Paper PS unit 1 Registration roller (idle) x
registration 2 Registration roller (drive) x
section/Paper 3 Transport roller 5 x
exit section/ 4 Sensors x x x x x x
ADU section
Right door 5 Transport roller 9 x
unit 6 Transport roller 10 x
7 Transport roller 8 x
1 8
9
10 Sensors x x x x x x
Fusing rear 11 Transport roller 7 x
unit
Paper exit 12 Paper exit roller 2 x
unit 13 Discharge brush x x x x x x
14 Sensors x x x x x x
Other 15 Paper dust removing
unit
— Paper guides
10 Drive section Main drive 1 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
unit (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
2 Shafts (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
3 Shaft earth section - x x x x x Apply grease
(conductive grease) (UKOG-0012QSZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
4 Belts - x x x x x
5 Sensors x x x x x x
Transport 6 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
drive unit (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
7 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0299FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
8 Shafts (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
9 Belts - x x x x x
10 Connection arm - x x x x x
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 12
Section/ Work
When
Unit work Name Unit name seque Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
calling
sequence nce
10 Drive section Fusing 11 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
drive unit (UKOG-0299FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
12 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
13 Shafts (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
14 Belts - x x x x x
Paper exit 15 Belts - x x x x x
drive unit
11 Fusing section Fusing unit 1 Fusing transport roller x
lower
2 Fusing transport roller x
upper
3 Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
4 Separation plate x x x x x x
5 Pressure roller gear x x x x x x Replace as needed
6 Pressure roller bearing x x x x x x Replace as needed
7 Pressure roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease
(UKOG-0235FCZZ) to
the shaft section when
replacing and after
completion of
replacement, clean the
new pressure roller
surface with alcohol
8 Upper thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
9 Fusing belt unit x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
10 Lower thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
11 Main thermistor x x x x x x
12 Sub thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
13 Sensors x x x x x x
14 Paper guides
12 Other Other 1 Ozone filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Right cover filter x
3 Front cover cushion x x x x x x Do not give damage to
the cushion when
cleaning the front cover
4 Toner cartridge K Replaced by the user when replacing message is
5 Toner cartridge C displayed
6 Toner cartridge M
7 Toner cartridge Y
8 Waste toner box Replaced by the user every full detection Replace at 50K
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 13
A. Document feed section
(1) DSPF
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
30 ppm machine
35 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Paper pickup roller Replace at 100K of the SPF paper
2 Paper feed roller feed counter or 1 year of use
3 Separation roller
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x Replace at 800K of the SPF paper
feed counter
5 Transport roller 1
6 Transport roller 2
7 Registration roller
8 Transport roller 3
9 Transport roller 4
10 Paper exit roller
11 Discharge brush x x x x x x
12 Sensors x x x x x x
13 No.1 scanning plate
14 No.2 scanning section, scanning glass
15 No.2 scanning section, white reference glass
16 Mirror
17 Lens, CCD
18 Lamp, Reflector Blow air to clean LED section
19 OC mat
20 Gears x x x x x x
21 Belts x x x x x x
40 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Paper pickup roller Replace at 100K of the SPF paper
2 Paper feed roller feed counter or 1 year of use
3 Separation roller
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x Replace at 800K of the SPF paper
feed counter
5 Transport roller 1
6 Transport roller 2
7 Registration roller
8 Transport roller 3
9 Transport roller 4
10 Paper exit roller
11 Discharge brush x x x x x x
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 14
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
12 Sensors x x x x x x
13 No.1 scanning plate
14 No.2 scanning section, scanning glass
15 No.2 scanning section, white reference glass
16 Mirror
17 Lens, CCD
18 Lamp, Reflector Blow air to clean LED section
19 OC mat
20 Gears x x x x x x
21 Belts x x x x x x
12 21
2
1
3 12
5
12
20
4
6 21
20
7
13
12 12
8
12
10
17 11
19
16
18
15 14
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 15
(2) RSPF
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
30 ppm machine
35 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Paper pickup roller Replace at 100K of the SPF paper
2 Paper feed roller feed counter or 1 year of use. When
3 Separation roller replacing the paper feed roller, apply
grease (UKOG-0013QSZZ) to the
paper feed shaft
4 Torque limiter SPF x x x x x x Replace at 400K of the SPF paper
5 Torque limiter pickup x x x x x x feed counter or 2 year of use
6 Discharge brush x x x x x x
7 Registration roller
8 Transport roller 1
9 Transport roller 2
10 Paper exit roller
11 Sensors x x x x x x
12 Scan plate
13 Gears x x x x x x
14 Belts x x x x x x
15 OC mat
40 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Paper pickup roller Replace at 100K of the SPF paper
2 Paper feed roller feed counter or 1 year of use. When
3 Separation roller replacing the paper feed roller, apply
grease (UKOG-0013QSZZ) to the
paper feed shaft
4 Torque limiter SPF x x x x x x Replace at 400K of the SPF paper
5 Torque limiter pickup x x x x x x feed counter or 2 year of use
6 Discharge brush x x x x x x
7 Registration roller
8 Transport roller 1
9 Transport roller 2
10 Paper exit roller
11 Sensors x x x x x x
12 Scan plate
13 Gears x x x x x x
14 Belts x x x x x x
15 OC mat
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 16
11 14
5
11
1 13
2
11
14
11
7
12
9
10
6
3
4
15
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 17
B. Scanner section
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
30 ppm machine
35 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Drive belt x x x x x x
2 Drive wire x x x x x x
3 Sensors x x x x x x
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Apply grease (UKOG-0158FCZZ)
5 Mirror
6 Reflector
7 Lamp
8 Lens
9 CCD
10 Table glass
11 SPF glass
40 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Drive belt x x x x x x
2 Drive wire x x x x x x
3 Sensors x x x x x x
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Apply grease (UKOG-0158FCZZ)
5 Mirror
6 Reflector
7 Lamp
8 Lens
9 CCD
10 Table glass
11 SPF glass
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 18
3
11
3
10
8
9
2
5
RSPF DSPF
7
6
5 5
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 19
C. Developer section
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
30 ppm machine
Monochrome
Color
35 ppm machine
Monochrome
Color
40 ppm machine
Monochrome
Color
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 20
Work every 1350K every 2700K
Part name When calling Remarks
sequence rotation rotation
6 Bias pin x x x
6
3
2
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 21
D. OPC drum section
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
30 ppm machine
Monochrome
Color
35 ppm machine
Monochrome
Color
40 ppm machine
Monochrome
Color
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 22
5
1
6
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 23
E. Transfer section
(1) Primary transfer section
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
30 ppm machine
35 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Separation pawl - x x x x x Replace as needed
2 Primary transfer belt - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
3 Primary transfer belt drive gear - x x x x x Replace as needed
4 Primary transfer belt drive roller - Clean with alcohol
5 Primary transfer belt follower roller - Clean with alcohol
6 Primary transfer blade backup roller - Clean with alcohol
7 BK auxiliary roller - Clean with alcohol
8 Y auxiliary roller - Clean with alcohol
9 Pre-transfer roller - Clean with alcohol
10 Primary transfer roller - x x x x x Replace as needed
11 Resist face stay cushion - x x x x x Replace as needed
12 Primary transfer blade backup roller sheet - x x x x x Replace as needed
13 Primary transfer toner reception sheet F/R - x x x x x Replace as needed
14 Cleaning roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
15 Primary transfer cleaner sub blade - x x x x x Replace as needed
16 Transfer cleaner seals F/R - x x x x x Replace as needed
17 Primary transfer belt cleaner blade - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
40 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Separation pawl - x x x x x Replace as needed
2 Primary transfer belt - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
3 Primary transfer belt drive gear - x x x x x Replace as needed
4 Primary transfer belt drive roller - Clean with alcohol
5 Primary transfer belt follower roller - Clean with alcohol
6 Primary transfer blade backup roller - Clean with alcohol
7 BK auxiliary roller - Clean with alcohol
8 Y auxiliary roller - Clean with alcohol
9 Pre-transfer roller - Clean with alcohol
10 Primary transfer roller - x x x x x Replace as needed
11 Resist face stay cushion - x x x x x Replace as needed
12 Primary transfer blade backup roller sheet - x x x x x Replace as needed
13 Primary transfer toner reception sheet F/R - x x x x x Replace as needed
14 Cleaning roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
15 Primary transfer cleaner sub blade x x x x x Replace as needed
16 Transfer cleaner seals F/R - x x x x x Replace as needed
17 Primary transfer belt cleaner blade - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 24
16
15
17
8
6
12
13
16
5
14
11
2
3
13
7
4
10
9
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 25
(2) Secondary transfer unit
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
30 ppm machine
35 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Secondary transfer roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Secondary transfer separation plate - x x x x x Replace as needed
3 Paper guide
4 Sensors x x x x x x
40 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Secondary transfer roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Secondary transfer separation plate - x x x x x Replace as needed
3 Paper guide
4 Sensors x x x x x x
2
1
4
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 26
(3) Other
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
30 ppm machine
35 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 PTC unit - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Image registration / Density sensor unit Clean with dry cloth
40 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 PTC unit - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Image registration / Density sensor unit Clean with dry cloth
Note for cleaning the Image registration sensor, the Density sensor.
When in maintenance or in case of a service call, clean the image registration sensor and the density sensor with dry cloth and perform Sim44-2 and
46-74.
2
1
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 27
F. LSU section
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
30 ppm machine
35 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Dust-proof glass
2 Cleaning base x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
40 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Dust-proof glass
2 Cleaning base x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 28
G. Manual paper feed section
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
30 ppm machine
35 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Paper pickup roller x Replace at 100K of manual paper
2 Paper feed roller x feed counter or 1 year of use
3 Separation roller x
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x
5 Transport roller 10 x
6 Sensors x x x x x x
40 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Paper pickup roller x Replace at 100K of manual paper
2 Paper feed roller x feed counter or 1 year of use
3 Separation roller x
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x
5 Transport roller 10 x
6 Sensors x x x x x x
1
2
5 6
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 29
H. Tray paper feed section
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
30 ppm machine
35 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Paper pickup roller x Replace at 200K of each paper feed
2 Paper feed roller x counter or 1 year of use
3 Separation roller x
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x
5 Transport roller 3 x
6 Transport roller 1 x
7 Transport roller 2 x
8 Sensors x x x x x x
40 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Paper pickup roller x Replace at 200K of each paper feed
2 Paper feed roller x counter or 1 year of use
3 Separation roller x
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x
5 Transport roller 3 x
6 Transport roller 1 x
7 Transport roller 2 x
8 Sensors x x x x x x
8
5
8
7
4
3
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 30
1 : ‘16/Feb.
I. Paper transport section/paper exit section/ADU section
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
30 ppm machine
35 ppm machine
Work When
Unit name Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
PS unit 1 Registration roller (idle) x
2 Registration roller (drive) x
3 Transport roller 5 x
4 Sensors x x x x x x
Right door unit 5 Transport roller 9 x
6 Transport roller 10 x
7 Transport roller 8 x
1 8
9
10 Sensors x x x x x x
Fusing rear unit 11 Transport roller 7 x
Paper exit unit 12 Paper exit roller 2 x
13 Discharge brush x x x x x x
14 Sensors x x x x x x
Other 15 Paper dust removing unit
— Paper guides
40 ppm machine
Work When
Unit name Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
PS unit 1 Registration roller (idle) x
2 Registration roller (drive) x
3 Transport roller 5 x
4 Sensors x x x x x x
Right door unit 5 Transport roller 9 x
6 Transport roller 10 x
7 Transport roller 8 x
1 8
9
10 Sensors x x x x x x
Fusing rear unit 11 Transport roller 7 x
Paper exit unit 12 Paper exit roller 2 x
13 Discharge brush x x x x x x
14 Sensors x x x x x x
Other 15 Paper dust removing unit
— Paper guides
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 31
1 : ‘16/Feb.
14
13
7
12 14
10
10
11 5
2
1
15
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 32
J. Drive section
(1) Main drive unit
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
30 ppm machine
35 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position when checking
2 Shafts (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position when checking
3 Shaft earth section (conductive grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0012QSZZ) to
the specified position when checking
4 Belts - x x x x x
5 Sensors x x x x x x
40 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position when checking
2 Shafts (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position when checking
3 Shaft earth section (conductive grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0012QSZZ) to
the specified position when checking
4 Belts - x x x x x
5 Sensors x x x x x x
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 33
2
4
1
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 34
(2) Transport drive unit / Fusing drive unit / Paper exit drive unit
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
30 ppm machine
35 ppm machine
Work When
Unit name Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
Transport drive 6 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
unit the specified position when checking
7 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0299FCZZ) to
the specified position when checking
8 Shafts (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position when checking
9 Belts - x x x x x
10 Connection arm - x x x x x
Fusing drive 11 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0299FCZZ) to
unit the specified position when checking
12 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position when checking
13 Shafts (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position when checking
14 Belts - x x x x x
Paper exit drive 15 Belts - x x x x x
unit
40 ppm machine
Work When
Unit name Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
Transport drive 6 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
unit the specified position when checking
7 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0299FCZZ) to
the specified position when checking
8 Shafts (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position when checking
9 Belts - x x x x x
10 Connection arm - x x x x x
Fusing drive 11 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0299FCZZ) to
unit the specified position when checking
12 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position when checking
13 Shafts (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position when checking
14 Belts - x x x x x
Paper exit drive 15 Belts - x x x x x
unit
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 35
15
13
14
11
12
10
6
8
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 36
K. Fusing section
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
30 ppm machine
35 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Fusing transport roller lower x
2 Fusing transport roller upper x
3 Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
4 Separation plate x x x x x x
5 Pressure roller gear x x x x x x Replace as needed
6 Pressure roller bearing x x x x x x Replace as needed
7 Pressure roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease (UKOG-0235FCZZ) to
the shaft section when replacing and
after completion of replacement,
clean the new pressure roller surface
with alcohol
8 Upper thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
9 Fusing belt unit x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
10 Lower thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
11 Main thermistor x x x x x x
12 Sub thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
13 Sensors x x x x x x
14 Paper guides
40 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Fusing transport roller lower x
2 Fusing transport roller upper x
3 Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
4 Separation plate x x x x x x
5 Pressure roller gear x x x x x x Replace as needed
6 Pressure roller bearing x x x x x x Replace as needed
7 Pressure roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease (UKOG-0235FCZZ) to
the shaft section when replacing and
after completion of replacement,
clean the new pressure roller surface
with alcohol
8 Upper thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
9 Fusing belt unit x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
10 Lower thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
11 Main thermistor x x x x x x
12 Sub thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
13 Sensors x x x x x x
14 Paper guides
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 37
3
13
14
14
1 5
8
4
14
14
11
12
10
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 38
L. Other
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
30 ppm machine
35 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Ozone filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Right cover filter x
3 Front cover cushion x x x x x x Do not give damage to the cushion
when cleaning the front cover
4 Toner cartridge K Replaced by the user when replacing message is
5 Toner cartridge C displayed
6 Toner cartridge M
7 Toner cartridge Y
8 Waste toner box Replaced by the user every full detection Replace at 50K
40 ppm machine
Work When
Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Remarks
sequence calling
1 Ozone filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Right cover filter x
3 Front cover cushion x x x x x x Do not give damage to the cushion
when cleaning the front cover
4 Toner cartridge K Replaced by the user when replacing message is
5 Toner cartridge C displayed
6 Toner cartridge M
7 Toner cartridge Y
8 Waste toner box Replaced by the user every full detection Replace at 50K
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 39
7
6
5
4
1 3
MX-4070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 40
MX-4070N
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Service
(1) Manual
Front cover upper
1) Remove the front cover upper.
1. Disassembly of Units
Ĭ
A. External view
Į
No. Name
1 Front cover upper
2 MFPc cover
3 Rear cover upper
4 Left cover
5 Rear cover
Į
6 Right cover rear upper
7 Panel hinge section cover
8 Front cover upper right ĭ
9 Left cover upper rear
10 Right cover rear lower
11 Right front cover
12 Right cover front lower į
13 Upper cover front left
ĭ
14 Upper cover front right
15 Upper cover left lower
16 Upper cover right
(2) MFPc cover
1) Remove the rear cabinet cover.
14
13
16
ĭ
Ĭ
7
1 8
10
11
12
ĭ
3
15
6
2
Ĭ
9 Ĭ
5 4
Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Į
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
2) Pull out the handle and remove the left cover.
ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
Į ĭ
Ĭ
į
Ĭ
Ĭ
1) Open the right door and pull out the handle. Then, remove the
right cover rear bottom.
Į
İ
į Ĭ į
ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Į
Ĭ
Ĭ
NG NG
Connector facing
OK NG
3) Remove the screws, and remove the DSPF unit from the
machine.
4 5 Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
Į
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
4) Disconnect the connector from the DSPF control PWB, and (4) RSPF paper feed tray unit
remove the DSPF paper feed tray unit.
1) Turn over the left upper corner of the OC mat.
ĭ Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ Į
ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ Į
į
No. Name
1 Scanner unit
ĭ Ĭ
*2
*1
PWB
Slide the connector in the direction of
the arrow to unlock.
FFC
FFC
Insert FFC in the direction of the arrow,
with the reinforcing plate (Blue) being
placed at the right side.
make sure FFC vertically inserted
Connector lock lever position
(Locked state)
Ĭ
ĭ
OK NG
ĭ
Ĭ
1
5) While pulling down the lever, pull out the developing unit to
remove.
When pulling out and pushing in the developing unit, put your (1) OPC drum unit
hand beneath the unit and slide it horizontally along the guide. 1) Remove the waste toner box.
At the time, be careful not to touch the developing roller surface. 2) Open the drum positioning plate.
Put it in the horizontal place. 3) Remove the developing unit.
4) While pulling up the lever, pull out the OPC drum to remove.
When pulling out and pushing in the OPC drum unit, put your
hand beneath the unit and slide it horizontally along the guide on
the right side.
At the time, be careful not to touch the OPC drum surface.
ĭ
lever
5 Ĭ
Ĭ
1
3
2 Ĭ
Ĭ
4
When removing the primary transfer unit, be sure to open the right
door in advance.
ĭ Ĭ Ĭ
band
Be careful not to put foreign materials on the wire and the plate.
I. LSU section
No. Name
1 LSU unit
FFC
PWB
No. Name
1 Manual paper feed tray
2 Manual paper feed unit
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
2
Ĭ
3) Remove the right door lock pawl, and remove the ADU cabinet F.
Ĭ
Į
Ĭ
ĭ Į
ĭ Ĭ
į
ĭ ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ
2
1
6) Remove the manual paper tray fulcrum shaft, and remove the
manual paper tray.
Į Ĭ
3
4
1
2 Į
ĭ Ĭ
2) Remove the FFC, and remove the right door open/close harness
holder.
*2
į
Į
CAUTION :
Check that the FFC reinforce
plate is parallel to the connector.
ĭ
Į
į
Ĭ
M. Drive section
No. Name
1 Main drive unit
Ĭ 2 Transport drive unit
Ĭ
3 Fusing drive unit
4 Paper exit drive unit
(4) Fusing rear unit
1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the fusing rear unit.Then disconnect the connector.
1
3
Ĭ
ĭ
Rib
Connector
Disconnect connector* ĭ
OK NG
Ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ Ĭ
į Į
ĭ
ĭ Ĭ
4) Remove the connector and the reuse band from the fusing drive
Connector (yellow) Connector (white) unit.
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ
N. Fusing section
No. Name
1 Fusing unit
(4) Paper exit drive unit
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the right cover rear upper.
3) Remove the delivery fan cover.
4) Remove the connector, the reuse band and the harness from the (1) Fusing unit
paper exit drive unit. 1) Open the right door, and remove the fusing unit.
1
2
2) The order for fixing to the main unit
4
3
(1) TC PWB
1) Remove the left cover.
2) Remove the TC PWB, and disconnect the connector.
Ĭ
ĭ
Į ĭ
Ĭ
*1
Be careful with the FFC which is attached on the rear side of the
MFPC PWB fixing plate unit.
*1
Ĭ
Ĭ
PWB
Ĭ
FFC
Ĭ Ĭ Ĭ Ĭ ĭ
FFC
*2 *1
Locked (when connectiong FFC)
*1
9) Take out 2 eeprom from the PWB and mount them onto the new
PWB.
CAUTION :
Check that the FFC reinforce
plate is parallel to the connector.
3) Take out the eeprom from the PWB and mount it onto the new
PWB.
(4) MC PWB 6) Remove the 7 pawls, and remove the MC PWB.
1) Remove the MFPC cover.
2) Remove the rear cover.
3) Disconnect the connector from the PCU PWB and open the MC
fixing plate unit.
Ĭ ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ ĭ Ĭ
(6) AC PWB
2) Check the connection to the main unit 1) Remove the MFPC cover.
Fix the MC PWB with the pawls (7 places) correctly. 2) Remove the rear cover.
3) Disconnect the connector from the PCU PWB and open the MC
fixing plate unit.
Ĭ ĭ
Ĭ ĭ Ĭ Ĭ
ĭ
Saddle for fixing the screw
Į · Fix by the screw with the HL PWB.
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ ĭ
P. Filter section
No. Name
1 Ozone filter
(7) HL PWB
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the connector and the ground wire from the PCU PWB.
Then, open the PCU PWB fixing plate unit and the MC fixing plate
unit.
Į 1
į Į
ĭ
Į
(1) Ozone filter
1) Remove the ozone filter cover, and remove the ozone filter.
Į
Ĭ
ĭ
a
h
d
g
Ĭ
f į
i
Ĭ Ĭ
e
į ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ Į
5) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the upper door unit.
Ĭ
5) Open the lower door and remove the screw, fulcrum plate, and
lower door. f. Optical unit
1) Remove the upper door.
2) Remove the lamp unit.
3) Remove the screws and paper guide.
ĭ Ĭ
Į
ĭ
į
ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
į
Į
Ĭ
į
ĭ ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
When attaching the delivery drive unit, tighten the screw in the
order of (1) - (3).
4) Remove screws and the paper feed drive unit.
Į
Ĭ
į
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
2) Loosen the screw. Tighten the screw again after reapplying ten-
sion in the direction of the arrow. 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screws. Remove the
DSPF control PWB.
Ĭ
ĭ
ĭ Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ
Į
b
g e ĭ
d
a
c
f Ĭ
į
h
c. Separation roller
d. Torque limiter
1) Open the paper feed unit and remove the cover
a. Paper pickup roller
b. Paper feed roller
1) Open the paper feed unit and remove the cover Į
2) Remove the E-ring, shaft, separation roller and the torque limiter
Ĭ Į
Ĭ
ĭ
Į
h. OC mat
į 1) Open the RSPF unit and clean the OC mat
2) Pull out the shaft, remove bearing, holder and torque limiter
pickup
Į
į
f. Discharge brush
1) Open the document tray and remove the discharge brush
b
c
k
d
c
j
a. Transport roller 1
b. Transport roller 2
c. Paper exit roller a
d. Scan plate
1) Clean the transport roller 1, the transport roller 2, the paper exit b
roller and the scan plate
d
h
i
b
RSPF g
e
e
DSPF f
g
e
OK NG
Wind the drive wire in the sequence of 1 to 7 as shown in the fig- d. Rails
ure below and fix it.
1) Remove the table glass.
When winding the drive wire around the pulley, shift the mirror unit
2) Grease each rail.
to the vicinity of the home position, and wind 7 turns as shown in
the figure, and fix the 8th turn with a screw. Then wind two turns
furthermore around the pulley.
Be careful not to allow grease to come in contact with drive wires.
If grease contacts drive wires, clean wires thoroughly.
IJ
ı
į ĭ
İ
Ĭ
IJ
ı
1 7 8 9 10
į
İ
ĭ
Ĭ
Į 10 9 8 7 1
ĭ Ĭ
3) Clean the reflector, the scanner lamp, and the No. 1 mirror.
j. Table glass
k. SPF glass
1) Remove the glass holder, the table glass, and the SPF glass.
DSPF
į İ
Ĭ
ĭ
2) Clean the both surfaces of the table glass, and the SPF glass.
c
e
MG roller
a
a. Developer
1) Tilt the developing unit slightly toward the direction of arrow and
gently shake up a little.
*To prevent the developer spilling out of developing unit
When pouring the developer into the unit, use care not to get
developer into the drive section
When replacing the DV blade, affix the DV blade based on the ref-
erence position.
Steady the DV blade after affixing the blade. (Make sure that the
sheet is seated securely.)
When removing the rear-side boss, press the cover gently to pre-
vent toner dispersion. 0mm
The front-side boss and rear-side boss must be handled with care
to prevent fracturing.
Before affixing new DV side seal FR, make sure to remove any
foreign material and remaining adhesive from affixing surface
completely.
0.3mm 0.3mm
Ĭ
0mm 0mm
Reference position Reference position
(Steps) (Edge face)
į
3) Attach the filter cover.
d
Steady the DV blade upper after affixing the blade. (Make sure
that the sheet is seated securely.)
b
c f
f
Reference
position a. Charger unit
(Wall surface)
1) Uplift the lock lever and pull out the charger unit.
0mm
15 mm or less 15 mm or less
1) After removing the drum, apply stearic acid powder (UKOG- F side
0312FCZZ) to the whole surface of the drum
Ĭ
2) After mounting the drum on drum frame, hold both edges of drum
within 15 mm or less. Rotate the drum manually in the forward
direction twice (toward the direction of arrow as shown in the illus-
tration below) and remove the stearic acid powder (UKOG- Followings must be observed while attaching the cover:
0312FCZZ) from drum surface. • (1) Insert the pawl on MC unit to the square hole on process
frame.
• (2) Insert the pawl into the hole securely until it clicks.
• (3) Insert the pawl on front side securely.
F side
• Do not touch the drum surface except for the both ends (15
mm) of the drum
• Any section of the drum may be touched from above the black
protect sheet, but do not touch too strongly
Ĭ Before affixing new seal, make sure to remove any foreign mate-
rial and remaining adhesive from affixing surface completely.
*The blade should not be put on top of the side seals while hold-
ing down the blade.
ĭ
*The width of the clearance should be 0.3 mm or less.
When replacing the toner reception sheet, affix the sheet based 0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm
on the reference position. Clean the affixing surface with alcohol. Reference position (Contact point with the blade)
f. Charger cleaner
1) Open the cover and remove the MC cleaning bar.
Detach the cleaning bar by firstly detaching the bar from right-side
pawl, move the right-side bar over the pawl. It will make left side of
the bar slightly tilt upward; rotate the bar just a little and detach left
side of the bar. Finally remove the bar from the center pawl.
Reference position
(Wall surface)
0mm 0.3mm
Reference 0mm
position
(Steps)
0.3mm ĭ
ig
m
n
f
l
d
n
b
a
h
k e
j
a. Separation pawl
1) Remove the screw and paper guide
After removing the paper guide, place it with the separation pawl
upward to prevent damage on the tip of the pawl.
When attaching the paper guide, handle it carefully not to scratch
transfer belt with separation pawl.
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
2) Place the paper guide with the separation pawl upward. Remove
a screw and detach the separation pawl from the paper guide.
ĭ
Ĭ
Y auxiliary roller
Pre-transfer
roller
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Primary transfer
belt drive roller
When replacing the resist face stay cushion, attach the cushion
based on the reference position.
Before affixing new resist face stay cushion, make sure to remove
any foreign material and remaining adhesive from affixing surface
completely.
Primary transfer
blade backup roller
BK auxiliary roller
Affix the resist face stay cushion so that the cut surface
of the cushion will be placed along the marking-off line.
When replacing the primary transfer blade backup roller sheet,
affix the sheet based on the reference position.
Reference position
Marking-off line
0.3mm 0mm
Before affixing new primary transfer blade backup roller sheet,
make sure to remove any foreign material and remaining adhe-
sive from affixing surface completely.
Į
When replacing the primary transfer toner reception sheet FR,
affix the sheets based on the reference position.
Ĭ
Į į
ĭ Before affixing new primary transfer toner reception sheet FR,
make sure to remove any foreign material and remaining adhe-
sive from affixing surface completely.
Reference Reference
position position
Edge face Edge face
of the rib of the rib
Ensure that the grounding electrode is contacting 1.0mm 1.0mm
the upper surface of the shaft after attaching the
groounding electrode for blade backup roller.
0mm 0mm
0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm 0mm
Reference position Reference position
Wall surface Wall surface
c Before affixing new primary transfer cleaner sub blade, make sure
to remove any foreign material and remaining adhesive from affix-
ing surface completely.
b
a. Cleaning roller
1) Remove the E-ring and cleaning roller
Ĭ
Reference
position
Wall surface
0.3mm 0.3mm
ĭ
0mm 0mm
Reference position 0.3mm 0mm
Wall surface Reference position
Steps
When replacing the transfer cleaner seals FR, affix the seals
based on the reference position.
The seals should not get stuck at rubber section on the cleaner
blade.
c
a
0mm 0mm d
Reference position
0.3mm Steps 0.3mm
Reference position
Edge face of the blade
0.3mm 0mm 0.3mm 0mm b
Do not deform the toner agitation sheet when attaching the blade.
ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
ĭ Ĭ
b. Paper guide
1) Remove the plate
When replacing the sheet, affix the sheet based on the reference
position.
Before affixing new sheet, make sure to remove any foreign mate-
rial and remaining adhesive from affixing surface completely.
Į
Reference position
Steps
0.5mm
0mm
0mm 0.5mm
Reference position
Wall surface
ĭ a
Į
Ĭ
Į Ĭ ĭ
į
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ ĭ
3) Remove the sensor
b
2) Remove the waste toner box
3) Remove the cleaning base from the waste toner box and attach it
to the LSU cleaning bar.
d
a
b į Į
e f
d. Torque limiter
1) Remove the screw and the frame
Insert ribs at
three sections
for assembly.
2) Remove the E-ring and slide the holder and the bearing toward
the direction of arrow in the illustration below. Remove the shaft
and then remove the torque limiter.
2) Uplift the pawl and detach the pickup roller. Remove the E-ring
and detach the paper feed roller.
Ĭ
Į
İ
į
ĭ
Į
Fasten screws in the order of (1) and (2) for assembly. Clean the
transport roller 11.
f. Sensors
1) Remove the screw and the sensor
ĭ
5) Remove the screw, the tray and the sensor
Ĭ
ĭ
h
e Ĭ
b
a
3) Remove the paper pickup roller and the paper feed roller
h
h
g
f
Ĭ
cd
ĭ
a b
g. Transport roller 2
1) Remove the screws and the paper guide. Clean transport roller 2.
Ĭ c
h. Sensors
1) Clean the each sensor.
c. Transport roller 5
1) Clean the transport roller 5.
ĭ
Ĭ
d
d
Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ Ĭĭ
Ĭ
d. Sensor
1) Remove the secondary transfer unit.
2) Remove the screw and sensor.
ĭ Ĭ
a. Transport roller 7
1) Clean the transport roller 7.
2) Clean the paper exit roller 2.
a
Make sure the plate is
contacting to the roller
c Į
n
a
n
n
h e
3) Remove the screw and shifter drive.
d
f
Ĭ
g
f
ĭ
Ĭ
c. Gears
b. Fusing transport roller upper 1) Remove the screws, harnesses, and then remove the paper
1) Remove the connector and detach the harness from the rib. guide.
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
ĭ
holder rib Ĭ
d. Separation plate
1) Remove the screws, paper guide, and then remove the springs.
NOTE: Make sure the paper guide does not contact with the sep-
aration plate.
Ĭ When attaching the paper guide, fasten screws in the
ĭ order of (1)-(4) shown in the illustration below.
Į
2) Remove the screw and the cover į
Ĭ İ
ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Make sure the holder has been removed.
Ĭ
2) Disconnect the connectors and detach the harness from the rib.
3) Slide the holder to the right and left and remove from the boss.
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
NOTE: Different screw is used for front and rear side. Make sure
to fasten proper screw on each side.
Į
ĭ
Ĭ IJ
Rear side
Insert this portion of the rib
to the U-shaped groove.
į
ĭ į Ĭ
Ĭ
Rib facing outward İ ĭ
ı Į
h. Upper thermistor
1) Remove the screw and the thermistor
Ĭ
Ĭ ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Į
2) Disconnect the connectors and detach the harness from the rib. Detach the pawls on the cover.
m. Sensors
1) Remove the sensor
n. Paper guides
1) Clean the paper guide
ĭ
Ĭ
Do not deform the paper guide.
OCSW
8
6
5
4
9
7
CCFT 2
10
B. Operational descriptions
The operation panel unit is composed of the LCD unit, the LVDS PWB, the USB I/F PWB, and the KEY PWB. It displays the machine operation.
It is provided with the USB I/F which is used for the firmware update, USB print, and Scan to USB.
In addition, the USB I/F line is provided inside the operation panel to connect with the keyboard and the IC card reader.
A document size is detected by the document size detection PWB (light emitting) and the document size detection PWB (light receiving).
The detection timing of document size is determined according to the document size detection trigger sensor signal.
MHPS
6
CL_ON
7
8
MIM
3
4
5 1
B
G
be converted into analog image signals.
R
2) The analog image signals are converted into 10-bit digital signals
by the A/D converter.
3) The digital image signals are sent to the SCN MFP PWB for
image processing.
(2) Detailed descriptions
a. Optical section drive
The optical section is driven as follows: The drive power is transmitted
from the scanner motor (MIM) through the belt to the drive pulley/wire, R
and the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached to the
G
wire are driven.
B
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled with the signals sent from the
SCN MFP PWB.
Image data of one line
b. Scanner lamp drive
The scanner lamp is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage which is
generated by the scanner lamp drive PWB with the control signals
sent from the SCN MFP PWB.
c. Image scan and color separation R G B
Red component Green component Blue component
Light is radiated onto the document by the scanner lamp and the
image data image data image data
reflected image is scanned by the 3-line (RGB) CCD elements to be
converted into analog image signals.
The color components are extracted into R, G, and B by the three d. Image signal A/D conversion
kinds of CCD elements (R, G, and B). 1) Each image signal (analog) of R, G, and B is converted into a
The red CCD extracts the red component of an image, the green CCD 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter in the CCD PWB.
extracts the green component, and the blue CCD extracts the blue Each color pixel has 10bit information.
component. This operation is called color separation. 2) Each 10bit digital image signal of R, G, and B is outputted from
The CCD element is apparently seen as one unit, but it includes the the CCD PWB and sent to the SCN MFP PWB, where it is con-
three kinds of elements (R, G, and B). verted into an 8bit signal and sent to the MFP PWB.
The CCD element scans the document in the main scanning direction.
Scanning in the sub scanning direction is made by shifting the scanner
CCD PWB
unit with the scanner motor.
Analog process IC
The document images are optically reduced by the lens and reflected CCD
to the CCD. AFE ADC LVDS
(6 Lines) R
The scanning direction is 600dpi. G
B
Buffer TG
Timing
Generator
e. Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing the
scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not made optically, but per-
formed by the image process technology (software).
CPFM
HPFC
MPUC
MPFS
2
4 MPFD
5 1 MPLD1
6
3
MPED MPWS
CPFM
HPFC
CPFC1
9 C1PUC
C1LUD
3
7
5 C1PFD
8
C1PED 6
C1PFPD 4 DSW_C1
1
2
C1LUM
C1SS
C1SPD
B. Operational descriptions
(1) Paper feed front operation
• Set paper and insert the paper feed tray, and the pickup roller falls to turn ON the paper feed tray sensor.
• The lift-up motor drives the rotating plate to move it up.
• The paper upper limit sensor turns ON, and the rotation plate stops at the specified position.
(2) Paper feed operation
• When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch are turned ON to rotate the pickup roller in the paper pickup timing, feeding paper.
• At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to transport paper to the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates to prevent
against double feed of paper.
(3) Paper remaining detection
The notifying levels of paper remaining quantity are 4 steps in total; 3 steps of paper remaining quantity and 1 step of paper empty. The result is dis-
played.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low
RRM
PFM
PPD2
B. Operational descriptions
Paper is fed from each paper feed section and transported to the registration roller by the transport rollers. ON/OFF control of each transport roller is
made by the paper transport clutch. The registration roller controls the relative positions of transported paper and the transfer image. The registration
roller is driven by the transport motor. The relative positions of paper and the transfer image are determined by the ON timing of the transport motor.
SBM
POFM2
6
5
TFD2 POM
SHPOS
5
POD4
4 POD2
3
FUM
OSM
3
POGS
2 ADUM1
DSW_ADU
APPD1
1 7
3
ADUM2
4
APPD2
12
3
12
3
12
3
12
13 3
9
13
13
9
9
13
LSU_TH1
15
PGM 14
1
11
2
1 4
5
6 7 10
5
LSU_TH2
B. Operational descriptions
(1) General Main scanning direction
Image data sent from the LSU PWB are converted into laser beams
and radiated onto the OPC drum surface. The LSU unit is composed
REAR
of : (1) the optical elements from the laser to the polygon mirror, (2) the
primary system including the mirror which secures the optical path, (3) Scanning
the optical elements including the polygon mirror, and (4) the scanning direction
system including the mirror which secure the optical path.
(2) Composition
Primary system
C
BK
Y
M
FRONT
Paper exit
direction REAR
Scanning
direction
Scanning system
FRONT
DM_CL
DHPD_CL
DL_Y DM_K
DL_M
MC-CL DL_C
MC-CL DL_K
1 DHPD_K
MC-CL
MC-K
1
1
GB
MC
1
3 2 GB
MC
3 2 GB
MC
3 2 GB
MC
3 2
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The OPC Based on the signals monitored by the two sensors, the rotation
speeds of K OPC drum and the color OPC drums and the rotation
drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the voltage applied
to the screen grid. phase are controlled.
2) Laser beams are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser 4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
(writing) unit to form electrostatic latent images.
Aluminum Aluminum
layer layer
Aluminum CGL CGL
OPC drum layer CTL CTL
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
Lens
TNM_Y
CRUM-Y
TCED_Y
TNM_M
CRUM-M
TCED_M
TNM_C
CRUM-C
TCED_C
TNM_K
CRUM-K
TCED_K
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
B. Operational descriptions
Based on the print pixel count and the process control information, Yes/No of toner supply is judged.
When it is judged that the toner density is decreasing, the toner motor is rotated to supply toner in the toner cartridge through the toner transport
screw and the toner transfer pipe to the developing unit.
DM_CL
2 DM_K
2
4
BS 1
2
4
BS 1
3
2
TCS_Y 4
BS 1
3
TCS_M 4
BS
3
TCS_C
TCS_K
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are agitated and transported
by the mixing roller.
By stirring, toner and carrier are negatively charged by mechanical
friction.
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC compo-
nent) is applied to the developing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher than
the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.
The toner sensor detects the toner supply state from the toner car-
tridge.
In this machine, the toner density is detected by the toner sensor, but
the toner supply operation is not controlled only by the toner density
detection result. The toner density control is performed according to
the process control data.
1
3
2 1TURC_1
4 1TUD_CL
1TURC_2
7 DM_K
7
7 1TUD_K
1TC-K
7
2TC
FUM
REGS_R/PCS_R
10 REGS_F/PCS_F
12
1TC-Y PTC 2TURC
5 15
13
1TC-M
6
1TC-C
8
11 17
9 2TUD
2TPD
16
14
B. Operational descriptions
(1) Transfer, cleaning operation
Transfer operation
Primary transfer C. C. C. C.
output
C. C. Secondary
transfer output
PTC output C. C. C. C.
Mode select is made with the developing motor, the mode select
clutches 1TURC1 and 1TURC2.
When the roller separation clutch is turned ON, the transfer cam
rotates, and the primary transfer link in conjunction with the cam is
shifted in the arrow direction, separating the transfer roller.
The color transfer rollers (C, M, and Y) and the black transfer roller (K)
perform an independent separation operation, and the mode state is
detected by the combination of the transfer mode detector 1TUD_CL
and 1TUD_K signals.
To select the rotating direction of the mode select cam, two mode
select clutches 1TURC1 and 1TURC2 are used. b. Functions and operations of the black image density sensor
The two mode select clutches are used to select the mode in the short- and the image registration sensor R (REGS R) provided on the
est time. rear frame side
When the process control is performed with one sensor, the black
Transfer mode detector toner patch density is detected. When the image registration adjust-
Mode
1TUD_CL 1TUD_K ment is performed, the image registration shift on the rear frame side
Monochrome print mode ON ON is detected.
Color print mode OFF ON
Free position ON OFF
1TUD_CL 1TUD_K
1TUD_CL 1TUD_K
1TUD_CL 1TUD_K
Free position
CPFM
CPFC1
1 TNFD
TNFD
FUFM
PRM
FUM
POD1
TH_US2
8
9 5
10
HLPCD
TH_UM
TH_US1
1
7 TH_LM
6
HL_UM/US 5
5
4
HL_LM
2
3
HLPCD
When turning OFF the main power switch of the machine, be sure to
turn OFF the power switch of the operation panel and check to confirm
that the LCD display goes off before turning OFF the main power
switch.
If the main power switch is turned OFF with the LCD lighted, the power
is cut off before completion of the pressure release operation. If this
state is kept for a long time, the fusing roller may be deformed.
SPUFM
SPFC
SCOV
SPED1
SPPD1
SLUM
2 STUD 4
SPRDMD SPED2
STLD
1 SPWS
3
SPLS1
SPLS2
SPUFM
STRC
4
STRRC
SPPD2
3 2
SPUFM
SRRC
SPPD3
2
SPPD5
SPPD4 3
1
5
SOCD
SLCOV
SPOM
SPOD
STMPS
B. Operational descriptions
Document length sensor
Document size
(1) Document size detection SPLS1 SPLS2
Size detection on the document tray AB series A5 OFF OFF
B5 OFF OFF
The document size is detected by the DSPF document width sensor
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
(SPWS), and the document length is detected by the DSPF document
A4 OFF OFF
length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from
B5R ON OFF
the document width and the document length as shown in the table
A4R ON OFF
below.
8.5" x 13" ON ON
When, however, documents of different sizes are mixed and set on the B4 ON ON
document tray, the largest size is detected. A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
8.5" x 13.5" ON ON
SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2
SCOV
SPPD2 SPUM
SPPD1
1
SPED
SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2
SPFM
SRRC
SPRS
SPPD3
4 SPPD4
STMPS
SOCD
6
5
8
7
RSPF unit
SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2
11) After stopping the operation, reversing is started. 2) Paper feed start (1st sheet)
Pick-up roller descending (The paper feed motor is booted.)
(The transport motor is booted simultaneously.)
13) After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pres-
sure is released.
15) After passing the scanning section, the reverse follower roller is
pressed.
PSFM
POFM2
FUFM
PROFM1 1
PROFM2
The machine is provided with the following filter to remove ozone generated in the process section.
Filter process fan motor 1 produces an air flow to generate a difference in the air pressure between inside outside of the developing unit, preventing
toner from splashing from the open port of the developing unit.
The toner filter prevents toner from leaking from the slit caused by this difference in air pressure.
'63) 81,7
23(5$7,21 81,7
0$,1 '5,9( 81,7
728&+ ٲ/&'
785&B
3$1(/
' ٲ/B. ' ٲ/B& ' ٲ/B0 ' ٲ/B<
'0B. 785&B
'9B. 81,7 '9B& 81,7 '9B. 81,7 '9B. 81,7
+20( .(< ٲ/9'6
ٲ3:% 3:% 237,21
'+3'B. '+3'B&/ '0B&/ 7&6B. 7&6B& 7&6B0 7&6B<
)URQW 86% ,& &$5'
ٲ3:% 5HDGHU
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION
ٲ 3:55
'(5,9(5< 81,7 )86(5 81,7 3:%
6+326 32' 710B. 710B& 710B0 710B< 86% &1 :LUH/HVV
) ٲURQW /('B* 3:% /$1 3:%
260 32' 7(' 7+B80 32' 7&('B. 7&('B& 7&('B0 7&('B< 3:%
237,21
721(5B. 81,7 721(5B& 81,7 721(5B0 81,7 721(5B< 81,7
+/3&' 7)' 7+B86 +/B80 ٲ+80$1 6(1625 86% &219 .(<
& ٲ580B. & ٲ580B& & ٲ580B0 & ٲ580B<
3:% ٲ 3:% %2$5'
350 )80 32)0 7+B/0 +/B86 ͤ6,,&$㸸67'
03('
0$18$/ 3$3(5 )((' 81,7
563) 81,7
23(5$7,21 81,7
0$,1 '5,9( 81,7
728&+ ٲ/&'
785&B
3$1(/
' ٲ/B. ' ٲ/B& ' ٲ/B0 ' ٲ/B<
'0B. 785&B
'9B. 81,7 '9B& 81,7 '9B. 81,7 '9B. 81,7
+20( .(< ٲ/9'6
ٲ3:% 3:% 237,21
'+3'B. '+3'B&/ '0B&/ 7&6B. 7&6B& 7&6B0 7&6B<
)URQW 86% ,& &$5'
ٲ3:% 5HDGHU
ٲ 3:55
'(5,9(5< 81,7 )86(5 81,7 3:%
6+326 32' 710B. 710B& 710B0 710B< 237,21
) ٲURQW /('B* 86% &1 :LUH/HVV
260 32' 7(' 7+B80 32' 7&('B. 7&('B& 7&('B0 7&('B< 3:% 3:% /$1 3:%
721(5B. 81,7 721(5B& 81,7 721(5B0 81,7 721(5B< 81,7
+/3&' 7)' 7+B86 +/B80
& ٲ580B. & ٲ580B& & ٲ580B0 & ٲ580B<
350 )80 32)0 7+B/0 +/B86
03('
0$18$/ 3$3(5 )((' 81,7
86%૮/$1
*ULIILQ-367' ,&&$5'
(;2SW 5($'(5
+XPDQ 2SW
3KRHQL[67' .H\%RDUG
'HWHFW +20(/('
+''
32:(5B/('
8667'
6HQVRU +20(B/(' 32:(5B.(< /&' (82SW
86%+RVW
%X]]HU :8B.(< 7RXFK
*ULIILQ*% 67$7(B5('B/('
3DQHO 7<3($&1
+20(B.(< 3DQHO
3KRHQL[ 67$7(B*5((1B/(' /9'6 )URQW
3KRHQL[*%
563)&1
'63)&1
6$7$ *ULIILQ
3DQHO&1 :LIL&1 86%&1 3KRHQL['63)PRGHO
&1 3KRHQL[563)PRGHO &&'&1
6OLGH
''52Q%RDUG
6:
*%
*قE>[@[SFVك
B. SCN MFP PWB
0ESV
5HFHLYHUELW
86%+RVW
$)(
/9'6
قELW
&18SGDWH
0ESV
''5
86%+RVW
శᄭ୩ୠ
/$1-$&.
/9'6/&'
5-
/$1ୄਃৎ21
)3'/,1.
*ESV /&'&,)
*3,2 7UDQVPLWWHU
6FDQ'DWD
ELW *RUJRQ
(WKHU3+< *0,, )3'/,1.
(WKHU0$& 6&1,) %866:
* 5HFHLYHU
* $6,&
57/)* ELW
86%'HYLFH )3'/,1.
86% 0ESV 7UDQVPLWWHU $XGLWRU
86%,) /9'6/68
'HYLFH /68,)
'HYLFH 5HXV &1
7<3(%&1 /9'6
8$57FK $6,& 5HFHLYHU
8$57 /9'6/68&/. 6<1&
FK
,17 ,17
Q)$;B3,&B,17 ᄭ୩ୠ FK 32)
,17 0RWRU
FK /$1ୄਃৎ2)) 0RWRU
,&FK 'ULYHU
,17 &RQWUROOHU 'ULYHU
:DNH8S 125)/$6+
&1
,17
FK 0%
,&FK
57& %DWWHU\ 3UJUDP
&RQWUROOHU
,& 65$0
,17 .+] 0E
FK ,&FK
&RQWUROOHU
/('
'ULYHU
Q)$;B3,&B,17
&1
8$57 8$57
6HULDO&1 8$57FK &RQWUROO
3&,H[JHQ &38 0+3
5,&
*ESV &1
+6
8$57FK 8$57
6HULDO&1 $&5(2SW 'HEXJ
9HQGHU &1
3'
3&,H[JHQ $&5(3:% &1
*ESV 2SW
8$57
SLQ',3
62&.(7
86% ,&
1)& +RVW
2SW ((3520
7<3($&1 86%+RVW NE
0ESV
'3/9'6
[*HQ
)$;
)$;2SW 86%,) *ULIILQ(FRUH*+]
UG 8$57
-3UG +RVWFK
&1 8$57 3KRHQL[(FRUH*+] *3,2 &RQWUROO
69,' 30,&
0HPRU\ +' 6$7$,)
''5/ ,6 6'00&
&RQWUROOHU $XGLR FK
''5/RQERDUG 6$7$,) 30 30
FK FK FK
*% 8$57 63,
:ULWH
P6$7$ &1
*%
3URJUDP
32:(5&1
ਃர୷౮ ஒஊ*ؙ؟ؙULIILQ
ஊؙ؟ؙ3KRHQL[
2SWLRQ :ग़ॿ
'& %OXVKOHVV 0RWRU FRQWURO '& %OXVKOHVV 0RWRU FRQWURO '& %OXVKOHVV 0RWRU FRQWURO
2XWHU 5RWRU W\SH ,QQHU 5RWRU W\SH 2XWHU 5RWRU W\SH
((3520 'UXP 0RWRU '0B.&/ $'0 0RWRU $'0B+/ %HOW 0RWRU %70
,& %86
5HVHW ,& )XVHU 0RWRU )80 6ZLWFK %DFN 0RWRU 6%0 &DVVHWWH 3DSHU )HHG 0RWRU &3)0
C. PCU PWB
&3/'
&ORFN
&3/'
0)3FQW 8$57
6&83,& &38
+6
6HULDO ,)
/68
6WHSSLQJ 0RWRU FRQWURO
7RQHU 0RWRU 710B.&0<
3UHVVXUH 5HOHDVH 0RWRU 350
)$1 0RWRU FRQWURO 6KLIWHU 0RWRU 260
3DSHU 'HOLYHU\ XQLW 3DSHU 7UDQVSRUW 0RWRU 3'370
)XVHU 8QLW &RROLQJ )$1 )8)0
3DSHU 2XWSXW )$1 32)0
3RZHU 6XSSO\ )$1 36)0
3DSHU 'HOLYHU\ XQLW &RROLQJ )$1 3'&)
8$57 '& %UXVK 0RWRU FRQWURO
7& 7&
'63)PRGHO
D. DSPF/RSPF PWB
㻼㼍㼓㼑
㻰㻿㻼㻲㼏㼚㼠㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥
㻯㻯㻰㻙㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻾㻳㻮
㻟㻌㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㻯㻯㻰 㻭㻲㻱 㼐㼍㼠㼍 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㻾㼤
㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㼀㼄
㻔㻺㻱㼃㻌㧗ឤᗘရ㻕 㻛㼀㻳 㻟㻡㼎㼕㼠
㻔㻳㻻㻾㻳㻻㻺㻕 㻞㻤㼎㼕㼠
㻯㻸㻷
㻸㻰㻻㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚 㻯㻼㼁
㻴㻤㻿㻛㻞㻟㻣㻟 㻸㻰㻻㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻭㻲㻱㻕㻌㻝㻚㻤㼂 㻸㻰㻻 㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻝㻞㼂
㻔㼀㼛
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻝㻜㼂
㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰
㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻕㻌㻝㻜㼂 㻸㻰㻻
㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞
㻯㼘㼡㼠㼏㼔 㻝㻞㼂
㻯㼘㼡㼠㼏㼔 㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻡㻚㻟㼂 㻸㻰㻻
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻡㼂
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻟㻚㻟㼂 㻸㻰㻻
㻿㼀㻹㻼㻿 㻿㻾㻭㻹
㻿㼀㻹㻼㻿 㻝㻹㼎 㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞 㻔㼀㼛㻌㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻕㻌㻝㻚㻞㼂 㻸㻰㻻
㻟㻚㻟㼂 563)PRGHO
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻘㻌㻼㼍㼓㼑㻌㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻕㻌㻝㻚㻡㼂 㻰㻯㻰㻯
㻸㻱㻰
㻸㻱㻰 㻲㼘㼍㼟㼔㻾㻻㻹
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻤㻹㼎
㻹㻲㻼㻯㻌㻌㻌㻼㼃㻮
E. LSU PWB
(1) MX-xx70 series
㻿㻯㻸㻷㻛㼀㼄㻰㻛㻾㼄㻰 㻟
㻹㼕㼏㼞㼛㼃㼕㼞㼑㻌㻮㼁㻿 㻹㼕㼏㼞㼛㼃㼕㼞㼑
㻯㻿㻌㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅 㻠 㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻯㼔㼕㼜㻌㼟㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㻔㻸㻰㻰㻕
㻯㻿㻌㻱㻱㻼㻙㻾㻻㻹㻌㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅 㻠 㽢㻠
㻯㼔㼕㼜㻌㼟㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻔㻱㻱㻼㻙㻾㻻㻹㻕
㻵㻰㼇㻜㻦㻝㼉
㻼㻯㼁 㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠
㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠㻌㻵㻯
㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝 㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻼㻳㻹㼋㻯㻷
㻵㻾㻽㻝
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀 㻼㻳㻹㼋㻿㼀㻭㻾㼀
㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚 䠄㻼㻳㻹㼋㻮㻾㻭㻷㻱䠅 㻟
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝 㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻻㻚㻯㻚
㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚
㻼㻯㼁㻌㻵㻛㻲 㻼㻳㻹㼋㻸㻻㻯㻷
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻼㻯㼁㼋㼀㻾㻳
㻾㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞
㻿㻯㻷 㼑㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚
㻾㻿㼂㼋㻰㻭㼀
㻟 㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻾㻿㼀 㻲㻭㻺㼋㻼㼃㻹
㻲㻭㻺 㻻㻚㻯㻚 㻻㻚㻯㻚 㻸㻿㼁
㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻲㻭㻺㻿㼀㻭㻮㻸㻱 㻲㻭㻺
㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻌㻿㼥㼚㼏㼔㼞㼛㼚㼛㼡㼟㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌 㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝
㻯㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌 㻿㻯㻸
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻰㻭㼀 㻿㻰㻭
㼃㻼 㻵㻞㻯
㻯㻻㻹㼋㻲㻵㻲㻻 㻵㻞㻯㻌㻮㼁㻿
㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝
㻿㼅㻿㻯㻸㻷㻝 㻳㻭㻵㻺㻌㻲㻵㼄
㻹㻿㻱㼀㼋㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅 㻠
㻸㻿㼁㼋㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻻㻚㻯㻚
㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞
㻔㻿㼥㼟㼠㼑㼙㻌㻯㻸㻷㻕
㻿㻛㻿
6<6&/.
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻞
㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻼㻠㼋㻷㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝 㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘
㻼㻟㼋㻷㻔㼃㻭㻵㼀㻕
㻰㻛㻭㻌㻵㻛㻲
㻼㻠㼋㻯㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻼㻟㼋㻯㻔㼃㻭㻵㼀㻕 㻠
㻏㻼㻜㼋㻝
㻏㻼㻜㼋㻞 㼚㼚㻏㻼㻜
㻔㻱㻯㻸㻷㼋㻸㻿㼁㻕 㻼㻜㻔㻿㻱㻸㻕 㻠
㻔㻱㻯㻸㻷㻕
㻏㻼㻜㼋㻟
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻛㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯㼋㻸㻿㼁 +6<1&
㼚㼚㻏㻼㻜㼋㻭㻰㻶
96<1&B.&
㻠 㼂㻿㼅㻺㻯㼋㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅 㼚㻼㻜㼋㻸
㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
96<1&B0< 㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝 䠄㻭㻼㻯 㼚㼚㻏㻼㻝 㻠
㻴㼛㼞㼕㼦㼛㼚㼠㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚 㻏㻼㻝㻔㻯㻴㻕
㻛㼂㼑㼞㼠㼕㼏㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚 㻛㻱㻺㻮䠅 㼚㻼㻝㼋㻸
9,'(2,)B$&7
㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㼚㼚㻏㻼㻞 㻠
㻏㻼㻞㻔㻿㻴㻕
㼂㻵㻰㻱㻻㻌㻵㻛㻲㻌㻯㻷 (&/. 㼚㻼㻞㼋㻸
㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯 㻠
㻲㻼㻰㻙㻸㻵㻺㻷㻛㻾㼑㼏㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻮㻰
㻮㻰
㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝
㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻟㻡䠖㻡 㻤 㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝 㻞
㻰㼀㼋㻷㻝㻗㻙
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘 㻭䠖㻷㻝
㻰㼀㼋㻷㻞㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘 㻮䠖㻷㻞
㻟㻡䠖㻡 㻤 㻰㼀㼋㻯㻝㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘 㻯䠖㻯㻝
㻰㼀㼋㻯㻞㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘 㻰䠖㻯㻞
㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻭 㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞
㻔㻯㻸㻷㻙㻭㻕
㻹㻲㻼㻯
㻵㻰㼇㻜㻦㻜㼉
㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚
㻵㻾㻽㻞 㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻼㻯㼁㻌㻵㻛㻲
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻿㼥㼚㼏㼔㼞㼛㼚㼛㼡㼟㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌 㻲㻭㻺 㻿㻰㻌㻯㻸㻷
㻾㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞
㼏㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌 㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻿㻯㻷 㼑㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚
㻾㻿㼂㼋㻰㻭㼀
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻾㻿㼀
㻿㻯㻸
㻿㻰㻭
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻰㻭㼀
㻯㻻㻹㼋㻲㻵㻲㻻 㼃㻼
㻵㻞㻯㻌㻮㼁㻿 㻵㻞㻯
㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻿㼅㻿㻯㻸㻷㻞 㻸㻿㼁㼋㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝
96<1&B0< 㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻴㼛㼞㼕㼦㼛㼚㼠㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚
㻱㻯㻸㻷 㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘 㻼㻠㼋㻹㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻛㼂㼑㼞㼠㼕㼏㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚
㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻰㻛㻭㻌㻵㻛㻲 㻼㻟㼋㻹㻔㼃㻭㻵㼀㻕
㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯
㻼㻠㼋㼅㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻼㻟㼋㼅㻔㼃㻭㻵㼀㻕 㻠
㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
䠄㻭㻼㻯
㻛㻱㻺㻮䠅 㻮㻰
㻠 㻵㻺㼀㻌㻿㼀 㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅
㻲㻼㻰㻙㻸㻵㻺㻷㻛㻾㼑㼏㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻟㻡䠖㻡 㻤 㻰㼀㼋㻹㻝㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻭䠖㻹㻝
㻰㼀㼋㻹㻞㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻮䠖㻹㻞
㻟㻡䠖㻡 㻤 㻰㼀㼋㼅㻝㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻯䠖㼅㻝
㻰㼀㼋㼅㻞㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻰䠖㼅㻞
㻵㻞㻯
㻿㻯㻸㻛㻿㻰㻭
㻵㻞㻯㻌㻮㼁㻿㻌 㻱㻱㻼㻙
㻾㻻㻹
䠄㻸㻰㻰䠅
㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠㻞 㼀㻴㻞㻌㻸㻿㼁
㻭㻹㻼 㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㻞
㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠 㼀㻴㻌㻸㻿㼁
㻭㻹㻼 㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㻌
㻵㻰㼇㻜㻦㻜㼉
㻼㻯㼁
㻸㻰
㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠 㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠
㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠㻌㻵㻯 㻼㼃㻮
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻼㻳㻹㼋㻯㻷
㻼㻳㻹㼋㻿㼀㻭㻾㼀
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀 㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚 䠄㻼㻳㻹㼋㻮㻾㻭㻷㻱䠅 㻟
㻻㻚㻯㻚 㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚
㻼㻯㼁㻌㻵㻛㻲 㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻼㻳㻹㼋㻸㻻㻯㻷 㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻼㻯㼁㼋㼀㻾㻳
㻾㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞
㻿㻯㻷
㻾㻿㼂㼋㻰㻭㼀
㼑㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻾㻿㼀
㻟
㻲㻭㻺㼋㻼㼃㻹
㻲㻭㻺 㻻㻚㻯㻚 㻻㻚㻯㻚 㻸㻿㼁
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻲㻭㻺㻿㼀㻭㻮㻸㻱 㻲㻭㻺
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻰㻭㼀
㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻌㻿㼥㼚㼏㼔㼞㼛㼚㼛㼡㼟㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘
㻿㻯㻸 㻵㻞㻯㻌
㻿㻰㻭
㻯㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚 㼃㻼 㻱㻱㻼㻙
㻯㻻㻹㼋㻲㻵㻲㻻 㻵㻞㻯㻌㻮㼁㻿 㻾㻻㻹
㻔㻾㼍㼏㼛㼛㼚㻕
㻯㻸㻷㼋㻯㼋㻱㻺 㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞 㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻯
㻔㻯㻸㻷㻙㻯㻕
㻾㻿㼀
㻯㻸㻷㼋㻹㼋㻱㻺 㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞 㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻹 㻸㻿㼁㼋㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻔㻯㻸㻷㻙㻹㻕
㻔㻾㼍㼏㼛㼛㼚㻕 㻞 㼄㻱㻾㻾㻝㻛㻞
㻯㻸㻷㼋㻭㼋㻱㻺 㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞 㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻭
㻔㻯㻸㻷㻙㻭㻕 㻞 㼂㻸㻰㻱㻾㻾㻝㻛㻞
㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻱㻯㻸㻷㼋㻸㻿㼁 㻱㻯㻸㻷
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻛㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
9,'(2,)B$&7
AFE_CLK
AFE_RES- STATUS LED_1
ASPCLK PROGRAM
ABITCLK 16bit
MJ1 ARXD
FLASH ROM
Si3019 Si3056 ATXD 16Mb
(LINE)
SPK(analog) STATUS LED_2
16bit (Not mount)
MODEM
Crystal
Resonator WORK
24.576MHz 16bit MEMORY RESET- 3.3V
RESET IC
SDRAM
64Mbit
+5V
MDM3.3V +3.3V
Filter
+5VA MFP IF
Speaker
16bit Connector
BZ
RGDT-(CI᳨ฟ) +5VS
DATA_RXD_P
DATA_RXD
DATA_RXD_N
CI LVDS
CI- DATA_TXD_P
Detection DATA_TXD
DATA_TXD_N
FAX_CTS(D)-
FAX_RTS(D)-
CPU CMD_RXD_P
CMD_RXD
CMD_RXD_N
LVDS CMD_TXD_P
CMD_TXD
CMD_TXD_N
FAX_CTS(CS)-
FLVPP
MJ2
(TEL) MODEL ID voltage
level
OFF fock
detection MODEL ID2 voltage
level
EXHS- CNCT_FAX-
JTAG
JTAG Connector
14pin
SON1
UART (Not mount)
CID-
Download
Crystal Log
Resonator Connector
+24V (Not mount)
+12 䊼 13.333MHz
PICPGM_EN
PIC +12V +24
CI Fi䡈ter
microcomputer
CI Fi䡈ter UART
+5VS
SON2
WUP_FAX-
voltage TELID
1W┬䜶䝛䝰䞊䝗 level
ືస voltage TELID2
level
5 4 3 2 1
2.
DC POWER SUPPLY
D F301 D
Voltage
Conversion
+
CN1 + 24VN
F101
~
~
-
N/F
A. AC power line diagram
DCCNT1
Power line diagram
F401
Voltage
F102 Conversion
+ 5Vo
AC PWB + 5VL
FW
Generating
Circuit
CN1 CN2 MSW
F1 Pattern Gap Pattern Gap
DCCNT2
AC IN
L
F2
N
Japan Pattern Gap Pattern Gap
C 200V C
WH-L WH-N
RY1
HL PWB
INT5V
WH PWB CN1
F3 F4 L1
HL_PR
RY1 L2
NC
NO
+24V
WH_CNT
B B
CN2 CN4 CN3 TD1 TD2 TD4
T1 G T1 G T1 G
6 6 6
drawer
THERMOSTAT TS_LM
LCC(OPTION) DESK(OPTION) CS SCN unit
A A
THERMOSTAT TS_UM
WARM HEATER SET : OPTION (Japan:STD)
THERMOSTAT TS_US
FUSING UNIT
5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Board to Board
MDM_ATXD ATXD TRP2+ D4- D+
29 29 4 4 4 4
MDM_ARXD ARXD TRP3+ D4+ D- KB3
30 30 5 3 3 3
MDM_ABITCLK ABITCLK TRP3- DGND4 GND
31 31 LAN 6 2 2 2
MDM_ASPCLK ASPCLK TRP2- SHELD4 GND KEYBOARD
CN1 32 32 7 SRA-21T-4 1 1 1
RGDT- RGDT- TRP4+ FGND P-GND
1 33 33 8 P-GND
TX+ MDM_CLK MDM_CLK TRP4-
2 34 34 PALR-06V PAP-06V-S GHR-06V-S SM06B-GHS-TB(LF)(SN)
RX+ AFE_RES- AFE_RES-
TO HANDSET 3 35 35 24-010139U13-1
RX- BBITCLK BBITCLK
4 36 36
TX- BSPCLK BSPCLK
5 37 37
(JAPAN ONLY) DG BTXD BTXD CN3
6 38 38
RHS- BRXD BRXD CN4
39 39 6
HDMUTE HDMUTE VBUS2
MD-S6100-90 40 40 5 1
RHS- RHS- D2- VBUS
4 2
D2+ D-
TX25-40P-12ST-H1E TX24-40R-10ST-H1E 3 3
SRA-01T-3.2 DGND2 D+
CN50 USB PWB 2 4
CN1 CN2 SHIELD2 GND
1 1
3R3V 5 1 1 FGND
2 VBUS VBUS UAR27-4K5J00
DSR 4 VBUS_WLAN 2 2 PHR-6 S6B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
3 D- D- FGND
RXD CN26 3 D-_WLAN 3 3
4 D+ D+
WIFI
CTS 1 2 D+_WLAN 4 4
5 GND GND
RTS VBUS_WLAN 2 1 DGND_WLAN
FRONT USB PWB
232C 6 SHIELD_WLAN
TXD D-_WLAN 3 CN1
7 UAR27-4K5J00 UAR27-4K5J00 IC㺔㺎㺢㺼㺶㺎㺞㺼㺎
DTR D+_WLAN 4 PAP-05V-S 1 CN2
8 DGND_WLAN NC
GND 5 2 1 1
SHIELD_WLAN VBUS4 VBUS VBUS
6 3 2 2 (ᾏእ)
BM08B-GHS-TBT(LF)(SN) VBUS4 D4- D- D-
7 4 3 3
D4- D4+ D+ D+
8 5 4 4
D4+ DGND4 GND GND
9 6
DGND4 SHIELD4
CN15 10 UAR27-4K5J00 UAR27-4K5J00
SHIELD4
1 GHR-10V-S CZHR-06V-Y BM06B-CZSS-1-TF(LF)(SN)
3R3V BM10B-GHS-TBT(LF)(SN)
2
DSR
3
RXD
4
CTS BU06P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) BU06P-TZ-S(LF)(SN)
5
RTS 1 6 6 1
232C 6 NC
TXD 2 NC 5 5 2
7 5V
DTR 3 VBUS4 4 4 3
8 D-
GND 4 D4- 3 3 4
IC㺔㺎㺢㺼㺶㺎㺞㺼㺎
D+
5 D4+ 2 2 5
BM08B-GHS-TBT(LF)(SN) D-GND
6 DGND4 1 1 6
SHIELD4 F-GND (᪥ᮏ)
CZHR-06V-Y CZHR-06V-S CZHR-06V-Y CZHR-06V-S
LSU PWB SCN MFPC PWB B. LSU
PCU PWB CN7 CN49
1 1
DGND DGND
2 2
CH0_N CH0_N
MX-xx50 series 3 3
CH0_P CH0_P
4 4
DGND DGND
CN2 5 5
CH1_N CH1_N
1 6 6
DGND CH1_P CH1_P
CN11 2 7 7
NPCU_TRG DGND DGND
A-12 3 8 8
(NC) JOBEND_INT CH2_N CH2_N
A-11 4 9 9
DGND NRSV_DAT CH2_P CH2_P
A-10 5 10 10
NPCU_TRG NSCK_LSU DGND DGND
A-9 6 11 11
JOBEND_INT NTRANS_DAT CLK_N CLK_N
A-8 7 12 12
NRSV_DAT NTRANS_RST CLK_P CLK_P
A-7 8 13 13
NSCK_LSU LSUASIC_RST DGND DGND
A-6 9 14 14
NTRANS_DAT TH2_LSU CH3_N CH3_N
A-5 10 15 15
NTRANS_RST TH1_LSU CH3_P CH3_P
A-4 11 16 16
LSUASIC_RST DGND DGND DGND
A-3 17 17
TH2_LSU CH4_N CH4_N
A-2 11CZ-6Y 18 18
TH1_LSU B11B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN)(V) CH4_P CH4_P
A-1 19 19
DGND DGND DGND
20 20
VSYNC_K VSYNC_K
12CZ-6Y CN3 21 21
VSYNC_C VSYNC_C
1 22 22
BEAMDETECT VSYNC_M VSYNC_M
B-12 2 23 23
SCL_LDD SCL_LDD VSYNC_Y VSYNC_Y
B-11 3 24 24
SDA_LDD SDA_LDD DGND DGND
B-10 4 25 25
3.3VN 3.3VN DGND(ECLK_LSU_N) DGND(ECLK_LSU_N)
B-9 5 26 26
DGND DGND DGND(ECLK_LSU_P) ECLK_LSU(_P)
B-8 6 27 27
5VN 5VN DGND DGND
B-7 7 28 28
DGND DGND HSYNC_LSU(_P) HSYNC_LSU(_P)
B-6 8 29 29
5VN 5VN DGND(HSYNC_LSU_N) DGND(HSYNC_LSU_N)
B-5 9 30 30
DGND DGND DGND DGND
B-4 10
24V2 24V
B-3 11 FH41-30S-0.5SH(05) FH48-30S-0.5SV
PGND PGND
B-2 12
24V2 24V
B-1 13
PGND PGND
12CZ-6H 13CZ-6Y
B24B-CZWHK-V-B-1(LF)(SN) CZWH-24V-S B13B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN)(V)
GND 41 41 GND
CN_AFE_SDO 40 40 CN_AFE_SDO
AFE_SDI 39 39 AFE_SDIO
AFE_SCLK 38 38 AFE_SCLK
AFE_CS 37 37 AFE_CS
RES_CCDAD 36 36 RES_CCDAD
GND 35 35 GND
A3.3V 34 34 A3.3V
A3.3V 33 33 A3.3V
A3.3V 32 32 A3.3V
A3.3V 31 31 A3.3V
A3.3V 30 30 A3.3V
A3.3V 29 29 A3.3V
GND 28 28 GND
A5V 27 27 A5V
A5V 26 26 A5V
A5V 25 25 A5V
GND 24 24 GND
A10V 23 23 A10V
A10V 22 22 A10V
GND 21 21 GND
CN_TA_N 20 20 CN_TA_N
CN_TA_P 19 19 CN_TA_P
GND 18 18 GND
CN_TB_N 17 17 CN_TB_N
CN_TB_P 16 16 CN_TB_P
GND 15 15 GND
CN_TC_N 14 14 CN_TC_N
CN_TC_P 13 13 CN_TC_P
GND 12 12 GND
CN_TCLK_N 11 11 CN_TCLK_N
CN_TCLK_P 10 10 CN_TCLK_P
GND 9 9 GND
CN_TD_N 8 8 CN_TD_N
CN_TD_P 7 7 CN_TD_P
GND 6 6 GND
CN_TE_N 5 5 CN_TE_N
CN_TE_P 4 4 CN_TE_P
CCD_SEL2 3 3 CCD_SEL2
CCD_SEL1 2 2 CCD_SEL1
GND 1 1 GND
FH48-50S-0.5SV FH48-50S-0.5SV
MX-xx50/xx60 series
CCD PWB
SCN MFPC PWB
Scanner motor LED DRIVER PWB LED PWB
CN42 6 1 CN2
1 5 2 MIM_XB 1
MIM_XB 3 (NC) CN1 LED_ANODE 1 LED_ANODE
MIM_B 2 4 GND 2 2 GND
3 3 4 MIM_B 1 3
MIM_A 5 MIM_A +24VPD LED_CATHODE/ 3 LED_CATHODE/
MIM_XA 4 2 MIM 2 +24VPD LED_ANODE/ 4 GHR-03V-S
1 6 (NC) 3 5
MIM_XA LAMP_ON/OFF GND
B04B-CZHK-B-1 4 GND LED_CATHODE 6
04CZ-6Y 06CK-6H-PC S6B-PH-K-S 5 GND
GHR-03V-S
5597-05APB7
CN28 Scanner home position sensor LED PWB
MHPS 3 1 MHPS 1 LED_ANODE
GND 2 2 GND 2 GND
5V_MHPS 1 3 +5V 3 LED_CATHODE/
CN43 MHPS
1 03CZ-6Y 03XR-6H-P GHR-03V-S
CN_AU_PNC B03B-CZHK-B-1
2 CN_AU_COPY
3 CN_AU_CA
4 CN_AU_READY
5 CN_AU_AUD
6 5V
7 GND
8 24V LED DRIVER PWB
Original cover SW
1 OCSW
SCN41 2 GND
OCSW 1 3 5VN+R OCSW
5V_OCSW 2 179228-3
GND 3
24V 4
MX-xx70 series
/SIZE_LED1 5
/SIZE_LED2 6
PHR-6
B6B-PH-K-S ORS-LED PWB
1 +24V
2 CN_NSIZE_LED1
3 CN_NSIZE_LED2
4 GND
SRA-21T-4
CN39 ORS-PD PWB
PDSEL0 1 1 PDSEL0
PDSEL1 2 2 PDSEL1
PDSEL2 3 3 PDSEL2
5V 4 4 5V
PD 5 5 PD
GND 6 6 GND
NC 7 PHR-6
B6B-PH-K-S
B7B-PH-K-S PHR-7
Paper feed rear sensor
1 C1 PFPD
2 GND
3 5VN+R C1 PFPD
03XR-6H-P
PCU PWB BU17P-TZ-S(LF)(SN)
CN21
1 (NC) 17 Cassette paper out sensor
2 (NC) 16 1 C1 PFD
C1 PFPD 15 3 C1 PFPD 15 2 GND
GND 14 4 GND 14 3 5VN+R C1 PFD
5VN+R 13 5 5VN+R 13 03XR-6H-P
C1 PFD 12 6 C1 PFD 12
GND 11 7 GND 11
5VN+R 10 8 5VN+R 10 Cassette upper limit sensor
Discharge lamp K C1 LUD 9 9 C1 LUD 9 1 C1 LUD
GND 3 GND 8 10 GND 8 2 GND
NC 2 5VN+R 7 11 5VN+R 7 3 5VN+R C1 LUD
DL_K DL_K 1 C1 PED 6 12 C1 PED 6 03XR-6H-P
GND 5 13 GND 5
03CK-6H-P 4 14 4
Discharge lamp C 5VN+R 5VN+R
DSW_C1 3 15 DSW_C1 3
GND 3
CN22 GND 2 16 GND 2 Cassette paper existence sensor
NC 2 5VN+R 1 17 5VN+R 1 1 C1 PED
DL_C 1 8 GND 17CZ-6H 17CZ-6Y 2 GND
DL_C 7 15CZ-6Y
03CK-6H-P DL_K B15B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN) RC13a RC13b 3 5VN+R C1 PED
6 GND 03XR-6H-P
Discharge lamp M 5 DL_C
GND 3 4 GND
NC 2 3 DL_M
DL_M DL_M 1 2 GND
Right lower door open/close switch
1 DL_Y 1 DSW_C1
03CK-6H-P
Discharge lamp Y 08CZ-6Y 2 GND
B08B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN) 3 5VN+R DSW_C1
GND 3 03XR-6H-P
NC 2
D. Paper feed, CSS1, Process, DV
DL_Y DL_Y 1
03CK-6H-P Japan : Standard
BU02P-TR-P-H(D)(LF)(SN)
Other than Japan : Option CN5
2 24V3 1 2 24V3
1 WH_CNT 2 1 WH_CNT
02CK-6H-P PHNR-02-H PAP-02V-S
WH PWB
B02B-PASK-1
Vertical transport clutch
1 Cassette existence sensor
CPFC1 2
CPFC1 24V3 4
02CZ-6Y NC
3 NC
2 GND
BU07P-TZ-S 1 C1 SS
C1 SS1
7 DVTYP_K 1
Toner control sensor K 6 2 04CK-6H-P B4B-PH-K-S
DVTYPSEL_K CN24
TSG_K 1 5 TSG_K 3
5VN 2 4 5VN 4 A-16
3 3 5 A-15 CPFC1 CN20
TCS_K TCS_K 24V3
TCS_K GND 4 2 GND 6 A-14 DVTYP_K (NC) A-17
ZHR-4 1 7 A-13 A-16 CN5
GND DVTYPSEL_K 24V3
CZHR-07V-Y 07CZ-6H A-12 TSG_K WH_CNT A-15 1 8 NC
A-11 5VN C1 SS4 A-14 2 7 HL_PR
A-10 TCS_K C1 SS3 A-13 3 6 HL_OUT_UM
A-9 GND C1 SS2 A-12 4 5 HL_OUT_LM
BU07P-TZ-S A-8 A-11 5
GND C1 SS1 4 HL_OUT_UW
7 DVTYP_C 1 A-7 DVTYP_C GND A-10 6 3 HL_OUT_US
HL PWB
Toner control sensor C 6 DVTYPSEL_C 2 A-6 DVTYPSEL_C HL_PR A-9 7 2 D-GND
TSG_C 1 5 TSG_C 3 A-5 TSG_C HLOUT_UM A-8 8 1 INT5V
5VN 2 4 5VN 4 A-4 5VN HLOUT_LM A-7 08CK-6H-PC
TCS_C 3 3 TCS_C 5 A-3 TCS_C HLOUT_UW A-6 B8B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
TCS_C GND 4 2 GND 6 A-2 GND HLOUT_US A-5
ZHR-4 1 GND 7 A-1 GND GND A-4
CZHR-07V-Y 07CZ-6H
16CZ-6Y INT5V A-3 Lift up motor
C1 LUM A-2 2 C1 LUM
P-GND A-1 1 P-GND
BU07P-TZ-S 02CK-6H-P C1 LUM
7 1 B-16 17CZ-6Y S2B-PH-K-S
Toner control sensor Y DVTYP_Y DVTYP_Y
6 DVTYPSEL_Y 2 B-15 DVTYPSEL_Y
1 5 3 B-14 8-292155-2 292254-2
TSG_Y TSG_Y TSG_Y
5VN 2 4 5VN 4 B-13 5VN DSW_F B-17 1 2 1 DSW_F(5V) 2 1
DSW_F(5V)
TCS_Y 3 3 TCS_Y 5 B-12 TCS_Y DSW_R_OUT B-16 2 1 2 DSW_R_OUT 1 PS-110 DSW_F(5V)
DSW_R_OUT
TCS_Y GND 4 2 GND 6 B-11 GND DSW_R_IN B-15
1 7 B-10 B-14 02XR-6H-P 02XR-6H-P 02XR-6H-P 179228-2
1TUD_K 1 3 1TUD_K 1
GND 2 2 GND 2
1TUD_K 5VN+R 3 1 5VN+R 3
MPWS 28 MPWS 8 1
4 24V1 24V1
MPLD1 27 MPLD1 7 2
5 GND GND
MPFD 26 MPFD 6 3
25 6 ADUM_H_D PFM_D
2TUD 2TUD PWM 5 4 PWM
24 7 MPED 4 5
MPED CW/CCW CW/CCW
23 8 2TPD 3 6 ADM_H
2TPD 5VN 5VN
22 9 ADUM_L_D 2 7
ADUML_BRAKE ENC_B ENC_B
21 10 ADUM_L_PWM 1 8
ADUML_PWM ENC_A ENC_A
20 11 ADUM_L_ENC_B 19CZ-6Y 08CZ-6Y
ADUML_ENC_B
19 12 ADUM_L_ENC_A S08B-CZHK-B-1
ADUML_ENC_A B19B-CZHK-B-1
18 13 APPD1
APPD1
17 14 DSW_ADU
DSW_ADU
16 15 APPD2 ADU paper exit sensor
APPD2
15 16 LPPD1 1
(NC)LPPD1 APPD2
14 17 PRTPD 2
PRTPD GND
13 18 5VO+R 3
5VO+R 5VN+R APPD2
12 19 POD3 03XR-6H-P
POD3
11 20 TFD3 CN4
TFD3
10 21 ADUGS 9
/ADUGS APPD2
9 22 5VN 8
5VN GND
5VN 8 23 5VN 7 ADU open/close switch
7 24 5VN+R
5VN 5VN DSW_ADU 6 1 DSW_ADU
ADUMH_BRAKE 6 25 5
ADUM_H_D GND 2 GND
ADUMH_PWM 5 26 4
ADUM_H_PWM 5VN+R 3 5VN+R DSW_ADU
ADUMH_CW/CCW 4 27 3
ADUM_H_CW/CCW APPD1 03XR-6H-P
ADUMH_ENC_B 3 28 2
ADUM_H_ENC_B GND
ADUMH_ENC_A 2 29 1
ADUM_H_ENC_A 5VN+R
GND 1 30 ADU paper enter sensor
GND
09CZ-6Y 1
B09B-CZHK-B-1 APPD1
11600S-30 11600S-30A-GFN4 2 GND
3 5VN+R APPD1
03XR-6H-P
PCU PWB
Multi manual paper feed pick up solenoid
CN28 CN1 1 MPFS 1
24V1(INT) 10 1 2 24V3 2
24V1(INT)
24V1(INT) 9 2 02XR-6H-P 179228-2 MPFS
24V1(INT) BU08P-TZ-S
24V1(INT) 8 3 8-292155-2
7 24V1(INT)
GND 4 1 MPFS 8
6 GND
GND 5 2 7 Multi manual paper feed paper enter sensor
GND 24V3
43
GND 5VN+R
B-4 DM_K_CK POD2 A-8
Drum motor K B-3 DM_K_D GND A-7
1 B-2 A-6 BU04P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) Delivery fan 2
24V1(INT) CW/CCW 5VN+R
2 B-1 A-5 4 4
GND DM_K_LD POFM2_CNT 1 POFM2_CNT 4 POFM2_LD
3 A-4 2 3 3 3
24V1(INT) 14CZ-6H GND GND GND
4 B28B-CZWHK-V-B-1(LF)(SN) A-3 2 2
GND CZWH-28V-S POFM2_LD 3 POFM2_LD 2 POFM2_CNT
5 A-2 1 1 1 POFM2
(NC) POFM2_V 4 POFM2_V POFM2_V
DM_K DM_K_CK 6 (NC) A-1
7 04CZ-6H CZHR-04V-Y SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC
DM_K_D 16CZ-6Y
CW/CCW 8
DM_K_LD 9
24V2 B-16
292132-9 09XR-6H-P
GND B-15 Revers motor
SBM_BRAKE B-14
PWM B-13 1 24V2
CW/CCW B-12 2 GND
5VN B-11 3 SBM_BR
ENC_B B-10 4 PWM
ENC_A B-9 5 CW/CCW
24V2 B-8 6 5VN
SBM
GND B-7 7 ENC_B
POM_BRAKE B-6 8 ENC_A
PWM B-5
B-4 08CZ-6Y S08B-CZHK-B-1
CW/CCW
5VN B-3
ENC_B B-2
ENC_A B-1
16CZ-6H
B32B-CZWHK-V-B-1(LF)(SN) CZWH-32V-S Delivery Change gateDelivery motor
1 24V2
2 GND
3 POM_BR
4 PWM
5 CW/CCW
6 5VN
POM
7 ENC_B
8 ENC_A
08CZ-6Y S08B-CZHK-B-1
CN101
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
D-GND
4
5VO
H. Power supply
5 CN48
5VL
6 7
5VL DGND
7 6
5VL DGND
VHR-7N 5
5VO
B7P-VH-B 4
5VL
3
5VL
2
24VN
1
PGND
VHR-7N
B7P-VH(LF)(SN)
CN1
1
N_DC
2
NC
3
L_DC
SRA-51T-4 SRA-51T-4
B2P3-VH-B VHR-3N
GND GND
CN6
1
L-HLIN SRA-21T-4
2
NC Japan : Standard
3
N-HLIN FGND
B2P3-VH-R VHR-3N-R 1 1
Other than Japan : Option WH-N(DESK1)
CN1 1
CN2 NEUTRAL
1 1 PS-250(RD)
NEUTRAL_OUT NEUTRA_OUT
2 2 MSW3
(NC) (NC)
3 3 1 1
LIVE_OUT LIVE_OUT LIVE L-WH
B03P-VL B03P-VL VLP-03V PS-250(RD) CN2 PS-187
MSW4 1 WHSW1
SRA-51T-4 L WH
G20 2
CN3 NC
100V 120V 3
L WH-SW
1
NEUTRAL_WH VHR-3N-R
2 B2P3-VH-R
(NC)
3 1
LIVE_WH L-WH
B2P3-VH-BK <Connector> PS-187
CN1 WHSW2
1
WH-L
2
NC CN3
3
WH-N
1 1 1
CN1 VHR-3N-BK WH-N(SCAN) WH-N(SCAN)
B2P3-VH-BK 2 2 2
NC WH-L(SCAN)
1 1 3
LIVE IN LIVE_WH WH-L(SCAN)
FGND
2 2
(NC)
ELR-02V ELP-02V
WH-SCN
3 3 B2P3-VH VHR-3N
NEUTRAL IN NEUTRAL_WH AC PWB
B03P-VL
INLET
SRA-51T-4
200V series G20
D1.25-M3(Ni) TS-L D1.25-M3(Ni)
GND2 GND1
MC PWB
FPS-187
I. Fusing
HL PWB TS-S
1 MC-K
Spring 1 N-HL(LM) 1 1 L-HL(LM) 1
SLP-01V
HL-LM SLR-01VF
SLR-01VF SLP-01V TS-M
F.G.
SRA-21T-3
CN2
PS-187
N-HL(US) 1 1 1
1 MC-CMY 2 N-HL(UM) HL-UM
Spring (NC) 2 N-HL(US) 2 1 L-HL(UM) 1
N-HL(UM) 3 2 2
VLP-03V-BK HL-US L-HL(US)
YLR-02VF YLP-02V
B03P-VL-K VLP-02V VLR-02V
CN1 1 L-HL(UM) 1
2 L-HL(US/LW) 2
24V1 1
Spring GB-K 3 L-HL(US/LM) 3
24V1 2
CN3
4 L-HL(UM) 4
GND 3
Jumper wire 4 1 YLR-04VF YLP-04V
/HV_DATA N-HL(UW)
/HV_CLK 5 2
Spring GB-C 6 (NC)
/HV_LD1 N-HL(LM) 3
NC(/HV_LD2) 7 VHR-3N
Jumper wire 8 B2P3-VH-B 1
HV_REM WEBEND
Process DV_REM 9 2
Spring GB-M 10 GND
MC_K_ERR 3 5VN+R
unit MC_CMY_ERR 11 179228-3
Jumper wire 11CZ-6Y
B11B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN) CN4
Spring GB-Y 1
L-HL(US/LM) Thermistor sub2_2
(NC) 2
3 3
L-HL(UM) 3 GND
Jumper wire VLP-03V-R 2 TH_SUB2_2 2
B03P-VL-RD 1 TH_SUB2_2_CS 1
SMR-03V-B
Spring DV-K SMP-03V-BC
TH_US1
Jumper wire 20S5R-RVE-K-NT-1G(LF)(SN) RVEP-20S5-K-N
1 N-HL(US) 1
Spring DV-C 2 N-HL(UM) 2 Thermistor main
3 3 3 3
N-HL(LM) GND
Jumper wire 4 4 2 2
L-HL(UM) TH_UM
5 5 1 1
Spring DV-M L-HL(US/LM) TH_UM_CS TH_UM
SMP-03V-BC
PCU PWB SMR-03V-B
Jumper wire
1 NC 1 Lower thermistor
Spring DV-Y CN10 2 2 2 2
WEBEND GND
A-15 3 3 1 1
24V1(INT) GND TH_LM
A-14 4 4 SMP-02V-BC SMR-02V-B TH_LM
24V1(INT) 5VN+R
A-13 5 GND 5
A-12 GND 6 6
Temperature-humidity sensor /HV_DATA TH_SUB2_2
A-11 7 TH_SUB2_2_CS 7
4 A-10 /HV_CLK CN3 8 8
TH_CL GND
3 A-9 /HV_LD1 9 9 Thermistor sub
GND A-18 TH_UM
2 A-8 /HV_LD2 WEBEND 10 10 2 2
HUD_CL A-17 TH_UM_CS GND
TH/HUD 1 A-7 HV_REM GND 11 11 1 1
5VN A-16 NC TH_US
A-6 DV_REM 5VN+R 12 12 SMP-02V-BC SMR-02V-B TH_US2
MC_K_ERR GND A-15 GND
04CK-6H-P A-5 A-14 13 13
MC_CMY_ERR TH_SUB2_2 TH_LM
A-4 A-13 14 GND 14
A-3 TH_CL TH_SUB2_2_CS 15 15
GND GND A-12 TH_US
A-2 A-11 16 WEBS 16 2 WEBS
A-1 HUD_CL TH_UM 17 17 1
5VN TH_UM_CS A-10 24V3 24V3
18 18 SMP-02V-BC
15CZ-6Y GND A-9 POD1
A-8 19 GND 19
TH_LM 20 20
GND A-7 5VN+R
B-15 (NC) TH_US A-6 Fusing rear sensor
20CZ-6Y RWMYP-20-K
B-14 VFM_LD WEBS A-5
B-13 A-4 1 POD1
GND 24V3 2
B-12 VFM_V POD1 A-3 GND
B-11 A-2 3 5VN+R
GND GND 179228-3
POD1
B-10 1TC_O-ERR 5VN+R A-1
B-9 18CZ-6Y
1TC_S-ERR
B-8 2TC_ERR
B-7 B-18 8-292155-4 Process fan 1
PTC_ERR (NC)
TC PWB B-6 HV_REM PROFM1_V B-17 1 PROFM1_V 4 1 PROFM1_V 1
B-5 B-16 2 3 2 2
Spring 1 1 5VN
TC unit 2TC 2 GND
2TC (PINK) 3 REGS_F_LED
4 REGS_F REGS_F/PCS_F
5 PCS_F
PS-187 05XR-6H-P
Spring 1
PTC
PTC (WHITE)
Fusing roller pressure release sensor
Jumper wire 1 HLPCD
2 GND
Spring VCASE 3 5VN+R HLPCD
03XR-6H-P
Jumper wire
F.G.
Spring DHV
SRA-21T-3
DSPF document upper limit sensor
3
5V_SPED1
2
GND
CN40 CN5 CN4 CN1 1
CCN10 SPED1 SPED1
1 1 1 1 03XR-6H-P
GND GND GND GND A-1
2 2 2 2 5V_SPED1
GND GND AFE_SDO AFE_SDO A-2
3 3 3 3 GND
24V 24V AFE_SDIO AFE_SDIO A-3 DSPF document random sensor
4 4 4 4 D_SPED1
24V 24V AFE_SCLK AFE_SCLK
J. DSPF
A-4 3
5 5 5 5 5V_SPRDMD 5V_SPRDMD
24V 24V RES_CCDAD RES_CCDAD A-5 2
6 6 6 6 GND GND
24V 24V CCD_SEL CCD_SEL A-6 1
7 7 7 7 D_RANDOM SPRDMD
12V 12V GND GND
5V
8 8
5V A3.3V
8 8
A3.3V
/D_SPFC
A-7
A-8
03XR-6H-P
SPRDMD
9 9 9 9 +24V
5VO 5VO A3.3V A3.3V A-9
10 10 10 10 (NC)
5VO_DUTY 5V_SPF A3.3V A3.3V DSPF document feed clutch
11 11 11 11 09CZ-6Y
3.3V 3.3V A3.3V A3.3V 2
12 12 12 12 /D_SPFC
3.3V 3.3V A3.3V A3.3V 1
13 13 13 13 +24V
GND GND GND GND 02CZ-6H
14 14 14 14
GND GND A5V
15 15
A5V
SPFC
PHDR-14VS-2 PHDR-14VS-2 A5V A5V
B14B-PHDSS-B B14B-PHDSS-B 16 16
A5V A5V DSPF upper door open/close sensor
17 17
GND GND 3
18 18 5V_SCOV
CN35 CN6 A10V A10V 2
19 19 GND
A10V A10V 1
1 1 20 20 CCN10 SCOV
NCTS_SCN NRTS_DSPF GND GND
GND
2 2
GND TA_N
21 21
TA_N B-1
03XR-6H-P
SCOV
3 3 22 22 5V_SCOV
NRTS_SCN NCTS_DSPF TA_P TA_P B-2
4 4 23 23 GND
DSDATA_3P DSDATA_3P GND GND B-3 DSPF document feed tray upper limit sensor
5 5 24 24 D_SCOV
RXD_SCN TXD_DSPF TB_N TB_N B-4 3
6 6 25 25 5V_STUD 5V_STUD
DSDATA_3N DSDATA_3N TB_P TB_P B-5 2
7 7 26 26 GND GND
TXD_SCN RXD_DSPF GND GND B-6 1
8 8 27 27 D_STUD STUD
GND GND TC_N TC_N
GND
9 9
GND TC_P
28 28
TC_P
5V_SPPD1
B-7
B-8
03XR-6H-P
STUD
10 10 29 29 GND
DSCLK_P DSCLK_P GND GND B-9
11 11 30 30 D_SPPD1
DSPF_INT DSPF_INT TCLK_N TCLK_N DSPF document pass sensor 1
12 12 31 31 09CZ-6H
DSCLK_N DSCLK_N TCLK_P TCLK_P 3
13 13 32 32 B18B-CZWHK-B-1 CZWH-18V-S 5V_SPPD1
GND GND GND GND 2
14 14 33 33 GND
GND GND TD_N TD_N 1
15 15 34 34 SPPD1
RES RES TD_P TD_P
DSDATA_2P
16 16
DSDATA_2P GND
35 35
GND
03XR-6H-P
SPPD1
17 17 36 36
DSPFUP DSPFUP TE_N TE_N
18 18 37 37
DSDATA_2N DSDATA_2N TE_P TE_P
19 19 38 38
TXD_DSPF_LOG D_CPU_TXD GND GND
20 20 39 39
GND GND AFE_CS AFE_CS
21 21 40 40
SPED SPED GND GND 292254-3 DSPF document pass sensor 2
22 22
DSDATA_1P DSDATA_1P
23 23 FH48-40S-0.5SV FH48-40S-0.5SV 3 1 3
GND NLVDS_STBY GND GND
24 24 2 2 2
DSDATA_1N DSDATA_1N SPPD2 SPPD2
25 25 1 3 1
NC/(RXD_DSPF_LOG) D_CPU_RXD 5V_SPPD2 5V_SPPD2 SPPD2
26 26 03XR-6H-P
GND GND CN1001 DSPF cooling fan motor
27 27 03XR-6H-P 173977-3
NPOF NPOF
28 28 1
DSDATA_0P
29 29
DSDATA_0P SPFFAN_+V
2
DSPF CCD PWB DSPF document pass sensor 3
GND GND SPFFAN_GND CN1
30 30 3 3
DSDATA_0N DSDATA_0N SPFFAN_SIG SPFFAN 5V_SPPD3
A-1 2
PHDR-30VS-1 PHDR-30VS-1 292132-3 179227-1 GND GND
B30B-PHDSS-B B30B-PHDSS-B A-2 1
SPPD2 SPPD3
A-3
5V_SPPD2
A-4
03XR-6H-P
SPPD3
5V_SPPD3
A-5
SCN MFPC PWB GND
SAA-21T-3.5L SRA-21T-4 A-6 DSPF document pass sensor 4
SPPD3
A-7 3
5V_SPPD4 5V_SPPD4
A-8 2
DSPF document feed tray lower limit sensor CCN13 GND GND
A-9 1
SPPD4 SPPD4
3 A-1 A-10
5V_STLD
2 A-2
5V_STLD 5V_SPPD5
A-11
03XR-6H-P
SPPD4
GND GND GND
1 A-3 A-12
STLD STLD D_STLD SPPD5
03XR-6H-P A-4 A-13
5V_SPF 5V_SLCOV
A-5 A-14
GND GND BU03P-TR-P-H DSPF document pass sensor 5
A-6 A-15
DSPF document empty detector D_SPED2 SLCOV
A-7 3 1 3
(NC) 15CZ-6Y 5V_SPPD5 5V_SPPD5
3 A-8 2 2 2
5V_SPF (NC) GND GND
2 08CZ-6Y 1 3 1
GND SPPD5 SPPD5 SPPD5
1 03XR-6H-P
SPED2 SPED2
03XR-6H-P 03CK-6H-PC 03KR-6H-PC
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
1. TOOL LIST
Name PARTS CODE NOTE
Y toner powder CKOG-0345DS51 Primary transfer belt
Conductive grease (FLOIL GE-676) UKOG-0012QSZZ For shaft
Grease (FLOIL GP-501MR) UKOG-0013QSZZ Paper feed roller shaft
Grease (MOLYKOTE X5-6020) UKOG-0158FCZZ Scanner rail
Gray test chart UKOG-0162FCZZ
Grease (JFE552) UKOG-0235FCZZ
Grease (HANARL FL-955R) UKOG-0299FCZZ
Grease (FLOIL G-313S) UKOG-0307FCZZ
Stearic acid powder UKOG-0312FCZZ OPC drum
Color copy test chart UKOG-0326FCZZ / UKOG-0326FC11
Shading adjustment sheet UKOG-0333FCZZ DSPF
Scanner adjustment chart UKOG-0356FCZZ
3. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB, HDD and the mSATA SSD
A. SCN MFP PWB replacement procedure (work flow)
Registered user information will not be recovered if the SCN MFP PWB is affected by U2-05 trouble. (*1)
1) Attach the EEPROM, mSATA SSD etc. of the SCN MFP PWB on the service parts SCN MFP PWB and install it to the main unit.
Make sure to execute even if the fax option is not installed on the machine.
MX-4070N OTHERS 13 – 1
B. Procedures necessary for HDD replacement
Note for HDD replacement
• Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data backup is possible before replace-
ment, perform data backup and then replace the HDD.
• If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up.
• The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD.
Contents of this chapter
• HDD storage data and backup
• Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can be backed up
• Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD
(1) HDD storage data and backup
Some HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other data cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other storage data
cannot.
If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to the HDD
storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD.
a. HDD storage data list
MX-4070N OTHERS 13 – 2
(2) Replacement procedures when HDD data can be (3) Replacement procedures when the HDD storage data
backed up cannot be backed up due to breakdown
a. Work contents and procedures a. Display when HDD breakdown
When a trouble occurs in the HDD, the error code display of E7-03 is
When a new HDD
popped up.
(blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
Procedures used, or when a HDD which is (used in the same In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDD must
normal but a program error model) is used * be replaced.
occurs in it is used.
b. Work contents and procedures
Step 1 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement.
(Servicing) When a new HDD
Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup (blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB Procedures used, or when a HDD which is (used in the same
memory.) normal but a program error model) is used *
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 1, 2, 3 occurs in it is used.
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
Step 1 Install a HDD to the machine, Install a HDD to the
authentication data))
and boot the complex machine. machine, and boot the
Step 2 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User or Formatting is automatically complex machine.
servicing) performed.
Back up the data to PC with Web page.
Step 2 The trouble code, U2-05,
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 6, 11 (JOB
is displayed. Cancel
LOG data, Document filing data))
with SIM16.
Step 3 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use SIM66-62
Step 3 Since a blank HDD is Use Sim62-1 to format the
to backup the image data from the mSATA SSD to the USB
automatically formatted, there is HDD.
memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file type, and
no need to perform formatting
cannot be restored to the machine. The backup data are given
procedure with SIM.
to the user.)
Step 4 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use SIM66-62
Step 4 Replace the HDD.
to backup the image data from the mSATA SSD to the USB
Step 5 Boot the complex machine. Boot the complex memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file type, and
Formatting is automatically machine. cannot be restored to the machine. The backup data are given
performed. to the user.)
Step 6 The trouble code, U2-05, Step 5 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory
is displayed. Cancel is cleared in order to keep compliance between the HDD data
with SIM16. and the image related memory and to prevent malfunctions.
Step 7 Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format the (The memory must be cleared not only in the FAX model but
automatically formatted, there is HDD. in the scanner and the Internet Fax models.)
no need to perform formatting
procedure with SIM. With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory
Step 8 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory shipping.
is cleared in order to keep compliance between the HDD data
and the image related memory and to prevent malfunctions.
(The memory must be cleared not only in the FAX model but in
the scanner and the Internet Fax models.)
Step 11 Import the data backed up in Step 1.
Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup to
import.
(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 1, 2, 3
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
authentication data))
Step 12 Import the data backed up with the Web page function in Step
2.
Import enable data: Document filing data, User font, Use
macro
(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be
imported.)
MX-4070N OTHERS 13 – 3
C. Procedures necessary for mSATA SSD replacement
(1) mSATA SSD data and backup
Some mSATA SSD storage data can be backed up, and some other cannot. Some mSATA SSD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other can-
not.
If the mSATA SSD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the mSATA SSD refer-
ring to the storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the mSATA SSD.
Procedures
Step1 Use SIM56-2 to back up the mSATA SSD data to the USB
flash drive.
Step2 Back up the mSATA SSD data by the device cloning function
when the operation panel screen is customized.
Step3 Replace the mSATA SSD with a new one.
Step4 Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
Step5 Use SIM56-02 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).
Step6 Restore the data backed up in procedure 2) by using the
device cloning function.
MX-4070N OTHERS 13 – 4
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
a
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm Sn-In-Ag-Bi i
Sn-Cu-Ni n
Sn-Ag-Sb s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag
Trademark acknowledgements
x Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0,
Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows® 7, Windows® 8,
Windows® 8.1, Windows® Server 2003, Windows® Server 2008,
Windows® Server 2012 and Internet Explorer®
are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
and other countries.
x PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
x Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Laser Writer, and Safari are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Apple Inc.
x IBM, PC/AT, and Power PC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
x Acrobat® Reader Copyright® Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
x PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
x Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
x All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions Company
Quality Assurance and Environmental Affairs Unit
CS Promotion Department